8288 488 000

Reference Manual
24 Track Digital Recorder

Model

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Fostex D2424LV.
The D2424LV is a digital recorder using a 3.5 inch E-IDE hard disk recording media for recording/
playback/editing in 24 real tracks plus 32 additional tracks.
In addition to non-compression recording at quantization 16 bit/44.1kHz or 48kHz, 24 bit/44.1kHz
or 48kHz, 24 bit/88.2kHz or 96kHz, the D2424LV is also equipped with adat input/output (by
switching from S/P DIF).
Besides analog simultaneous record/playback, because it also complies with digital recording (S/P
DIF or adat) using DATA input/output and simultaneous recording of analog input plus digital input
(S/P DIF or adat), a full digital recording system can be built by combining the D2424LV with various
digital mixers.
In regards to save/load of song data, in addition to using adat digital signals and S/P DIF digital
signals, high speed backup of FDMS-3 Ver. 3.0/WAV file through the standard feature SCSI connec-
tor, is also possible.
Furthermore, by installing an optional Model 9044 (BAY+CADDY), an E-IDE hard disk for backup or
the optional Model 9046 (DVD-RAM drive) can be installed enabling high speed backup of FDMS-3
Ver. 3.0/WAV files.
For optional units, Model 8346 TC/SYNC card is available and these will also comply to phasing of
the standard feature WORD clock and also phasing against slave control by external LTC and VIDEO
reference signals.
Please carefully read through this manual together with the separate "Quick Operation Guide" for long
and satisfying operation of this equipment.
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Safety Instruction/Contents)

CAUTION:
CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
DO NOT OPEN
ATTENTION:
POUR EVITER LES CHOCS ELECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU'
AU FOND.
NO USER - SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral
triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of
uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure
that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.

"WARNING" The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended

to alert the user to the presence of important operating and
"TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature
DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR accompanying the appliance.

MOISTURE."

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10. Power Sources - The appliance should be connected to a power
supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or
1. Read Instructions - All the safety and operating instructions as marked on the appliance.
should be read before the appliance is operated. 11. Grounding or Polarization - The precautions that should be taken
2. Retain Instructions - The safety and operating instructions so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is
should be retained for future reference. not defeated.
3. Heed Warnings - All warnings on the appliance and in the 12. Power Cord Protection - Power supply cords should be routed
operating instructions should be adhered to. so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items
4. Follow Instructions - All operating and use instructions should placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords
be followed. at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they
5. Water and Moisture - The appliance should not be used near exit from the appliance.
water - for example, near a bathtub, washbowl, kitchen sink, 13. Cleaning - The appliance should be cleaned only as
laundry tub, in a wet basement, or near a swimming pool, and recommended by the manufacturer.
the like. 14. Nonuse Periods - The power cord of the appliance should be
6. Carts and Stands - The appliance should be used only with a unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of
cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. time.
15. Object and Liquid Entry - Care should be taken so that objects
do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through
openings.
16. Damage Requiring Service - The appliance should be serviced
by qualified service personnel when:
An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care.
A. The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged; or
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause B. Objects have fallen, or liquid has been spilled into the appliance; or
the appliance and cart combination to overturn. C. The appliance has been exposed to rain; or
D. The appliance does not appear to operate normally or
7. Wall or Ceiling Mounting - The appliance should be mounted to exhibits a marked change in performance; or
a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. E. The appliance has been dropped, or the enclosure damaged.
8. Ventilation - The appliance should be situated so that its location 17. Servicing - The user should not attempt to service the appliance
or position dose not interfere with its proper ventilation. beyond that described in the operating instructions.
For example, the appliance should not be situated on a bed, All other servicing should be referred to qualified service
sofa, rug, or similar surface that may block the ventilation personnel.
openings; or, placed in a built-in installation, such as a bookcase 18. The appliance should be situated away from drops of water or
or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation spray of water.
openings. 19. Objects containing liquid such as vase must not be put on the
9. Heat - The appliance should be situated away from heat sources appliance.
such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appliances 20. The appliance is not completely isolated from the power supply
(including amplifiers) that produce heat. even if the power switch is at off position.

2
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Safety Instruction/Contents)

Contents
Main Features..............................................................................................................................................................7
Precautions.......................................................................................................................................................................8

Names and Functions....................................................................................................................9

Front panel section......................................................................................................................................................................10
Detachable controller section....................................................................................................................................................11
Rear panel section.......................................................................................................................................................................18
Display section.............................................................................................................................................................................19
Display shown when the power is turned on................................................................................................19
Preset display.....................................................................................................................................................20
Switching the display using the [DISP SEL] key.............................................................................................21
Switching the time base display using the [SHIFT] key and [DISP SEL] key..............................................21
Changing programs using the [PGM SEL] key...............................................................................................21
Warning display................................................................................................................................................22

Before Starting..............................................................................................................................24
Time Base.....................................................................................................................................................................................24
Recording method and REMAIN indicator...............................................................................................................................25
Managing songs by program change function.......................................................................................................................26
Real tracks and Additional tracks..............................................................................................................................................27
Input monitoring and playback monitoring.............................................................................................................................28
Audio file and event.....................................................................................................................................................................29

Formatting and Optimizing disks...............................................................................................31

Formatting a current drive disk..................................................................................................................................................31
Formatting a brand new hard disk (Current drive).....................................................................................32
Reformatting the current drive or newly formatting the backup drive...................................................33
Formatting a backup disk (SCSI disk or optional DVD-RAM disk)........................................................................................33
Optimizing the disk......................................................................................................................................................................34

Handling Programs......................................................................................................................35
Creating a new program.............................................................................................................................................................35
Duplicating a program................................................................................................................................................................36
Using a program change function.............................................................................................................................................37
Deleting a program......................................................................................................................................................................37
Editing a program title.................................................................................................................................................................38
Changing the program FS..........................................................................................................................................................39

Punch In/Out..................................................................................................................................40
What is Punch In/Out recording.................................................................................................................................................40
Auto Punch In/Out.......................................................................................................................................................................40
Preparation...............................................................................................................................................40
Rehearsing Auto Punch In/Out.......................................................................................................................41
Auto Punch In/Out Take..................................................................................................................................42
Single undo/redo auto punch in/out............................................................................................................42
Manual Punch In/Out...................................................................................................................................................................43
Preparation...............................................................................................................................................43
Rehearsing Manual Punch In/Out..................................................................................................................43
Manual Punch In/Out Take.............................................................................................................................44
Single undo/redo manual punch in/out.......................................................................................................44

3
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Safety Instruction/Contents)

Recording Digital data..................................................................................................................45

Digital recording from an external digital device...................................................................................................................45
Digital recording to an external digital device........................................................................................................................47
Connecting a Digital Mixer........................................................................................................................................................48

Recording to a Metronome Sound.............................................................................................49

Preparation............................................................................................................................................................................................49
Recording to a metronome sound...........................................................................................................................................49

Storing a Locate Point..................................................................................................................51

Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys...................................................................................................52
Storing in real-time..........................................................................................................................................52
Editing and stored data........................................................................................................ ..........................52
Storing and editing LOCATE key.............................................................................................................................................53
Storing in real-time..........................................................................................................................................53
Edit and re-store data that is already stored................................................................................................54

Locate Function.............................................................................................................................55
Direct Locate...............................................................................................................................................................................55
Auto Play function......................................................................................................................................................................56
Auto Return function.................................................................................................................................................................56
Auto Repeat function.................................................................................................................................................................57

Chain Play Function......................................................................................................................58

Setup of the Chain Play List......................................................................................................................................................59
Setup of the Chain Play Mode...................................................................................................................................................60
Specify the Program and Execute Chain Play........................................................................................................................61

Cue & Review Function................................................................................................................62

Cue & Review function using the [REWIND] and [F FWD] buttons......................................................................................62
Cue & Review function using the Shuttle dial.........................................................................................................................62
Digital scrubbing using the envelope function......................................................................................................................62

Preview Function...........................................................................................................................64
Executing the preview function................................................................................................................................................65
Trimming the sound while previewing....................................................................................................................................65

Multiple Undo Function................................................................................................................66

Using the Multiple Undo function.............................................................................................................................................67

Editing Tracks................................................................................................................................68
Copy & Paste and Move & Paste..............................................................................................................................................68
Storing the edit point......................................................................................................................................69
Checking and adjusting the edit points........................................................................................................69
Executing Copy (or Move)..............................................................................................................................69
Checking the clipboard data..........................................................................................................................69
Executing Paste..........................................................................................................................................................................70
Single undo/redo Paste...................................................................................................................................70
Copy & Paste between programs.............................................................................................................................................71
Checking the clipboard data..................................................................................................................71

4
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Safety Instruction/Contents)

Erase......................................................................................................................................................................................................72
Storing the edit points.............................................................................................................................72
Checking and adjusting the edit points.........................................................................................................73
Executing Erase...........................................................................................................................................................................73
Single undo/redo Erase....................................................................................................................................73
Track Exchange...........................................................................................................................................................................74
Executing track exchange................................................................................................................................74
Registering the Track name.......................................................................................................................................................76

MIDI Sync Function.......................................................................................................................77

MIDI clock sync system..............................................................................................................................................................77
Connecting external equipment.....................................................................................................................77
Setup of the recorder........................................................................................................................................78
Confirming the MIDI clock sync......................................................................................................................78
Executing of recording.....................................................................................................................................79
MTC sync/MIDI machine control system..................................................................................................................................79
Setup to external equipment...........................................................................................................................80
Setup of external equipment...........................................................................................................................80
Setup of the recorder........................................................................................................................................80
Confirming MTC sync/MMC...........................................................................................................................81
Executing of recording.....................................................................................................................................81
Multitrack system by the slave mode........................................................................................................................................82
Equipment interconnections..........................................................................................................................82
Setup of the recorder (#1): <Master>.............................................................................................................82
Setup of the recorder (#2) and (#3): <Slave>...............................................................................................83
Check chase lock...............................................................................................................................................84
Selecting a record track....................................................................................................................................84
Executing of recording.....................................................................................................................................84
External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode.....................................................................................................85
Connection to external equipment................................................................................................................85
Setup of external equipment...........................................................................................................................85
Setup of the recorder........................................................................................................................................85
Confirming chase lock......................................................................................................................................86
Executing of recording.....................................................................................................................................86

Saving and Loading Song Data..................................................................................................87

About saved and loaded data.....................................................................................................................................................87
Saving the data using a adat or S/P DIF digital signal.............................................................................................................89
Connecting an external device........................................................................................................................89
Setting up an external device..........................................................................................................................89
Executing the save operation..........................................................................................................................89
Loading the data using a adat or S/P DIF digital signal...........................................................................................................91
Connecting the external device......................................................................................................................91
Setting up an external device..........................................................................................................................91
Executing the load operation..........................................................................................................................91
Saving the deta using SCSI........................................................................................................................................................93
Connecting a SCSI device.................................................................................................................................93
Formatting a SCSI disk......................................................................................................................................94
Saving data of an individual program...........................................................................................................95
Saving the data using SCSI........................................................................................................................................................97
Load the data saved on one removable disk.................................................................................................97
Load the data saved on several removable disks.........................................................................................98
Loading the data using IDE2 (E-IDE hard disk or optional DVD-RAM).................................................................................99
Saving data of FDMS-3 Version 3.0.................................................................................................................99
Loading data of FDMS-3 Version 3.0............................................................................................................100
Save/Load by "WAV" file..........................................................................................................................................................101
Saving of "WAV" files.....................................................................................................................................102
Loading "WAV" files......................................................................................................................................104

5
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Safety Instruction/Contents)

Changing the Initial Setting (SETUP mode)..........................................................................107

Selecting SETUP menu.............................................................................................................................................................108
Time Signature Setting.............................................................................................................................................................109
Storing a time signature.................................................................................................................................109
Modifying (or deleting) stored time signatures.........................................................................................110
Clearing all time signature and tempo settings..........................................................................................110
Changing the bar at ABS "0" of the time base.............................................................................................110
Setting a Tempo.........................................................................................................................................................................111
Checking the stored tempo setting..............................................................................................................111
Storing a tempo value....................................................................................................................................111
Modifying (or deleting) stored tempo settings..........................................................................................112
Setting the Metronome function..............................................................................................................................................112
Setting a Preroll Value...............................................................................................................................................................113
Setting MIDI Sync Output Signal.............................................................................................................................................114
Setting an MTC Frame Rate......................................................................................................................................................114
Setting an MTC Offset Value....................................................................................................................................................115
Setting Offset Mode...................................................................................................................................................................116
Setting the Slave Type..............................................................................................................................................................117
Setting the Record Protect function........................................................................................................................................117
Setting Digital Input...................................................................................................................................................................118
Setting Digital Output................................................................................................................................................................119
Setting BAR/BEAT Resolution Mode......................................................................................................................................120
Setting the MIDI Device Number..............................................................................................................................................121
Setting the Operating Clock.....................................................................................................................................................122
Checking the Number of Track Events...................................................................................................................................123
Setup of the Auto EE mode......................................................................................................................................................124
Setup of the Foot switch function............................................................................................................................................124
Setup of the stop function at the mark point..........................................................................................................................125
Setup input/output Balance/Unbalance.................................................................................................................................126
Drive Format Information.........................................................................................................................................................127
Drive Setting...............................................................................................................................................................................129
Setup of the display contrast level..........................................................................................................................................130
Setup of 0 file recording function............................................................................................................................................131
Converting the additional track format...................................................................................................................................132

Others.............................................................................................................................................133
MIDI Implementation Chart....................................................................................................................................133
MMC Command List...............................................................................................................................................134
Inquiry Message List..............................................................................................................................................134
Fostex MIDI System Exclusive Message........................................................................................... .................135
Status Request.................................................................................................................................................136
Data Type.........................................................................................................................................................138
Explanation on the Command/Mode set....................................................................................................140
The Status Request/Command.....................................................................................................................142
Explanation on the Status Reply...................................................................................................................143
Maintenance.............................................................................................................................................................145
Specifications........................................................................................................................................................145

APPENDIX (Operational manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

6
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Main features/Precautions)

Main features
The unit’s recorder section uses a recording format called FDMS-3 Ver 3.0 (Fostex Disk Management System-
3). It uses an E-IDE hard disk as the recording media.

• A removable cartridge for easy installation and • Save/load of FDMS-3 or WAV file is possible by
replacement of the hard disk at the front panel is using the E-IDE hard disk for backup or the
employed. optional DVD-RAM drive (Model 9046).
• Equipped with 24-channel ANALOG inputs and • In addition to cueing by Jog/Shuttle dial, digital
outputs, which may be powerful for live recording, scrubbing using the envelope function is also
etc. possible.
• By installing the optional Model 9044 (BAY + • MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer can be
CADDY), an E-IDE hard disk for backup can then transmitted according to the internal
be installed. Furthermore, it will also be possible programmable Tempo Map. You can set up a
to install the optional DVD-RAM drive (Model 9046). synchronization system with a sequencer or a
rhythm machine without wasting a track.
• The recorder features non-destructive audio
editing (a great advantage of digital recording) • You can use the recorder as a sync slave machine
such as Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase, etc. by sending MTC from a connected device.
You can choose Time Base (ABS or MTC) or MIDI
• The recorder supports MTC, MMC, and Fostex
bar/beat/clock as the recorder.
System Exclusive Message, which allows for
• Complies to various sampling frequencies such as advanced control and high-precision
44.1kHz 16bit/24bit, 48kHz 16bit/24bit, 88.2kHz synchronization from external sequencing
24bit and 96kHz 24bit. In addition, this recorder software. You can set the device number and MTC
contain an “FS converting function” which makes it frame rate for MMC and Fostex System Exclusive
possible to change the sampling frequency of Message. Also, “MTC Offset function” and “Offset
individual programs to meet application Mode function” are useful for setting up a sync
requirements. environment using an external sequencing
software.
• It contains the “Track exchange function” to allow
exchanges between real tracks or between real • Auto Punch In/Out and Manual Punch In/Out
track and the additional track. functions offer two modes: “Take” for a real
recording, and “Rehearsal” for monitoring the part
• A “Preview function” allows for an intuitive fine-
between the in and out points.
adjustment of an editing point (locate point).
• The “Program Select function” enables you to select
• “Single undo/redo” for reprocessing record/edit
a song from up to 99 songs and name the songs.
mistakes and “Multiple undo” by time jump is
possible (On/off can be set when formatting). • A “Bar/Beat Resolution function” is used to edit
audio at the beginning of the beat (round up or
• A “Vari Pitch function” allows you to fine-tune the
round off to a beat).
pitch.
• The “Metronome function” can be used as a rhythm
• The “Digital input setup function”, to allow digital
guide for recording.
recording of S/P DIF digital signals from CD/MD,
and adat digital signals from adat equipment, are • Various edit functions using an edit point (locate
provided. point), such as Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase,
Auto Punch In/Out, Auto Locate, are available. You
• A “Digital output setup function” is provided to
can also locate ABS 0 or REC END regardless of the
digitally output, by selecting from the real track,
edit point (locate point).
any 2 output sources (S/P DIF) or 8 output sources
(adat). • A maximum of 99 Locate Pointers can be
programmed for a LOCATE only feature.
• Contains the “Additional track format conversion”
Simply select the LOCATE number desired for swift
function making it possible in “V2 (56)” <-> “V1 (24)”
location.
conversions.
• You can set a preroll time of 0 to 10 seconds.
• You can also use the DATA INPUT and OUTPUT
connectors to an external DAT or adat, and to save • A “Disk Remain Display function” offers a clear
and load song data (audio data and SETUP mode indication of available recording time and disk
settings) to and from the DAT or adat. space (in mono track recording). You can choose
the Time Base from ABS, MTC, and BAR/BEAT/CLK.
• High-speed SCSI Save/Load is also an option by
connecting a non-DAT or adat SCSI backup drive.
WAV file Save/Load is possible by using a DOS
formatted SCSI type disk.

7
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Main features/Precautions)

Precautions
• Be sure to connect the recorder to the power supply • Do not install the recorder in locations subject to
specified in the Specifications section of this the following:
Reference Manual. Do not use an AC outlet of any
other voltage. * Extremely high or low temperature, or
significant changes in temperature.
• Do not connect the recorder to the same AC outlet * Excessive humidity or dust.
to which devices that could generate noise (such * Excessive changes in power supply voltage.
as a large motor or dimmer), or the devices that * Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking
consume a large amount of power (such as an air surfaces.
conditioning system or large electric heater) are * Near a strong magnetic field (such as a TV or
connected. speaker).

• If you use the recorder in an area with a different • If you move the recorder from a place with an
power voltage, first consult your dealer or the excessively low temperature to a warm place, or if
nearest FOSTEX service station. You can use the you use the recorder in a room in which the
recorder with a power frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz. temperature varies significantly during winter,
condensation may occur on the hard disk or other
• It is very dangerous to use a power cord that is parts. In such cases, leave the recorder for about
frayed or damage. In such a case, stop using the an hour in the new location before you turn on
recorder immediately and ask your dealer to repair the power.
the cord.
Note on repair
• To avoid possible electric shock and damage to
the recorder, avoid contact with water or other • This recorder does not use any parts that users
liquids, or do not handle the power plug while can repair easily. Contact your dealer or the
your hands are wet. nearest FOSTEX service station to ask about repairs.

• To prevent possible electric shock and damage to • Use the packing carton designed for the recorder
the recorder, do not remove the main unit cover when you transport the recorder to the dealer for
or reach the inside the unit. repair or return.
If you have discarded the packing box, try to pack
• Do not let water or other liquid, or metal objects the recorder completely using shock absorbing
such aspins, accidentally enter the inside of the materials. Fostex is not responsible for malfunction
recorder because this may lead to electric shock or damage due to incomplete packaging or caused
or damage. Should water enter the inside of the during transport.
recorder, remove the power plug from the AC
outlet, and consult your dealer or the nearest About copyrights
FOSTEX service station.
• It is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD
• To prevent damage to the recorder, be sure to recording or video images or audio data for which
power on the connected devices first, then turn copyright is possessed by a third party for
on the power to the recorder. commercial purposes such as contents, broadcasts,
sales, or distribution- any purpose other than for
• Before turning the power off to the recorder, first your personal pleasure.
quit SETUP mode and make sure that the recorder
section is stopped. About damage
Especially, never attempt to turn off the power to
• FOSTEX is not responsible for any “direct damage”
the recorder while the hard disk is accessing data
or “indirect damage” caused by using the recorder.
(the HD ACCESS LED is lit or flashing). Otherwise,
not only will you lose recorded data, but you may
damage to the recorder. Notes on replacing the internal lithium battery
FOSTEX is not responsible for the data lost during • A lithium battery for operating the internal clock
operation of the recorder. is contained inside the recorder.
Under normal operating conditions, life of the
• Before you change the location of the recorder, lithium battery is about 3 years and it must be
pack the recorder in the shipping carton or an repaced after exceeding this period.
impact resistant case. Make sure that the recorder As the lithium battery must be replaced by the
is kept free from external vibration or impact since Fostex Service Department, please contact our
the recorder is very sensitive to vibration. nearest service station.

8
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

Names and Functions

Front panel-1

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

Front panel-2

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

POWER

24bit/96kHz

Rear panel

9
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

Front Panel section

1 2 3 4 5 6 2

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

POWER

24bit/96kHz

8 7

1. Detachable remote controller connector * Refer to “Quick operation Guide” for more information
The detachable remote controller is connected here. on how to replace the removable hard disk cartridge.
You can remove the controller.
Connect the optional extension cable (Model 8551B) <Note>
to extend the distance. The recorder package contains a caddy (without a hard
disk). Install your hard disk in this caddy.
Consult the dealer you purchased the recorder from
or out sales office about information on the extension
cable. 7. Blank panel for installing an optional unit
This is used when installing the optional Model 9044
(BAY+CADDY). Another E-IDE hard disk can be
installed by mounting the Model 9044.
Because the Model 9044 must be mounted by the
Fostex Service Station, please inquire at your store
of purchase or the Fostex Service Station.
2. Controller mount
The detachable remote controller is mounted on the 8. Power switch
front panel. This switch turns the main power to the recorder
on/off.
3. Hard disk access LED (Red)
<WARNING !>
This LED lights up or blinks when the hard disk is
Before turning the power off to the recorder, first quit
writing or reading data. (Same as the ACCESS LED the SETUP mode and make sure that the recorder
on the detachable remote controller.) section is stopped.
Especially, never attempt to turn off the power to the
4. Lock/Unlock key recorder while the hard disk is accessing data (the
When you remove or install the hard disk cartridge, ACCESS LED is lit or flashing). Otherwise, not only will
you lose recorded data, you may damage to the unit.
you need to lock/unlock here using the included
key. <Note>
Should this power switch be switched On/Off in quick
5. Hard disk power LED (Green) succession, in some cases it will fail to switch On at all.
This is due to functioning of the internal protection
This LED lights up if the hard disk operates correctly
circuit and is not a breakdown. Consequently, should
when you turn the power on to the recorder. such a symptom appear, switch Off power for a
moment, then switch On again after waiting 1 or 2
6. Removable hard disk cartridge slot minutes.
This slot is used to insert a removable hard disk
cartridge. This system allows you to replace the hard
disk easily.

10
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

Detachable Controller section

11 13
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 14 15

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY

16
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

36 24bit
96kHz
SHIFT

AUTO
PUNCH
TC READY

REHEARSAL
TC GEN M.UNDO

LOCATE
PREV TC

VARI PITCH
NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

1718
TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

19
35 FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

30 28 26 24 22 20
34 33 32 31 29 27 25 23 21

1. Controller Connection Cable * All TRACK SHIFT LED extinguished: Tracks 1-8 can be selected.
Connect this cable to the recorder controller * "9-16" are lighted: Tracks 9-16 can be selected.
connection jack. * "17-24" are lighted: Tracks 17-24 can be selected.

All real track input monitors can be switch on or off

2. Record track select key
each press of this key while pressing [SHIFT] key.
[RECORD TRACK/ENVELOPE] When all tracks are set to input monitor, the ALL
"SAFE-READY" of the recording track can be selected INPUT LED will light.
(The track can be selected by shifting to 1-8, 9-16
or 17-24 with the [TRACK SHIFT] key.
4. Auto Play/Auto Return key [AUTO RTN/PLAY]
If the select key is pressed once, that track will be in Pressing this key repeatedly will change Auto Play
the READY state and the track display ( ) will blink.
mode, Auto Return mode, and Repeat mode On/Off
It will change to SAFE if pressed again and the track
display will be extinguished. as follows: ( : LED off, : LED light up)
When recording is started from the READY mode, AUTO RTN
Auto Return/ Auto Play mode is OFF.
the blinking track display will light. AUTO PLAY
(No indication)
If the [RECORD] button only is pressed from the
READY mode, the READY track only will enter input
monitor mode, and the recording level can be AUTO RTN
Auto Play mode is ON.
adjusted. If the [RECORD] button is pressed once AUTO PLAY

(Only the AUTO PLAY LED is lit. )

again, the D2424LV will return to repro monitoring.
If any select key is pressed together with the [SHIFT] AUTO RTN
Auto Return mode is ON.
key, the envelope function of that track can be AUTO PLAY

(Only the AUTO RTN LED is lit. )

executed. This key is also used for editing such as
copy paste, move paste and erase.
AUTO RTN

AUTO PLAY
Auto Repeat mode is ON.
* Refer to page “28” for details about the reproduction (Both AUTO PLAY and AUT RTN LEDs are lit. )
monitor and the input monitor.
* Refer to page “62” for details about the envelope
function.
Auto Play mode:
In this mode, playback will start automatically after the
* Refer to page “68” for details about the copy/paste START point is located. This function is effective at any
and move/paste function.
locate points other than the REC END point.

Auto Return mode:

3. Track shift key [TRACK SHIFT/ALL INPUT] When the END point is reached during playback, the START
When selecting a recording track, this is pressed to point is automatically located in this mode. This function
shift to the selectable track. With each pressing of is effective only when the START and END points have
the key, the TRACK SHIFT LED will sequentially been specified.
switch in order of: <Note>
"Extinguish" - "Lighting of 9-16" - "Lighting of 17- The Auto Return function is works only during playback.
24" - "Extinguish" to indicate the modes listed below. In the recording mode, the START point will not be
located automatically when the END point is reached.

11
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

Auto Repeat mode: * Refer to page “40” for more information about Auto
This mode is a combination of Auto Play and Auto Return, Punch In/Out recording.
and plays back the part between the START and END points * Refer to page “68” for more information about pasting
repeatedly. The auto repeat function is effective only when data.
the START and END points have been specified correctly. * Refer to page “72” for more information about the
Erase operations.
* Refer to page “57” for details. * Refer to page “64” for previewing data at the AUTO
PUNCH IN point.

5. Clipboard In key [CLIPBOARD IN/PREVIEW]

This key is used to store and recall the In point 9. Auto Punch Out key [AUTO PUNCH OUT/PREVIEW]
(CLIPBOARD IN point) for the Copy or Move This key is used to store and recall the recording
operation. You can locate a stored CLIPBOARD IN end point (AUTO PUNCH OUT point) for the Auto
point. If you press the [CLIPBOARD IN] key while Punch IN/OUT operation. This point is also used as
holding down the [SHIFT] key when the recorder is an erase point. You can locate a stored AUTO PUNCH
stopped, you can preview the fade-in part at the OUT point. If you press the [AUTO PUNCH OUT] key
stored CLIPBOARD IN point. while holding down the [SHIFT] key when the
recorder is stopped, you can preview the fade-in part
* Refer to page “68” for copying/moving data.
at the stored AUTO PUNCH OUT point.
* Refer to page “55” for locating the CLIPBOARD IN
point.
* Refer to page “64” for previewing data at the * Refer to page “40” for more information about Auto
CLIPBOARD IN point. Punch In/Out recording.
* Refer to page “72” for more information about the
Erase operation.
6. Clipboard Out key [CLIPBOARD OUT/PREVIEW] * Refer to page “64” for previewing data at the AUTO
This key is used to store and recall the Out point PUNCH OUT point.
(CLIPBOARD OUT point) for the Copy or Move
operation. You can locate a stored CLIPBOARD OUT Memory keys (CLIPBOARD IN, CLIPBOARD OUT,
point. If you press the [CLIPBOARD OUT] key while AUTO RTN START, AUTO PUNCH IN, AUTO PUNCH
holding down the [SHIFT] key when the recorder is OUT, and AUTO RTN END keys) have the following
stopped, you can preview the fade-out part at the common functions:
stored CLIPBOARD OUT point.
• Pressing a Memory key to recall the point the key is
* Refer to page “55” for locating the CLIPBOARD OUT storing displays the memory data (time, or bar/beat/
point. clock) currently stored in that key; then the recorder
* Refer to page “68” for copying/moving data. enters data edit mode. To edit data, use the
* Refer to page “64” for previewing data at the Shuttle dial to move among the digits, and then use
CLIPBOARD OUT point. the Jog dial to change the value.
• After you finish editing data, press the [STORE] key,
7. Auto Return Start key and then press one of the Memory keys into which
[AUTO RTN START/PREVIEW] you want to store the point. The edited data will be
This key is used to store and recall the start point stored in the specified Memory key.
(AUTO RTN START point) for the Auto Return or • While the current position of the recorder is
Auto Repeat operation. You can locate a stored AUTO indicated, press the [STORE] key, then one of the
RTN START point. If you press the [AUTO RTN START] Memory keys into which you want to store the data.
key while holding down the [SHIFT] key when the The current position or the recorder will be stored
recorder is stopped, you can preview the fade-in part in the Memory key. You can do this while the
recorder is running or stopped.
at the stored AUTO RTN START point.
• Press a desired Memory key, and then press the
* Refer to page “55” for locating the AUTO RTN START [LOCATE] key to locate the point stored in that
point. Memory key (time, or bar/beat/clock).
* Refer to page “68” for copying/moving data.
• In Setup mode, you can save or load song data for
* Refer to page “64” for previewing data at the AUTO
each Program.
RTN START point.
• All data will be retained after you turn off the power.
8. Auto Punch In key [AUTO PUNCH IN/PREVIEW]
This key is used to store and recall the recording * Refer to page “51” for more information on memory
start point (AUTO PUNCH IN point) for the Auto data.
Punch IN/OUT operation. This point is also used as * Refer to page “55” for more information on the Locate
an erase point. You can locate a stored AUTO PUNCH function.
IN point. If you press the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key while * Refer to pages “26” and “37” for more information
holding down the [SHIFT] key when the recorder is on the Program Change function.
stopped, you can preview the fade-out part at the * Refer to page “87” for more information on saving
and loading song data.
stored AUTO PUNCH IN point.

12
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

10. Auto Return End key [AUTO RTN END/PREVIEW] 12. Program select key [PGM SEL]
This key is used to store and recall the end point This key has the following two functions depending
(AUTO RTN END point) for the Auto Return or Auto on the setup condition of "Chain Play?" (Setup of the
Repeat operation. You can locate a stored AUTO Chain Play Mode) in the SETUP mode.
RTN END point. If you press the [AUTO RTN END]
key while holding down the [SHIFT] key when the <When the "Chain Play?" menu is set to "Off">
recorder is stopped, you can preview the fade-out The D2424LV will switch to setup of a new program
part at the stored AUTO RTN END point. and the program select execution mode when this
key is pressed.
* Refer to page “55” for locating the AUTO RTN END
point.
* Refer to page “37” for program select function.
* Refer to page “68” for copying/moving data.
* Refer to page “64” for previewing data at the AUTO
RTN END point. <When the "Chain Play?"menu is set to other than "Off">
You can specify the program at executing chain play
when this key is pressed.
11. Display Select key [DISP SEL/TIME BASE SEL]
This key is used to change the display mode. Pressing * Refer to page “58” for details on the chain play mode.
this key repeatedly will change the display mode as
follows:
The current position 13. Store key [STORE/HOLD]
This key is for storing time figures (or measure/beat/
clock figure) in any memory key.
Disk space (remain)
Following this key, when each memory key is
pressed, data shown in the display will be stored in
MTC IN or TC IN display their respective memory key.
Using "Press LOCATE: **", which is shown after
If an optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC card is installed, pressing the [RECALL] key, if this key is pressed after
information in the MTC IN or TC IN will differ input of any number (00-99) in "**," it is registered
depending on "Ref. TC?" menu setting (MTC or LTC) as time data for the specified locate number.
in the SETUP mode. If the card is not installed, "00H If this key is pressed while holding down on the
00M 00S 00F 00SF" will always be displayed. [SHIFT] key, the currently shown time (BAR/BEAT/
CLK) will be held and this data can then be edited.
* Refer to page "25" in regards to REMAIN, page "107"
After editing, the time thus edited will be stored using
on the SETUP menu, and the "APPENDIX" on details if the procedure above.
the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card is installed.
* Refer to page “51” for registering in the memory key.
Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key
will switch the Time Base (*) as follows.
The Time Base can be set when the display shows
the recorder’s current position or the available disk 14. Exit/No key [EXIT/NO/EJECT]
space (REMAIN). The opposite of the [EXECUTE/YES] key, this key is
used to stop operation. When using a removable
ABS time base type SCSI device for backup, if the "Drive setting" in
the SETUP mode is set to "SCSI6", the SCSI disk can
be ejected by pressing this key while pressing on
Bar/beat/clk time base the [SHIFT] key when the SCSI disk is stopped.

MTC time base

15. Execute/Yes key [EXECUTE/YES/CHASE]
Press this key to execute the operation when you
(*) Time Base: edit data on the hard disk using the edit functions
The recorder uses time display (ABS or MTC) or Bar/Beat/ such as Paste and Erase, when you put the recorder
Clock display to indicate the current position of the into SETUP mode, or when you set the parameters
recorder section. These displays are called “Time Base.” in the SETUP menu.
ABS (Absolute Time) shows the absolute time of the disk,
Pressing this key while holding down the [SHIFT] key
and MTC (MIDI Time code) shows the relative time obtained
by adding an MTC offset value to the ABS value.
allows you to select the Slave mode on/off.
Bar/Beat/Clock (BAR/BEAT/CLK) indicates a position
within a piece of music and conforms to the MIDI clock * Refer to page “68” for more information about using
and Song Position Pointers created on the internal Tempo this key for the Paste or Erase operation.
Map. * Refer to page “107” for more information about using
this key in SETUP mode.
* Refer to pages “24” and “107” for more information * Refer to page "82", “85” for more information about
about MTC and the internal Tempo Map. using this key for the Slave Mode operation.

13
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

16. Recall key [RECALL] * Refer to page “51” for more information about the
This is pressed to call out the time figure (or bar/ editing the memory data.
beat/clk figure) data stored in locate number (0- * Refer to page “107” for more information about SETUP
99). If the [LOCATE] key is pressed after pressing mode.
* Refer to page “62” for more information about Digital
this key, the RECALL LED will light and "Press
Scrubbing.
LOCATE: **" is displayed. Next, by pressing the
[LOCATE] key after specifying a desired locate
number, the time figure in memory will be recalled
20. Vari-pitch key [VARI PITCH/P. EDIT]
into the specified number and the recorder will enter
Use this key to turn the Vari-pitch function on and
the edit mode.
off. When this function is enabled, the corresponding
Press the [LOCATE] key to execute this time figure.
LED lights up. When this function is disabled, the
* Refer to page "55" for more information about using LED turns off. The range of pitch variation for
this key for the Locate operation. playback and recording is +/-6.0%, in 0.1% steps.
Press the [SHIFT] key, and then the [VARI PITCH] key
17. Next key [NEXT/NEXT TC] to display the current pitch data.
If this key is pressed when in the recorder is in the To change the pitch data, use the Jog dial to change
PLAY/STOP/F FWD or REW mode, locate will be the value while the pitch data is displayed.
executed to the next memory point from the present You can also change the playback speed when the
location point. data is being played back with the Vari-pitch function
When inputting characters in the title edit mode, it ON. To quit the pitch data display, press the [EXIT/
serves as a character short cut function. NO] key, or the [STOP] button.
The memory number can be advanced with each
press of this key when the recorder displays "Press <Notes>
LOCATE: **". * Even if the pitch data is 0.0% (no speed change),
With an optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC card pressing the [VARI PITCH] key will still turn on the
VARI PITCH function. The speed is not changed, but
installed, if this key is pressed while pressing down the Vari Pitch is turned on.
the [SHIFT] key, the recorder will locate from the head
* The Vari Pitch function will automatically turn off
of the currently recorded time code to the head of
under the following conditions:
the next time code event.
1. You have turned off and on the power to this recorder.
18. Previous key [PREV/PREV TC] The pitch data will be reset to 0.0%.
If this key is pressed when the recorder is in the 2. You have pressed the [EXECUTE/YES] key while holding
PLAY/STOP/F FWD or REW mode, locate will be down the [SHIFT] key to turn the "SLAVE mode" on (the
executed to the one previous memory point. setting pitch data remains).
When inputting character in the title edit mode, this 3. You set "Digital In" of the SETUP mode to a SYNC mode
serves as a character short cut function. ("SPDIF :Sync" or "adat :Sync") and the recorder is
locking to the external clock from DIGITAL IN or WORD
The memory number selecting during display of
IN. In consequence, "DIGITAL" and "EXT" indicators
"Press LOCATE: **", the memory number can be light in the display.
reverted with each press of this key.
4. You have installed the optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC
With an optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC card card in this recorder and set the LTC OUT to "Gen.".
installed, if this key is pressed while pressing down
the [SHIFT] key, the recorder will locate from the
currently recorded time code to the head of the * Refer to “Quick Operation Guide” for more information
previous time code event. on the Vari-pitch function.
* Refer to pages “82” and “85” for more information on
Slave mode.
19. Jog/Shuttle dial
Jog dial (inside): 21. Fast Forward button [F FWD]
Turning the Jog dial while the recorder is stopped
performs digital scrubbing in either direction, which
Pressing this button while the recorder section is
allows you to check the audio and locate a point without stopped will fast forward data at 30 times speed.
any change in pitch. Pressing this button in Play mode will cue data (you
The Jog dial is also used to change values in the data can hear sound during the fast forward operation)
edit mode or when the pitch data is displayed. It also at five times speed.
allows you to select a parameter to set in Setup mode. Pressing this button while holding down the [STOP]
Shuttle dial (outside): button will initiate the “LOCATE ABS REC END”
FWD and REW direction shuttle operation in the STOP operation, and immediately locate the end of the
mode is possible at +/-1 ~ 64 times fast winding in the recorded data on the Program (ABS REC END). (Refer
no sound state. On the other hand, FWD and REW to the “[STOP] button” section for more information
direction shuttle operation in the PLAY mode is possible about LOCATE ABS REC END.)
in the CUE playback mode at +1 ~ 8 and -1 ~ -7 times
speed while cueing. In addition, while in the display
edit mode, the editing point can be moved.

14
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

22. Locate key [LOCATE] 25. Play button [PLAY]

Use this key to start to start the LOCATE feature. Pressing this button will cause the recorder to play
Pressing this key after a memory key (CLIPBOARD back. Pressing this button while holding down the
IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/END, AUTO PUNCH IN/ [RECORD] button will start recording.
OUT) locates the memory data programmed in each Pressing this button while holding down the [STOP]
respective key (time mode or bar, beat, clock setting). button will perform the Clipboard playback
The data can be programmed by individually setting operation. Refer to the section “[STOP] button” for
it with one of the 99 (01-99) LOCATE numbers of more information on the Clipboard playback.
the [LOCATE] key. Pressing the [PLAY] button during recording will stop
Note that the data of memory number 00 is available recording.
in addition to LOCATE numbers 01-99. The last
LOCATE time setting (bar, beat, clock setting) 26. Setup key [SETUP/TC GEN]
constantly replaces the data stored in the [LOCATE] Press this key to puts the recorder in the SETUP mode
key as data in memory number 00. Therefore, it is to execute various operations. This key works when
possible to press this key alone to repeatedly LOCATE the recorder is stopped. To exit from the SETUP
the same point. mode, either press the [EXIT/NO] key or the STOP
These data can be individually stored in programs button. If the optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC card is
P1-P99. The data for each program is SAVED or installed and external time code is being input, you
LOADED for each program when the song data is can enter the generator setup mode by pressing this
designated for SAVE/LOAD in the SETUP mode. This key while pressing on the [SHIFT] key.
data is maintained even when the power is turned
* Refer to page “107” for more information on SETUP
OFF. mode.
* Refer to "APPENDIX" for more information about
* Refer to page “55” for more information about the generator setup mode.
Locate function.

27. Stop button [STOP]

Pressing this button will stop the transport section
23. Rewind button [REWIND]
of the recorder. Pressing the PLAY, REWIND, or F
Pressing this button while the recorder section is
FWD button while holding down this button will
stopped will rewind data at 30 times speed.
cause the recorder to perform the following
Pressing this button in Play mode will cue data (you
operation:
can hear sound while rewinding) at five times speed.
Pressing this button while holding down the [STOP] [STOP] button + [PLAY] button
button will perform the “LOCATE ABS 0” operation,
and immediately locate the beginning of the Program Clipboard playback (The STOP LED will flash and
the PLAY LED will light up.) *1
(ABS TIME: 00M: 00S: 00F). (Refer to the “[STOP]
button” section for more information about LOCATE
[STOP] button + [REWIND] button
ABS 0.)
Locate ABS 0 *2

24. Undo/Redo key [UNDO/REDO/M. UNDO] [STOP] button + [F FWD] button

If you wish to restore the status prior to editing, Locate REC END *3
recording, or performing a punch in/out take, press
the [UNDO/REDO] key. Pressing the [UNDO/REDO] key Pressing the [STOP] button will abort the editing
again will return you to where you were before you operations and display the current position of the
pressed the [UNDO/REDO] key the first time. recorder, if you wish to:
If the current drive you are using has been formatted
with the multiple undo function switched ON, you * quit the data edit mode,
can execute multiple undo by pressing this key while * cancel the recall or store operation,
holding down the [SHIFT] key. * quit the pitch data display,
* cancel the edit operation, such as pasting, or
* cancel the SETUP menu settings.
<Note>
This key is enabled only when the recorder is stopped. Pressing the foot switch while holding down this
button allows you to turn the punch in/out rehearsal
* Refer to pages “42”, “44”, “70” and “73” for more mode ON/OFF.
information about the single Undo/Redo operation.
* Refer to page "64" for more information about *1 Clipboard playback:
Multiple Undo function. The recorder plays back the copy data or move data for
the Clipboard. During audio playback of the copy or move
data, the FL will display the time length and data type
(“Copy Clip Play!” or “Move Clip Play!”), and the copy or
move source track indicator will flash, enabling you to
quickly determine the track and data type.

15
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

*2 Locate ABS 0: 29. Record button [RECORD]

The recorder will locate the top of the selected Program Pressing only this button places the readied tracks
(ABS TIME: 00M: 00S: 00F). into input monitoring status. Pressing this button
*3 Locate REC END: again will reset the tracks to playback monitoring.
The recorder will locate the end of the recorded data on (The RECORD LED will blink when the readied tracks
the Program (ABS REC END). are in input monitoring status.)
Pressing the [PLAY] button while holding down this
These operations can be executed only on real tracks. button will place the readied tracks into recording.
At this time, the PLAY LED and RECORD LED will
* Refer to page “24” of the “Before Starting” section
for more information about ABS 0 and ABS END. light, and the readied track indication will be light
* Refer to page “43” for more information about Punch steadily (instead of blinking).
In/Out recording using the foot switch.
* Refer to page "69" on details for "Clip board play." * Refer to page “28” of the “Before Starting” section for
* Refer to page "55" on details for "LOCATE 0" and more information about input monitoring and
reproduce monitoring.
"LOCATE REC END."

28. Edit key [EDIT/TC READY] 30. Auto Punch Mode On/Off key [AUTO PUNCH]
Pressing this key enters the recorder to the menu Switch this key ON for auto punch in/out.
select mode for editing tracks. Press this key When you press this key while a correct value is
repeatedly or turn the Jog dial to select menu. stored to the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key and the [AUTO
Edit menus appear in the following order. To execute PUNCH OUT] key, both the REHEARSAL LED and TAKE
a desired menu, select the menu, then press the LED will blink, indicating that Auto Punch mode is
[EXECUTE/YES] key. To exit the selection mode, press on. (If a correct value is not stored, pressing the
the [EXIT/NO] key. [AUTO PUNCH] key will not turn the parameter ON,
If the optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC card is installed, and the message “Void Out Point!” will appear.)
you can enter the TC READY mode for recording
Pressing the [PLAY] button under this condition will
time code by pressing this key while pressing on the
put the recorder into “Rehearsal mode” for Auto
[SHIFT] key.
Punch In/Out recording. Pressing the [PLAY] button
and [RECORD] button simultaneously will put the
Copy Clip?
recorder into “Take mode.”

Move Clip? There are five combinations of the REHEARSAL LED

and TAKE LED that indicate the status of the recorder
Copy Paste? (Move Paste?(*1)) regarding auto punch recording:

Erase? Auto Punch mode OFF

Both REHEARSAL LED and TALE LED are off.

Track Exchange?
Auto Punch mode ON
PGM Duplicate?(*2)
Both REHEARSAL LED and TALE LED are blinking.

(*1): After you execute copy clip, “Copy Paste” Auto Punch TAKE mode
appears. After you execute move clip, “Move
Only the TAKE LED (red) is lit.
Paste” appears.
(*2): The program duplicate display will appear only Auto Punch REHEARSAL mode
if the current drive was set to ON for the
Only the REHEARSAL LED (green) is lit.
"Multiple Undo Function" when formatting.
If the current drive is set to OFF, the program
duplicate display will not appear even if the Rehearsal mode entered by means of MMC or foot switch
[EDIT] key is pressed. Only the REHEARSAL LED (green) is blinking.

* Refer to page “68” for more information about “Copy

Clip,” “Move Clip,” “Copy Paste,” “Erase,” and “Track
Exchange.”
* Refer to page “36” for more information about
program duplicate function.

<Note>
This key is enabled only when the recorder is stopped.

16
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

<Note> <Note>
If a correct value is not stored, pressing the [AUTO Ejecting or removing the backup SCSI disk is only
PUNCH] key will not enable the function, and the possible when the drive is set to "SCSI*" via the SETUP
message “Void Out Point!” will appear. mode "Setup of the drive." If the drive is set to "IDE",
If a correct value is not stored, pressing the [AUTO eject it using the SCSI drive EJECT switch.
PUNCH] key will not turn on the function, and the
message “Void Out Point!” will alert you. In this case, set
a correct value for the Auto Punch In/Out point.
Also, the function is not turned on when you press the 32. All Input LED [ALL INPUT]
[AUTO PUNCH] key if the disk does not have enough
This is lit when all track input monitors are set to
recording space. The display will indicate “-**H **M **S
**F Over.” ON by pressing the [TRACK SHIFT] key while pressing
the [SHIFT] key, and extinguished when set to OFF.
* Refer to page “40” for details about Punch In/Out While in the SETUP mode, it is also possible to
operation. automatically set it to all input monitors while the
recorder is in the stop mode.
31. Shift key [SHIFT]
* For details, refer to page 28 at end of this manual.
Press a key, or button while holding down the [SHIFT]
key to activate the following “shift-invoked” functions.
Key with SHIFT function Function 33. Track shift LED [9-16, 17-24] (green)
Executes the envelope function of This is lit when the selectable recording track is
[RECORD TRACK] select keys the selected track. shifted to 9-16 or 17-24.

[TRACK SHIFT] key Switches ON/OFF of the input

monitor for all tracks.
34. Hard disk access LED (green)
[RECORD] button Switches SAFE-READY for all tracks.
This LED lights up or blinks when the hard disk is
[CLIPBOARD IN/OUT] key writing or reading data.
Executes preview of the stored point
[AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT] key
of each memory key.
[AUTO RTN START/END] key <CAUTION>
Ejects disk in the external SCSI drive. Do not turn the power off while this LED is lit or blinking.
[EXIT/NO] key
Please see <Note> below. Otherwise, data on the hard disk may be damaged.

[EXECUTE/YES] key Switches the slave mode ON/OFF.

Selects the time base.

35. Foot switch jack [FOOT SW]
[DISP SEL] key
(Connector: PHONE jack)
Punch in/out (also for rehearsal) or PLAY/STOP of
[EDIT] key Switches TC READY ON/OFF.
the recorder can be done by foot by connecting the
[SETUP] key Enters the TC GEN setup mode.
optional foot switch.
The foot switch function can be changed in the SETUP
[UNDO/REDO] key
Enters the multiple undo executing mode. It will not function for punch in/out function
mode.
in the initial setting.).
Enters the vari pitch data editing
[VARI PITCH] key
mode. * Refer to page “43” for information about Punch In/
The recorder will locate to the head
Out recording using the foot switch.
of the next time code event,
[NEXT] key subsequent to the recorded time
code. This functions only when an
<Note>
optional Model 8346 is installed. Be sure to use an “unlatch type” foot switch if you use a
The recorder will locate to the head foot switch other than the Model 8051. Otherwise, a
of the time code event previous to malfunction could occur.
[PREV] key the recorded time code.
This functions only when an
optional Model 8346 is installed.
36. Meter display
Holds the current time data, which
[STORE] key
you can edit. This meter display shows the signal level and
settings.

* Refer to page “107” for details on the SETUP mode. * Refer to the “Display section” on page “19.”
* Refer to the "APPENDIX" at end of this manual in
regards to the TC generator mode.
* Refer to page "66" for details on multiple undo
function.
* Refer to the "Quick Operation Guide" in regards to
editing of Vari Pitch data.
* Refer to page "64" for details on preview.
* Refer to page "62" for details on the envelope function.

17
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

Rear panel section

1 2 3 4 5 6

15 14 13 11 12 10 9 8

1. Analog Input jacks 1~24 (Connector: PHONE) 6. WORD OUTPUT connector (Connector: BNC)
External analog audio signals to the D2424LV are Word clock signal from the recorder is output to
input here. These are connected, for example, to external digital equipment.
external mixer's group out (BUSS OUT) connectors.

<Note> 7. Optional Panel

Analog input/output can be switched for balance Prepared for the future expansion.
(+4dBu)/unbalance (-10dBV) via the SETUP mode. Do not remove the blank panel when it is not used.
At initial setup, it is set for unbalance (-10dBV).
8. AC IN connector
2. Analog Output jacks 1~24 (Connector: PHONE) The power cable packaged with this recorder is
Analog audio signals (Channels 1-24) from D2424LV connected here.
are output here. For example, this is connected to
the external mixer [TAPE IN] connector. <Note>
Always plug the power cable to the recorder before
<Note> plugging the cable into the wall outlet.
When using a current drive formatted to 96kHz 24 bits
or 88.2kHz 24 bits, only [OUTPUT 1-8] will be functional.
9. REMOTE THRU connector
3. Optional Panel (Connector: D-sub 9-pin)
The additional installation panel for the optional RS-422 control signal (SONY 9PIN PROTOCOL or
Model 8346 (TC/SYNC card x1). Normally, it can be Fostex System Exclusive Message) input from the
used with the panel remained installed. [REMOTE INPUT] connector is output here.
This is connected to the second recorder REMOTE
<Note> INPUT when controlling a multiple number of
Installation of the option must be done by our Fostex
recorders.
Service Station. For details, please inquire at your nearest
Fostex Service Station.
10. REMOTE INPUT terminating switch (100Ω)
• For functions at installation of the optional Model This REMOTE INPUT terminating switch (100Ω ) is
8346, please refer to "APPENDIX" on the last page of
switched ON for normal use of an inputted RS-422
this manual.
control signal into the [REMOTE INPUT] connector.
When controlling a multiple number of recorders,
4. WORD IN terminating switch (75Ω) the last one only is switched ON; the others are
This is the [WORD IN] port terminating switch (75Ω). switched OFF.
Turn this ON when inputting an external word clock
signal into the [WORD IN] connector from digital
equipment.
11. REMOTE INPUT connector
(Connector: D-sub 9-pin)
5. WORD INPUT connector (Connector: BNC) External RS-422 control signal (SONY 9PIN
Word clock signal from external digital equipment PROTOCOL or Fostex System Exclusive Message) is
is input here for the purpose of phasing with external input here to control this recorder.
digital equipment.

18
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

12. SCSI connector [SCSI] <for song data>

(Connector: half-pitch 50-pin) [DATA OUTPUT] 1-8 must be used (the other connectors
Connect a backup SCSI device to SAVE/LOAD data. do not feed song data).
Up to one SCSI devices can be connected to the SCSI <for S/P DIF digital signals>
connector. [DATA OUTPUT] 1-8 feeds the signal for tracks 1-2.
[DATA OUTPUT] 9-16 feeds the signal for tracks 3-4.
* Refer to page “93” for more details on SAVE/LOAD
[DATA OUTPUT] 17-24 feeds the signal for tracks 5-6.
using a SCSI device.
<for adat digital signals>
13. MIDI Input/Output/Thru connector [DATA OUTPUT] 1-8 feeds the signal for tracks 1-8.
[DATA OUTPUT] 9-16 feeds the signal for tracks 9-16.
(Connector: DIN 5-pin)
[DATA OUTPUT] 17-24 feeds the signal for tracks 17-24.
MIDI INPUT:
Connect the [MIDI OUTPUT] connector of an external MIDI 15. DATA INPUT connectors [1-8, 9-16, 17-24]
device here. The recorder can be controlled remotely
(Connector: OPTICAL)
via an external MMC (MIDI Machine Control) or FEX
(Fostex System Exclusive Message).
These connectors receive song data (sound data +
various setup data) from an external digital device,
MIDI OUTPUT: as well as receive S/P DIF or adat digital signals from
Connect the [MIDI INPUT] connector of the external MIDI external digital equipment (such as DAT recorder,
device here. The recorder will output MTC (MIDI Time
MD recorder, CD player, adt equipment/digital
Code), MIDI Clock signal, MMC (MIDI Machine Control)
response, and FEX (Fostex System Exclusive Message)
mixer, etc.).
response. Depending on usage, the appropriate connectors
should be used as follow.
MIDI THRU:
This connector outputs the input signal at the [MIDI <for song data>
INPUT] connector without modification. When using [DATA INPUT] 1-8 must be used (the other connectors do
multiple recorders via MIDI, connect this terminal to not receive song data).
the [MIDI INPUT] connector of the second recorder.
<for S/P DIF digital signals>
[DATA INPUT] 1-8 receives S/P DIF signal and routes to
14. DATA OUTPUT connectors [1-8, 9-16, 17-24]
tracks 1-2.
(Connector: OPTICAL) [DATA INPUT] 9-16 and [DATA INPUT] 17-24 do not receive
Feed song data of the D2424LV (sound data + various any signal.
setup data) for saving data to an external digital
<for adat digital signals>
device, as well as feed S/P DIF or adat digital signals
[DATA INPUT] 1-8 receives adat signals and routes to tracks
to external digital equipment.
1 through 8.
Depending on usage, the appropriate connectors [DATA INPUT] 9-16 receives adat signals and routes to
should be used as follows. tracks 9 through 16.
[DATA INPUT] 17-24 receives adat signals and routes to
* Refer to page “87” for information about “LOAD” tracks 17 through 24.
function.
* Refer to page “45” for information “Digital Recording.”

<Note>
The [DATA INPUT] and [DATA OUTPUT] connectors do
not support 96kHz FS adat digital signals.

Display section
The recorder display integrates the level meter of a high-visibility FL tube with a 16 digits and 35 dot message
display. The level meter shows the Track 1-24 output level of the recorder section. The time display shows
the current time of the recorder section using ABS TIME (Absolute time), MTC (MIDI time code), or MIDI BAR/
BEAT (bar/beat). This display also shows messages required for interactive operation. The following section
explains the display functions and provides with some examples.

1. Display shown when the power is turned on

When you turn on the power to the recorder and the connected E-IDE hard disk (a formatted hard disk), the
display shows the [Initializing...] message, [Current Dr], the name of the connected current drive, then recording
mode (Standard format, etc.), and finally the top position of the disk in the time base (ABS, MTC, or BAR/
BEAT/CLK) used in the last Program before you turned the power off.
The following example indicates that the recorder started with the ABS Time Base used in Program 1.

19
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

2. Preset Display
The display below shows all preset items for explanation purpose.

35 dot message display

This display indicates the ABS time, MTC time value or bar/beat/clock value,
and a parameter name in the SETUP mode.

Level meter
SETUP COMPLETED! SURE? LTC MTC IN ABSCHASE OFFSET LOCATE GEN UB REMAIN
Displays recorder output H M S F SF
level or recording level MB
BAR CLK PGM %
for each track. OL OL OL OL
0 0 0
BIT 16 24
In the programs to 96 3 3
0
3 3
6 6 6 6 FS
kHz 24 bits or 88.2 kHz 9 9 9 9 kHz
15 12 15 12
24 bits, only tracks 1-8 20 18 20 18 CLOCK
25 24 25 24 INT
will function. 30
40
30
42
30 30
42 MIDI EXT
40
∞ ∞ ∞ ∞ WORD
CHASE VIDEO
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
DIGITAL DIGITAL TC RDY DIGITAL

Track indications
Each frame will blink when the track is READY, be extinguished in the SAFE These will light when locked to digital in and "-" for
mode and be lighted during recording. In the program to 96 kHz / 24 bits the track set to digital-in will light up.
and 88.2kHz 24bits, only tracks 1-8 will function.

Lights up when ABS is selected as Time base. This indication lights up when the recorder
ABS MIDI receives effective MIDI message from an external
MIDI device.
MTC Lights up when MTC is selected as Time Base. When the recorder enters save function mode, the
SAVE selected parameter name will appear here.

Lights up to indicate a bar/beat/clock value when When the recorder enters load function mode,
SIGNATURE LOAD
BAR/BEAT/CLK is selected as Time Base. the selected parameter name will appear here.

This lights when a digital input track is set and a

DIGITAL digital signal is correctly input. It will blink if the
Lights up when the recorder enters data edit mode, digital signal is not correctly input.
enabling you to edit data. Pressing the LOCATE
LOCATE key while this indicate is lit will cause the recorder This message indicates that an operation such
COMPLETED!
to locate the position of the displayed time or the as copy, move and paste has been completed.
bar/beat/clock value.
This lights up when the D2424LV is operating
INT using the internal clock.
Lights up to indicate available recording time and
REMAIN space on the disk. This lights up when the D2424LV is operating
EXT
in sync with an external sync signal.

MTC IN With the optional Model 8345 TC/SYNC card This lights up together with display of "EXT"
installed, this will be lit when MTC or LTC is WORD when the D2424LV is in sync with an external
TC IN externally input. word signal.

This lights up together with display of "EXT"

VIDEO when the D2424LV is in sync with an external
MTC OFFSET Lights up when MTC OFFSET menu is selected video signal.
in SETUP mode.
<Note>
Flashes when "Slave mode" is turned on. When D2424LV is not in sync with external sync signals
CHASE When a signal is locked, the flashing indicator lights (word/video) and digital IN signals, "EXT", "WORD",
up steadily. "VIDEO" or "DIGITAL" display will blink.
If this display is blinks, inspect the connectors and
cables between external digital equipment and check
PGM Lights up to indicate the current program number.
that sync signals or digital signals from external
equipment are correctly input.
Lights up when the tempo setting menu is selected
TEMPO
in SETUP mode.
This blinks when the recorder is entered in the
BIT 16, 24 Sampling frequency/quantization at formatting TC READY mode by pressing the [EDIT] key
are displayed. This will also blink to warn that TC RDY while holding down the [SHIFT] key, and will
FS
digital signals (S/P DIF or adat) of a wrong light during recording of TC.
Hz sampling frequency are being input.

SURE? This message is shown to confirm whether or not

you wish to execute a certain operation.

20
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

3. Switching the display using the [DISP SEL] key.

Let’s assume that you turned off the power while ABS time base
the time display was using a time base of “ABS,” ABS
H M S

and then you turned the power on again. The

PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS

recorder time display will again use a time base of 9

12
18
24
9
12
18
24
CLOCK
INT
kHz

30 30

“ABS.” 42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞

ABS TIME display

ABS
H M S

PGM
OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
BAR/BEAT/CLK time base
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 BAR PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30

At this time if you press the [DISP SEL] key, the 42

∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞

Disk Remain display will appear. (Both recordable

time and hard disk capacity remaining will be
converted to mono track and expressed in time
and megabytes.) MTC time base
MTC

DISK REMAIN display H M S

PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
REMAIN 3 3
H M S 6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
OL OL 24 24 INT
0 0
BIT 24 30 30
3 3 42 42
6 6 FS ∞ ∞
9 9 kHz 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

5. Changing Programs using the [PGM SEL] key

If “BAR/BEAT/CLK” is selected for the time base
(explained later), the DISK REMAIN indication will <Note>
show a value (in terms of the number of measures) Such operations as program compilation and
calculated based on the last beat/tempo data on selecting, will only functions when the "Chain Play?"
menu in the SETUP mode is "Off."
the tempo map of the recorded song.
In regards to the "Chain Play?" menu in the SETUP
mode, see page 58.
If you press the [DISP SEL] key again, the MTC IN
display will appear. If an optional Model 8346 * About the Program Change function
TC/SYNC card is installed, and the reference TC is The Program Change function divides the hard disk
switched to "LTC", and an external TC is input, space into up to 99 parts to accommodate 99 separate
that reference input LTC time figure will be Programs (P01-P99 — as long as available recording
displayed. time allows) so you can record, play back, edit, and
reachieve (save and load) data for each Program
individually. For example, the first song can be
MTC IN display Program 1, the second song can be Program 2, etc.
MTC IN
H M S You need to recall the desired Program before you
OL
0
OL
0
BIT
PGM
24
start recording, playback, editing, or reachieving.
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz

Pressing the [PGM SEL] key will cause the recorder

12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 to enter Program select mode, display the message
“Select PGM !”, followed by the current Program
and Program number and a flashing “SURE?”
If you press the [DISP SEL] key again, the screen
indication.
will return to the “ABS TIME” display.
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS

4. Switching the Time Base display using the

9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞

[SHIFT] key and [DISP SEL] key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

When the screen is showing the ABS TIME or

REMAIN display, if you press the [DISP SEL] key
repeatedly whileholding down the [SHIFT] key, the
TIME BASE display will change cyclically. SURE?

You can select one of the following Time Base

PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS

displays. 9
12
18
24
9
12
18
24
CLOCK
kHz

INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

21
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

You can select the desired Program from the • Display of void:
already setup Programs by rotating the Jog dial This is displayed if you attempt some sort of process for
while the Program number and “SURE?” are which the optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC card is
necessary and is not installed.
flashing.
After you select a Program, press the [EXECUTE/
YES] key to return to the selected Program’s ABS OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24
FS
indication.
6 6
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24
The Time Base display will indicate the selected
INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Program’s Time Base, since you can set the Time
Base for each Program individually.
To change the Time Base display after you have • Invalid In/Out indication:
selected the desired Program, press the [DISP SEL] The In or Out point is not appropriate for the operation.
key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.
• Action to take:
Pressing only the [DISP SEL] key will take you to Input correct data.
the REMAIN display based on the current Time
Base.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS

<Notes> 9
12
18
24
9
12
18
24
CLOCK
INT
kHz

• The maximum record time of the program is

30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
dependent on the permissible record time (size) of
the hard disk, regardless of how many programs are
created on the disk. If, for example, there is roughly
30 minutes of record time remaining (REMAIN) on
the current drive immediately after it is formatted, OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3
and a 20 minute program is recorded in Program 1, 6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz
CLOCK
then there is only 10 minutes of recording time
18 18
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
remaining for any additional programs. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Simply put, if the total record time is 30 minutes it

does not matter whether the 30 minutes is taken by 1
program or shared among several programs, since • Overtime indication:
the total of 30 minutes for a recording remains the Available disk space is insufficient for the length of time
absolute total. (the number of measures) indicated on the display.)
Note that some disk space is compensated when
several programs are created on the disk. A new H M S F

program cannot be created when there is no OL

0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24
FS
recordable space remaining on the disk. However, 6
9
12
6
9
12
kHz
18 18 CLOCK
programs produced by "Program duplicating" are 24
30
42
24
30
42
INT

∞ ∞

exempted. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• For initial setup, when producing a new program, the

• Action to take:
initial setting of the currently active program is
During the copy & paste and move & paste operation,
directly copied. For example, if there is a randomly
try to shorten the length of the copied data by the
set tempo map in the current program, that tempo
indicated amount. Alternatively, use the “ERASE”
map setting will be copied as the tempo map for the
function to move the ABS END point backward to obtain
new program. This is convenient for producing a
enough disk space for editing.
new program with the same setting as previously
made music.
<Note>
Optimizing the disk is necessary in the current drive
in which multiple undo is ON.

6. Warning messages
If you perform an incorrect operation, input • Unassigned track indication:
incorrect data, or if an error occurs, the following Select any track.
alarm indication appears:

OL OL BIT 24
• Invalid data indication: 0
3
6
0
3
6 FS
9 9
The input data is not appropriate for the operation. 12
18
24
12
18
24
CLOCK
kHz

INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
• Action to take: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Input correct data.

• Action to take:
Use the [RECORD TRACK] select key to ready any track.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

22
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Names and Functions)

• Event overflow indication: • Hard disk (E-IDE) connection error:

The editing points have overflowed. The hard disk is not connected correctly.

OL OL BIT 24 OL OL
0 0 0 0
BIT 24
3 3 3 3
6 6 FS FS
6 6
9 9 kHz 9 9
12 12 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT 24 24
30 30 INT
30 30
42 42 42 42
∞ ∞ ∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• Action to take: • Action to take:

After temporarily saving the data to an external SCSI via Correctly set the E-IDE hard disk again.
the SETUP mode "Save PGM?" menu, return the data to
the recorder by the same SETUP mode "Load PGM?"
menu. The editing number of points will be cleared and • No disk error display:
you can continue editing. This is displayed when the removable disk is incorrectly
set in the SCSI device.
• Load error indication:
You cannot load data because the data input to the [DATA
OL OL
INPUT] connector contains an error. 0
3
6
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
24
30
INT • Action to take:
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Reset the removable disk.

• Action to take: • Recording Disable:

Check to see if there is an abnormality with the external Recording is disabled.
digital machine connected to the [DATA INPUT] connector,
or cable. Try to “LOAD” again.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
• Un-formatted indication: 18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT

The internal hard disk is damaged or not formatted yet. 42

∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞

After this message is shown for about 10 seconds, “Disk

Format ?” in Setup mode will flash on the display.
• Action to take:
Change the “Off” (recording) “Rec Protect ?” setting in
OL OL
Setup mode.
0 0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• Action to take:
Press and hold down the [RECORD] button and press
the [EXECUTE/YES] key to format the disk. (All audio
and other data on the disk will be lost.)

• Disk error indication:

This disk cannot be read.

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• Action to take:
Contact the Fostex service station as soon as possible.

23
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Before Starting)

Before Starting
This chapter describes some basic items that you need to know before you start operating the
recorder. All users, including those who are familiar with using tape-based multitrackers and those
who are new to multitrackers, should read this chapter thoroughly to understand the functions of
the recorder.
1. Time Base
2. Recording method and REMAIN indicator
3. Managing songs by Program Change function
4. Real tracks and Additional tracks
5. Input monitoring and playback monitoring
6. Audio file and Event

Time Base
The word “Time Base” appears frequently in this manual. The concept of Time Base is similar to a
“tape counter” on a conventional tape-based multitracker in that it indicates the precise position of
the recorder transport section (the current position).
The recorder offers three types of Time Base: ABS (Absolute type), MTC (MIDI time code), and BAR/
BEAT/CLK (bar/beat/clock). ABS indicates an absolute time on the disk. MTC indicates a relative
time that is obtained by adding a certain value (MTC offset value) to the ABS value. BAR/BEAT/CLK
indicates the position in a song created in the internal Tempo Map according to MIDI clock and
Song Position Pointer. The following diagrams depict the relationship among these three types of
the Time Base.
ABS 0 DISK END
00 m, 00 s, 00 f 00 m, 08 s, 00 f REC END 23 h, 59 m, 59 s

ABS

-002 bar, 1 , 00 clk 001 bar, 1 , 00 clk

BAR/BEAT/CLK
BAR = 001bar, 0404
TEMPO=001bar, 1 , 60

01 h, 00 m, 00 s, 00 f 01 h, 00 m, 08 s, 00 f 00 h, 59 m, 59 s

MTC
MTC OFFSET=01h, 00m, 00s, 00f

MTC OFFSET MODE=ABS

(This shall be assumed to be the
MTC OFFSET time set for the ABS
00m, 00s, and 00f positions.) 00 h, 59 m, 52 s, 00 f 01 h, 00 m, 00 s, 00 f 00 h, 59 m, 51 s

MTC
MTC OFFSET=01h, 00m, 00s, 00f

MTC OFFSET MODE=Bar

(This shall be assumed to be the MTC
Recorded area Non recorded area
OFFSET time set for the 00 bar, 1
beat, and 00 clk positions.)

<Note>
As shown in the figure, the ABS 0 position
(top of the disk) is [-2 bar, 1 beat, 00 clk]
You can switch between these three types (Time Base-BAR/BEAT/CLK). You can change
of Time Base to suit your purpose. (Refer this position in the ranged -9 bar to -2 bar
to the explanation in “Display Section” on in the “Setting the time signature” menu.
page “ 21 ” for more information on Refer to the “Setting the time signature
switching Time Base.) menu” section on page “107”.

24
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Before Starting)

Recording method and REMAIN indicator

Recording method REMAIN indicator
The recorder uses a E-IDE hard disk instead of The REMAIN indicator displays available
a cassette tape. You can start recording sound recording time expressed in time value (ABS or
sources from any point on a formatted disk as MTC) or bar/beat/clock (BAR/BEAT/CLK)
long as the point is within the range of 24 hours value, depending on the currently selected Time
in ABS time, as described in the previous “Time Base.
Base” section. (Refer to the following diagram.) It also indicates the available disk space. Right
REC END
after you format the disk, the REMAIN indicator
ABS 0 03m 00s 00f 10m 00s 00f 12m 00s 00f 23h, 59m, 59s
will show the maximum recordable time and
recorded area (3 min.) unrecorded area recorded area (2 min.) unrecorded area space on the disk. The following example shows
that the disk had about 3 hours recordable
You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time.
space after the disk format operation, and has
recorded data of 2 hours 48 minutes 57
seconds.
The area actually used on the disk. The REMAIN indicator displays the
amount of unrecorded area.
recorded area (5 min.) unrecorded area (25 min.)

recorded area (11min. 03sec.) unrecorded area (2 hour 48 min. 57 sec.)

recordable disk area (e.g.: 30 minutes)

You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time.

recordable disk area (3 hours)

White areas are unrecorded areas.

<Display example>
REMAIN
H M S

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Gray areas are recorded areas. The REMAIN value is calculated on a mono-track
basis. That value indicates the available
For example, if you record three minutes of data recording time and space if you record on one
starting from ABS 0 (top of the disk) to ABS mono-track.
03M 00S 00F on a disk that has a recordable For example, if you wish to know how much
space of thirty minutes, as shown in the you can record on eight tracks, you need to
diagram, then if you record two minutes divide the current REMAIN value by eight.
starting at the 10-minute point in ABS time (ABS The REMAIN value display is calculated from
10M 00S 00F) to ABS 12M 00S 00F, the data on the real track and data on the additional
recording end point (REC END) is 12 minutes track which will be explained later, and includes
(ABS 12M 00S 00F) in ABS time. However, this data left over for multiple undo. In other words,
does not mean that the entire recording the REMAIN value will be displayed in the form
duration is 12 minutes. The disk space actually of time/capacity obtained by deducting data
used for recording is five minutes (3 minutes + on the real track, data moved onto the
2 minutes). additional track and past editing data left over
That is, the area between three minutes and for multiple undo.
ten minutes (that corresponds to 25 minutes As described in “Managing the song by Program,”
of recording space) in terms of ABS time is still the recorder can set up as many as 99 Programs
unrecorded. on the disk. Setting up a Program requires a
When you try to play or fast forward this small amount of disk space. In other words,
unrecorded area, the time counter on the disk space is used not only for storing recorded
display will count, but the recorder will not data but also for storing all setup data.
access the disk. However, MTC will be output Therefore, make sure that you have enough
when you try to play this area. On the recorder, space on the disk before you start recording to
the top of the disk is called “ABS 0” and the avoid running out of space (the “OVER!”
recording end point is called “REC END.” message flashes in that case).

25
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Before Starting)

Managing songs by Program Change function

The recorder feature a Program Select function, which enables you to set up to 99 Programs on the
disk. When you format a disk, one Program is automatically created on the disk. You may create
more Programs, if necessary. You may also delete unnecessary Programs.
The recorder also features Program Change function, which enables you to select one of the Programs
set on the disk. Programs on the disk are something like independent containers. You can record,
play, and edit each container without affecting other containers. You can also name Programs,
which is useful for managing songs.
Additionally, as the sampling frequency can be changed individually for each program that is
generated, programs with different FS can be contained in one current drive.
NOTE: The ability to change the FS is limited by the quantizing figure used at formatting.

program 1 program 2 program 3

program 4 program 5 program 6

program 7 program 8 program 9

You can set up to 99 programs (independent containers).

ABS This is the Program indication

M S
when using an E-IDE hard disk as
PGM the current drive ([PGM] will
OL OL BIT 24
0
3
0
3
appear before the program
FS
6
9
6
9 kHz
number such as [P01] shown in
12 12
18 18 CLOCK the example below).
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• Refer to page “37” for more information on <Notes>

the program select function. • Total available recording time is always
the maximum available recording time on
• Refer to page “36” for more information on the disk, regardless of the number of
the duplicating a program. Programs you set on the disk. That is, if
you use up the maximum recording time
• Refer to page “37” for more information on for one Program, you will not be able to
the program delete function. record any data in other Programs.

• Refer to page “38” for more information on • As described in the “REMAIN indicator,”
the editing a program title. creating additional Programs will consume
a small amount of disk space.
• In regards to the "Chain Play?" menu in the
SETUP mode, see page “58”. • Such operations as program compilation
and selecting, functions only when the
• Refer to page “39” for “Changing the "Chain Play?" menu in the SETUP mode, is
program FS.” "Off."

26
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Before Starting)

Real tracks and Additional tracks

The D2424LV contains, in addition to 24 real tracks that can be recorded/played back/edited in
real time as one program, 32 additional tracks (In the current drive formatted at 96kHz/24bits or
88.2kHz/24 bits, it will be 8 real tracks + 48 additional tracks.).
Real tracks are normally used for real time recording of sound sources and the additional tracks
serve the purpose of temporarily storing the sound recorded on the real tracks. In other words, by
temporarily moving data recorded in the real track to an additional track, another performance
can be recorded on the empty real track.
To exchange real tracks with additional tracks, the D2424LV contains a "Track exchange function."
By using this function, exchange is possible between all tracks, for mono tracks, stereo pair tracks
(2 tracks) and in groups of 8 track units.
Exchange in 8 track units

Exchange in 2 (stereo pair) track units

Track 1 Track 9 Track 17 Track 49

Track 2 Track 10 Track 18 Track 50
Track 3 Track 11 Track 19 Track 51
Track 4 Track 12 Track 20 Track 52
.........................
Track 5 Track 13 Track 21 Track 53
Track 6 Track 14 Track 22 Track 54
Track 7 Track 15 Track 23 Track 55
Track 8 Track 16 Track 24 Track 56

Exchange in mono track units Exchange in mono track units

Exchange in 8 track units

<Notes> <Notes>
• You cannot record data on Additional tracks • The “Format conversion of the additional track”
in real-time. Also, you cannot play back data menu is contained in the SETUP mode of this
on Additional tracks as is in real-time. recorder.
If you wish to play back data on an Using this menu, it is possible to convert or
Additional track, first use the Track Exchange reverse convert, the additional track format
function to move the data to a Real track. of the current drive presently in use to the
Also, you need to move the data to a Real “V2 (56)” format (real track + additional track
track if you wish to check the REC END point = 56).
of a song on an Additional track. Refer to
page “74” for more information on the Track With this menu, the additional track format
Exchange function. of the current drive presently in use can be
converted or reverse converted from the “V2
• Data on the Additional tracks also affects the (56)” format (real track + additional track =
REMAIN value. If Real tracks contain no data, 56) to the “V1 (24)” format (real track +
but Additional tracks contain data, the additional track = 24).
amount of data (time and space) will be What this menu is that hard disk
reflected in the REMAIN value. compatibility is possible between the “V2
• If the record time of the data existing on the (56)” format D2424/D824mkII/D1624mkII
additional track is longer than the data on and the “V1 (24)” format D824/D1624.
the real track and all tracks are saved on an In other words, a hard disk recorded in “V2
external DAT or adat, then the data of the (56)” format equipment can be used in “V1
additional track can only be saved for the (24)” format equipment, or the reverse.
time equal to the real track, and the However, care must be taken when
remaining data is not saved. This is because converting the format. Refer to the SETUP
the ABS 0 to REC END of the real track is mode in page “133” for details.
automatically recognized and saved. There
is a need to exchange the track using the • Track composition of a D2424LV formatted
track exchange function in this case, as well. in 96kHz/24bit or 88.2kHz/24bit will be 8
Refer to page “87” for more information on Real Tracks + 48 Additional Tracks.
the SAVE/LOAD function.

27
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Before Starting)

Input monitoring and playback monitoring

There are two methods for monitoring track sound (only on the Real tracks): input monitoring and
playback monitoring. They are defined as follows:

Input monitoring
Input monitoring means to listen to what is being input to the recorder so that you can verify sound
quality and etc. Either one of the following procedure is used to input monitor any Real Track or all
Real Tracks.

• Entering any Real Track to input monitoring

To enter any desired track for Input Monitoring, press the * The following example shows track 5 in Input Monitoring
desired [RECORD TRACK] select key to enter it in the READY mode and other tracks in Playback Monitoring mode.
mode and then press the [RECORD] button. If the [RECORD]
button is pressed again, the recorder will enter the repro
mode. The recorder will enter record standby mode and
Track 8
the READY track only will be Input Monitoring.
Track 7
The recording level can now be adjusted. Track 6
Track 5
• Entering all Real Tracks to input monitoring Keyboard Mixer section
Track 4 (Vocal)
Monitoring
section
To enter all Real Tracks to input monitoring, press the Track 3 (Guitar)
[TRACK SHIFT] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key. Track 2 (Bass)
Unlike the previous case of selecting any desired track,
Track 1 (Drum machine)
Real Tracks can all be input monitored even though the Recorder section
[RECORD] button is not pressed. After adjusting the
recording level, to simultaneously start recording all tracks,
enter all tracks in the READY mode by pressing the
This example shows overdubbing in which the keyboard is
[RECORD] button while holding down the [SHIFT] key.
recorded on track 5 while tracks 1-4 are being played. Tracks 1-4
are in Playback Monitoring mode and used to check the playback
• Entering a track set to Input Monitoring to sound. Track 5 is in Input Monitoring mode. You can monitor the
“recording mode” recorded sound.
To enter the recording mode with any desired track or all
tracks in the READY state, press the PLAY button while <Note>
holding down the [RECORD] button. READY tracks will When in the "Auto EE MD?" menu of the D2424LV SETUP
enter the recording mode, the READY track LED change to
mode, the all input monitor mode can be entered auto-
constant light and the RECORD LED will be lit.
matically when D2424LV stops.
Simultaneous with entering the recording mode, READY
tracks will be input monitoring and recording can be done For details, refer to the SETUP mode "Auto EE MD?" menu
while monitoring the recording sound at the recorder in page 124.
output.

Playback monitoring
“Playback monitoring” means to monitor the playback sound of the tracks (only Real tracks).
That is, you are monitoring the playback sound on the track, not the sound being recorded to the
track.

* The following example shows that all tracks are in Playback Monitoring mode.

Track 8 (Piano)
Track 7 (Keyboard)
Track 6 (Vocal)
Track 5 (Vocal) In this example, all tracks 1-8 are playing
Monitoring the recorded sound in Playback Monitoring
Track 4 (Guitar-2) section
mode.
Track 3 (Guitar-1)

Track 2 (Bass)

Track 1 (Drum machine)

Recorder section

* To play the sound on an Additional track, you need to move the data from the Additional track to a
Real track. Refer to “Track Exchange function” on page “74” for more information.

28
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Before Starting)

Audio file and event

<About an audio file>
During recording, the recorder consecutively records an independent audio file (recorded area) in
each track of each Program. However, you can record data on the recorder at any point within 24
hours of ABS time, and you can intentionally create silence between two audio files. In this case, a
silent part is counted as a 0 file.
Therefore, audio files and 0 files are consecutively created as shown in the diagram below.
The total number of these audio files and 0 files is called “the number of events.” The maximum
number of events is 512 per track (tracks 1-24). After the number of events reaches 508, new data
will not be recorded.

ABS 0 REC END

Audio File 1 Audio File 2 0 File 1 Audio File 3 0 File 2 Audio File 4

Recorded part Silence

Usually, an event is created by one recording or edit. The number of events increases or decreases
depending on the number of edit points or the amount of disk free space. (The recorder disk
management operates in such way that the number of events will decrease.) The number of events
does not affect usual music production. However, if a small amount of single-track data is written
in many different sections on the disk, the maximum number of events may be reached. To avoid
this “event number overflow,” you need to check the number of events for each track.
The recorder provides an event check menu in Setup mode for this purpose.

<Notes on digital recording>

During analog recording, “0 files” are not created since silence does not create “data 0.” However, during S/P DIF
and adat digital recording, the recorder records “data 0” (this is called “mute recording”). When one second of
consecutive data 0 is input to the recorder, it creates a “0 file” and limits the consumption of disk space. However,
repeating this operation will eventually increase the number of events, leading to “event number overflow.”

What is an event?
As shown in the diagram below, the number of events can be eleven or more if partial recordings
are made. This is because an unrecorded part is regarded as an event, and a recorded part is also
regarded as an event(s). The duration of each event can vary from 740 msec to 23 hours 59
minutes 59 seconds (FS =44.1kHz).

ABS 0 REC END ABS 23h 59m

Event Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Recorded part (shortest: 740 msec., FS=44.1kHz)

Unrecorded part (shortest: 740 msec., FS=44.1kHz)

An unrecorded part (zero file) is always regarded as one even, regardless of its duration.
However, a recorded part can consist of a group of multiple audio file, as shown in the diagram
below. More precisely, one audio file will be divided into multiple audio files if perform many
editing operations (such as , copy & paste, move & paste, etc.) on this audio file. Multiple audio files
created in this way are regarded as events. (If you do not edit the data at all, the audio file remains
in one piece and is regarded as one event.)
In this example, one recorded area consists of six consecutive audio files. This means that this part
consists of six events.

29
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Before Starting)

Recorded Area

0 File Audio File 1 Audio File 2 Audio File 3 Audio File 4 Audio File 5 Audio File 6 0 File
Event Number n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4 n+5 n+6

This is because when you perform a copy & paste, move & paste, or Auto Punch In/Out, the event
is split at the edit point. Also, if a continuous long recording is made, the recorded data might
scatter to different locations on the hard disk, thus dividing the data unto multiple events.

CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point

0 File Audio File 1 Audio File 2 Audio File 3 Audio File 4 Audio File 5 Audio File 6 0 File
Event Number n+1 n+2 n+3 n+4 n+5 n+6

Countermeasures against accumulating too many events due to a long recording plus many editing
operations:
One solution is to save and re-load the data to and from a DAT, adat, or SCSI device. (If the song is
too long, you may not be able to save the data to a DAT or adat.)

In this way, multiple consecutive audio files are optimized into one continuous audio file in some
cases. Set the Clipboard In point and the Clipboard Out points within an unrecorded range to copy
the area (the area that contains multiple audio files and you wish to optimize) between them, then
paste the data starting from the same Clipboard In point. Multiple audio files within this range will
become a single audio file.

<Hints>
Make sure that you set the Clipboard In/Out points within zero files, and that you paste the area
starting from the same Clipboard In point.

* In any case, bear in mind that you cannot reduce the excessive number of events if the target
range contains a zero file.

<Setup to writable/not writable of the “0 file”>

There is menu for writing or not of the “0 file” in the SETUP mode of this recorder.
At the initial setup, it is set to “Writing in the 0 file (Enable)” but by changing this to “Not writing in the
0 file (Disable),” writing the “0 file” in the disk can be stopped.

By doing so, the above mentioned “event over” can be prevented. For details, refer to SETUP mode
in page “131.”

30
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Formatting and Optimizing Disks)

Formatting and Optimizing Disks

This section describes how to format and optimize a current drive disk and a backup disk.
You can also find information regarding formatting and optimizing the disks in the Quick Operation
Guide and in the “Saving and Loading Song Data” section of this manual.

Formatting a current drive disk

Before you format a current drive disk, specify the sampling frequency and bit (data) resolution,
Multiple Undo on/off, and format type parameters. Refer to the table below for more information
on these settings.

<Note>
Normally, the current drive sampling frequency (Hereafter called FS) is setup at formatting. This will
continue to be the same for the programs produced in the disk after formatting. However, in this
recorder, the FS of each program can be changed to match the application. For details, refer to the “Quick
Operation Guide” or the later page “39.”

<Detailed formatting parameters>

Sampling Frequency 44.1kHz 48kHz 88.2kHz 96kHz
Quantization 16 bits 24 bits 16 bits 24 bits 24 bits 24 bits

Turn this function on to use the Multiple Undo function for all takes (recordings and edits).
On This function consumes more disk space. If you are using a small capacity disk, turn this
function off.
Multiple Undo
Function Turn this function off to use the undo/redo function only for the current take (recording or edit).
Off
If the capacity of the current drive disk is small, turn this function off.

The recorder formats a disk while evaluating the integrity of the disk, including the access time
Standard Format for each block on the disk. Time required for formatting is longer, but you can be sure of a
(Default Setting) highly reliable format. Ordinarily, this format type is selected. This option is displayed and
accessible whether you format a new disk or reformat an old disk.

With this simple format type, the recorder assumes that all sectors on the hard disk are of
good quality. Time required for formatting is shorter, but any bad sectors would not be detected.
Quick Format Select this format type when you format a brand new disk for which Fostex has confirmed
Format Type quality operation. You can select this format type only when you format a new disk or reformat
a disk previously formatted with Quick Format.

You can select this format type only when you reformat a disk previously formatted with Standard
Erase Format Format. Use of this format will erase all data on the disk while keeping the Standard Format.
Time required for formatting is shorter than when using Standard Format.

8 real tracks
Track architecture 24 real tracks + 32 additional tracks +
48 additional tracks

• 24-track simultaneous analog recording • 8-track simultaneous analog

• 24-track simultaneous analog (22 tracks) and digital (2 tracks recording
-S/P DIF) recording • 8-track simultaneous analog (6
Recording • 24-track simultaneous analog (16 tracks) and digital (8 tracks tracks) and digital (2 tracks - S/
- adat) recording P DIF) recording
• 24-track simultaneous adat digital recording

• Saving and loading data via adat or S/P DIF digital signal • Saving and loading data via
• Saving and loading data via SCSI (FDMS-3 or WAVE) SCSI (FDMS-3 or WAVE)
Save/Load • Saving and loading data via E-IDE hard disk or optional • Saving and loading data via E-
Model 9046 DVD-RAM drive (FDMS-3 or WAVE) IDE hard disk or optional Model
9046 DVD-RAM drive (FDMS-3
or WAVE)

31
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Formatting and Optimizing Disks)

<Available recording time after formatting>

A greater sampling frequency will reduce the available recording time/space after formatting. Under the same
sampling frequency setting, the greater quantization (bit number) reduces the available recording time.
The following table shows the "approximate available recording time" under each sampling frequency/quantization.
Depending on your medium, the available recording time may differ slightly. It will be a good idea to check the
available recording time after formatting.

44.1kHz 48kHz 88.2kHz 96kHz

Capacity
16 bits 24 bits 16 bits 24 bits 24 bits 24 bits
10.0GB Approx. 1888 min. Approx. 1258 min. Approx. 1735 min. Approx. 1156 min. Approx. 628 min. Approx. 577 min.

Formatting a brand new hard disk (Current drive)

This section describes how to format an E-IDE hard disk used for the current drive, assuming that a hard disk
has already been installed in the recorder.
Refer to next page on newly formatting the E-IDE hard disk for backup (or the optional DVD-RAM drive).
Flashing

1.Turn on the power to the recorder. SETUP

The recorder displays the ROM version, time and date, OL

0
OL
0
BIT

then displays “Initializing...”, “Current IDE Drv”,

3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
“(model name of the hard disk)” in this order, then 24
30
42
24
30
42
∞ ∞

“Unformat !” momentarily. Finally, the unit displays 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

the “Disk Format?” menu in Setup mode, showing the

following screen.
5.After setting the multiple undo function on or off
Flashing
using the Jog dial, press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
SETUP
The recorder displays the screen which enables you to
OL
0
OL
0
BIT
select the format type. With the default setting,
“Standard Format?” appears.
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
Be sure to select “Standard Format?” to format an
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
unformatted disk.
Flashing

2.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. SETUP

The model name of the current E-IDE hard disk and “?” OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT

6 6 FS
flash on the screen. 9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz

24 24
30 30
42 42
Flashing ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞

SETUP

OL OL BIT
0 0
3
6
9
12
18
3
6
9
12
18
FS
kHz
CLOCK
6.Press and hold down the [RECORD] button and
24 24
30
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
30
42
∞ press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The recorder starts formatting the disk, and displays
the size of the unformatted area on the target disk.
3.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again. This value counts down as the formatting operation
The recorder displays the screen that enables you to set proceeds. Wait until the format operation is complete.
the sampling frequency and bit resolution. (With the SETUP REMAIN

default setting, “44.1kHz 24bit?” appears.)

OL OL

Refer to the table on page 31 and turn the Jog dial to 0 0

BIT
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz

select the desired setting. 12

18
24
30
12
18
24
30
CLOCK

42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Flashing Flashing

SETUP SURE?
Lit FS and bit resolution

OL OL BIT
0 0
3 3 SETUP COMPLETED!
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24
30 30 OL OL BIT 24
42 42 0 0
∞ ∞ 3 3
6 6 FS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

4.After you select the desired sampling frequency

and bit resolution using the Jog dial, press the Lit (“INT”)
[EXECUTE/YES] key.
The recorder displays the screen which enables you to 7.After formatting is complete, press the [EXIT/NO]
set the Multiple Undo function on or off. key (or the [STOP] button).

32
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Formatting and Optimizing Disks)

Re-Formatting the Current Drive or Newly Formatting the Backup Drive

Follow procedures below to re-format the current drive or newly format the E-IDE hard disk for backup.

<Note>
You cannot use the recorder to format a back-up E-IDE hard disk for saving and loading WAV files. First,
format the disk for WAV files using a computer (PC/AT).

1.Turn on the power to the recorder. 5.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

The recorder starts with an indication of the beginning The recorder displays the screen that enables you to set
(Timebase: ABS 0) of the program that was selected the sampling frequency and bit resolution.
before the power was turned off. The FS/quantization display when "IDE2" is selected, will
Even if a back-up E-IDE hard disk is installed, the show the same figure for the current drive and any other
current drive starts up when the power is turned on. cannot be selected.
Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key while the present screen is
2.Press the [SETUP] key to put the recorder into shown in the display.
Setup mode.
6.Select the desired sampling frequency and bit
3.Use the Jog dial to select “Disk Format ?” and resolution using the Jog dial, and press the
press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. [EXECUTE/YES] key.
“IDE1” flashes in the same way mentioned in The recorder displays the screen which enables you to
“Formatting a new disk.” set the Multiple Undo function on or off.

7.Set the Multiple Undo function on or off using the

SETUP

Jog dial, and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT The recorder displays the screen which enables you to
42 42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞
select the format type. If you have formatted the disk
with Standard Format, you can select either Standard
Format or Erase Format.
Flashing
If you have formatted the disk with Quick Format, you
SETUP can select either Standard Format or Quick Format.
OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT
FS
Be sure to select “Standard Format?” to format a back-up
9 9

E-IDE hard disk.

kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

8.Use the Jog dial to select the desired format type,

then press and hold down the [RECORD] button
To format the current drive, select “IDE1.” To format a
back-up E-IDE hard disk, select “IDE2.” and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The recorder starts formatting the disk.

4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key while “IDE1” or

“IDE2” is flashing.
The model name of the current drive’s hard disk appears
and “SURE ?” flashes.

Formatting a backup disk (SCSI disk or optional DVD-RAM disk)

In the following, the disk for backup (SCSI disk or optional DVD-RAM disk) will be formatted.
The disk for backup will be formatted in "24 bit Backup" or "16 bit Backup" to match the current drive quanti-
zation.

<Note>
You cannot use the recorder to format a SCSI disk (or optional DVD-RAM disk) for saving and loading WAV
files. First, format the disk for WAV files using a computer (PC/AT).

1.Press the [SETUP] key to put the recorder into Flashing

Setup mode. SETUP

OL OL BIT
0 0

2.Turn the Jog dial to select the “Disk Format?” menu 3

6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz
18 18 CLOCK

and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 24

30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
“IDE1” flashes.

33
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Formatting and Optimizing Disks)

3.Use the Jog dial to select flashing “SCSI” (or <Bit resolution>
“IDE2”) and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. The same figures in quantization of the current drive
When formatting the disk of the SCSI drive connected to will be displayed for quantization of the backup for-
the SCSI connector, select "SCSI" or, "IDE2" when mat. Thus, when the current drive is 24bit, “24bit
formatting the optional DVD-RAM disk. Backup? ” will be displayed, and for 16bit, “ 16bit
When the [EXECUTE/YES] key is pressed, the drive name Backup?” will be displayed.
will be shown in the display.
Flashing Flashing
5.Press and hold down the [RECORD] button and
SETUP SURE? press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
OL OL BIT 24
The recorder starts the backup format operation.
0 0
3
6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz
During the format operation, “REMAIN” lights up on the
CLOCK
screen and the recorder indicates the size of the
18 18
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
unformatted area on the disk, which counts down as
the format operation proceeds. Wait until formatting is
complete. When the format operation is complete,
4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again.
“COMPLETED !” lights up and the disk stops spinning.
The backup format will be displayed.
Depending on quantization of the current drive, either
"24 bit Backup?" or "16 bit Backup?" will be shown. 6.Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] button) to
exit Setup mode.
Flashing Flashing
The recorder displays the time base value of the current
SETUP SURE? drive that was shown before the unit entered Setup mode.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3
6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz
To eject the disk from the backup drive, press the [EJECT]
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT
button on the drive.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Optimizing the disk

If you are using a disk that was formatted with the Multiple Undo function turned on, free disk space becomes
smaller quickly because the disk always keeps the Multiple Undo files. Optimizing such a disk (using the “Disk
Optimize?” menu in Setup mode) will increase free block space.

<Notes>
• After you record multiple takes, if you optimize the disk (with the Multiple Undo function turned on), you will
be able to undo only the most recent take. Therefore, if you wish to keep some takes, perform the Multiple Undo
function or use the Program duplicate function to restore the take, then optimize the disk. For more information,
see “Multiple Undo Function” on page 66.
• After executing a format conversion via the “Additional track format conversion” menu in the SETUP mode, the
recorder will automatically enter the “Disk Optimize?” menu.
Therefore, we recommended that you optimize the disk immediately after format conversion. By optimizing,
the multiple undo history of tracks 25-56 will be erased and disk memory space may increase. For details on
additional track format conversion, refer to page “132.”

1.While the disk is not being accessed, press the 3.Press and hold down the [RECORD] button and
[SETUP] key to put the unit into Setup mode. press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The disk optimize function starts. When it is complete,
2.Turn the Jog dial to select the “Disk Optimize?” “COMPLETED!” lights up.
menu and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
Lit
The recorder displays the following indication and
“SURE ?” flashes. SETUP COMPLETED!

SETUP OL OL
0 0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
OL OL 12 12
0 0
BIT 24 18 18 CLOCK
3 3 24 24 INT
6 6 FS 30 30
9 9 42 42
kHz ∞ ∞
12 12
18 18 CLOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing 4.Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] button) to exit

Setup mode.
SETUP SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

34
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Handling Programs)

Handling Programs
This chapter explains how to handle Programs. It covers the following topics:

1. Creating a new Program

2. Using a Program Change function
3. Duplicating a Program
4. Deleting a Program
5. Editing a Program title
6. Changing the program FS

Creating a new Program

You can manage individual songs by setting multiple programs on the disk, as explained in the
“Managing Songs by Program Selection” section of the “Before Starting” chapter. You can set up to
99 Programs. One Program is automatically created on the disk when the disk is newly formatted
with this equipment. Follow the steps below to create a new Program. The prerequisite of this
operation is that the disk is in an “initial state” where there is only one Program on the disk.

<Note>
• When a new program is made, the same initial setup of the currently active program will be copied as the initial
setting for the new program. If you wish to make a new program under the same settings as those of a previous
program, call up the desired program to be copied before making the new program.
• A new compilation is possible only when the "Chain Play?" (Setup of the chain play mode) menu in the SETUP
mode is set to "Off." If the [PGM SEL] key is pressed when the "Chain Play?" menu is set in other than the "Off"
mode, the D2424LV will enter the "Chain play mode." Before starting compilation, check that the "Chain Play?"
is "Off" and if it is not, be sure to reset it to "Off."

1. Turn on the power to the recorder.

Flashing Flashing Flashing
Upon starting up the recorder, “Initialize...”-> “Current
IDE Drv” -> “Hard disk model number”-> “Storage mode SURE?

(“Standard format” in this case) messages are followed OL OL

PGM

0 0
BIT 24

with an ABS time base, then show the top of the Program 3
6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
12 12

(ABS 0). At this time, the current Program is indicated 18

24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
42 42

as “P01”. ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞

2. Press the [PGM SEL] key.

“Select PGM!” appears on the display briefly, then 4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
changes to a flashing “01” and “SURE?” flash. (“******” The recorder automatically enters “Title Edit PGM?” menu
is the name of PGM 01.) in SETUP mode. You can enter a title for Program 2.
(“?” flash.) If you prefer the default name, press the
[EXIT/NO] key.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6
9
6
9
FS Flashing
kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42 SETUP
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
Flashing Flashing ∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

SURE?

PGM
OL OL BIT 24

5. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again.

0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
CLOCK
A default title (#0002) appears on the display, with “#”
18 18
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 and “SURE?” flashing. This means that you can enter a
name for the new Program.
If you wish to name the Program with a unique title,
3. Turn the Jog dial clockwise. continue the steps below.
The question marks “?” of “[New Program?]” and “SURE?” In either case, you can change the title later, as explained
flash. This indication asks you if you wish to set a new in “Editing a Program title.”
Program (Program 2).

35
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Handling Programs)

6. When you finish entering the title, press the

To enter a title: [EXECUTE/YES] key.
• Turn the Jog dial, or pressing the [NEXT] key and Program 2 (PGM 02) and its title are set.
[PREV] key for the flashing cursor to voluntarily input The display shows the ABS Time Base indication of the
alphanumerics. Program.
Press the [PREV] key/[NEXT] key and the recorder will
jump to the letters/symbols listed below (small square 7. Press the [EXIT/NO] key, or [STOP] button.
position).

• Move the flashing cursor with the Shuttle dial. <Important!>

• When you create a new Program by selecting the
• You can input the following alphanumerics and “New PGM ?” menu, a new Program is created with
symbols. an increment number.
Titles can contain up to 16 alphanumeric characters. That is, if only one Program exists and when you
create a new Program, it will be named Program
2. If Programs 1-5 already exist, a new Program
number will be 6.

• Remember that producing new programs

gradually decreases recordable disk space.
If disk space is insufficient, or if 99 programs have
already been created, you cannot create more new
programs.
If a new program is attempted, “Can’t New PGM!”
will indicate that the operation is invalid.

Duplicating a Program
Any program content (Recording data/various setup items) can be duplicated but with a separate
program number.

<Notes>
* Duplicating a program is possible only when the Multiple Undo function is set to ON when formatting the
current drive. In a current drive with this setting at OFF, the “PGM Duplicate?” message will not display when
pressing the [EDIT] key mentioned below.
* The program which can be duplicated must be the currently active program.
Therefore, the program you wish to duplicate must be activated prior to executing the duplicating mode.

1. With this recorder in the stop mode, press the

<Note>
[EDIT] key to display “PGM Duplicate?” (“?”
The program to be duplicated will be assigned with a
flashes). program number following that of the program
Flashing
presently existing in the disk.
If “Duplicate P01 > 05” is displayed as in the previous
OL OL BIT 24
example, this indicates that four programs presently
0 0
3
6
9
12
3
6
9
12
kHz
FS
exist in the disk and that the new program will be
number 05.
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 If the duplicated program is to be checked or you wish
to switch to this program, refer to the next item
2. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. “Selecting a program.”
As an example, the following is displayed and “SURE?”
will flash. This means that program 01 will be duplicated 3. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again.
for program 05, the new program 05. Refer see <Note> The display will change to head of the duplicated
below. original program (P01 in this example), and
Flashing “COMPLETED!” will light.

SURE?
4. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] button).
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
“COMPLETED!” will be extinguished.
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT
By following these procedures, the same content in
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
program 01 is duplicated in program 05.

36
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Handling Programs)

Using a Program Change function

If multiple Programs exist on the disk, you need to select a Program to record, play, or edit.
This section describes how to select a Program.

<Notes>
• You cannot use the Program Change function when the recorder is in SETUP mode.
• The program change is possible only when the “Chain Play?” (Setup of the chain play mode) menu in the
SETUP mode is set to “Off.” If the [PGM SEL] key is pressed when the “Chain Play?” menu is set in other than
the “Off” mode, the recorder will enter the “Chain Play mode.” Before starting program change, check that
the “Chain Play?” menu is “Off” and if it is not, be sure to reset it to “Off.”

1. When the recorder is stopped, press the [PGM SEL] Rotating the Jog dial counter-clockwise decreases the
key. number, and rotating it clockwise increases the number.
If you turn the Jog dial clockwise all the way, “New
“Select PGM!” appears on the display briefly, then
Program?” will be selected. Select “New Program ?” to
changes to a flashing “01” and “SURE?”. (“****” is the
create a new Program as mentioned in the previous
name of PGM 01.)
section “Creating a new Program.”

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3
6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz
3. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
24
30
42
INT
The ABS Time Base indication for the selected Program
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
appears.

Flashing Flashing In this way, you can be sure to select a Program before
you start working.
SURE?

PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

2. Turn the Jog dial to select the desired Program

number (flashing).

Deleting a Program
This section explains how to delete an unnecessary Program.
Deleting an unnecessary Program will expand the recordable area, making your work flow more
smoothly, since recording or editing requires sufficient recordable area (free space on the disk).
Use the “Delete PGM ?” menu in SETUP mode to delete a Program.

<Notes on deleting a Program>

• You can delete only the currently-selected Program. Refer to the
previous section, “Using a Program Change function,” for
information on how to select the desired Program before you
proceed to delete the Program. P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06 P07
• If only one Program exists and you try to delete it, data contained
in the Program will be deleted, but the Program itself will remain. If you try to deleted PGM 05, only the
For example, assume that PGM 01 -07 exist and you try to delete data of PGM 05 will be deleted and the
PGM 05. Program number 05 will remain, but the data inside PGM data of PGM 06 will move into PGM 05.

05 will be replaced with the data of PGM 06.

The subsequent Programs’ data will move in the same way. After deleted
Therefore, it will appear that PGM 07 has been deleted.
If you delete the last Program (PGM 07 in this example), PGM 07 P01 P02 P03 P04 P05 P06
will be completely deleted.
If you try to deleted PGM 05, only the data of PGM 05 will be deleted
and the data of PGM 06 will move into PGM 05.

<Note>
You cannot use the Single Undo/Redo function, and Multiple Undo function to delete Programs. Make sure that you
delete the correct Program.

37
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Handling Programs)

1. Press the [SETUP] key while the recorder is Flashing

stopped, to put the system in the SETUP mode. SETUP SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
0 0

2. Turn the Jog dial to select the first hierarchy of the 3

6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz
18 18 CLOCK

“Delete PGM ** ?” (deleting a Program) menu. 24

30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT

Alternatively, you can use the Shuttle dial, [REV] key, or 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

[NEXT] key.
To cancel the delete operation, press the [EXIT/NO]
SETUP
key while “SURE?” is flashing. Each time you press
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 the button or key, the recorder will return to a higher
3 3
6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz level in the hierarchy, and finally exit SETUP mode.
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again.

When the recorder displays “Deleting...” and finishes
3. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. deleting the Program, the data of the next Program
The display will change and “SURE?” will flash? number moves in, and its ABS time appears.
This indicates that the system is in the stand-by state to
delete a program that is currently started up. 5. Press the [EXIT/NO] key, or [STOP] button.
To check the REMAIN time and free space, press the
[DISP SEL] key to display the “REMAIN” indication
after the Program is deleted.

Editing a Program title

You can name the Program as explained in the “Creating a new Program” section.
You can also change the title later by using the “Title Edit ?” menu in SETUP mode.

<Note>
You can edit the title of the selected Program before you select SETUP mode. You cannot select a Program after the
recorder enters SETUP mode. Be sure to select the desired Program using the steps explained in the “Using the
Program Change function” section.

1. Press the [SETUP] key while the recorder is 4. Move the flashing cursor with the Shuttle dial and
stopped, to put the system in the SETUP mode. input the letter or number with the Jog dial / [NEXT]
key / [PREV] key.
2. Turn the Jog dial to select the first hierarchy level Up to 16 digits and the following letters / numbers /
symbols can be input.
of the “Title Edit ?” (“?” flash.) menu.
Flashing Press the [PREV] key/[NEXT] key and the recorder
will jump to the letters/symbols listed below (small
SETUP
square position).
PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

The currently-selected Program title appears with the
left-most character flashing.

Flashing 5. After you enter the title, press the [EXECUTE/YES]

key.
SETUP
The new title is confirmed, and the ABS time value of
OL
0
OL
0
BIT
PGM
24 the Program appears.
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
30
42
∞ 6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key, or the [STOP] button.

38
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Handling Programs)

Changing the program FS

Normally, when a new program is produced on the disk, this program will be made using the same
sampling frequency and quantization figures set when the disk was last formatted.
As explained in the separate sheet “Quick Operation Guide,” the recorder’s FS can be changed
subsequent to producing the program, so that it will be suitable for the application.
However, the changing the FS will be limited by the quantization figure used at formatting.

<Note: There is a limit to FS’s which can be changed!>

The following FS is limited, depending on the quantization figure (16 bit or 24 bit) set when formatting the current
drive.

* 16 bit current drive -> 44.1kHz or 48kHz

* 24 bit current drive -> 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz or 96kHz

<Notes>
• FS can converted only in the program that is currently active. Do not change the FS of a program that has been
finished. Prerecorded data cannot be guaranteed.

• Do not copy & paste track data between programs with different FS.
Fostex does not guarantee song data which is created using the copy & paste function between programs with
different FS.

1. Press the [SETUP] key while the recorder is

<Note>
stopped, to put the system in the SETUP mode. If you change the FS (44.1 or 48kHz) of a program
in the 24-track mode to 88.2 or 96kHz, the program
2. Turn the Jog dial to select the first hierarchy level automatically changes to the 8-track mode and track
numbers 1 through 8 on the display are lit.
of the “Sample Rate?” (“?” flash.) menu, and then
The following shows display examples when
press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. changing the FS of a 48-kHz/24-bit program to
The currently-set FS will flash. 96kHz.

Flashing
ABS
M S F
SETUP
PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
OL OL 24 6 6 FS
0 0
BIT 9 9 kHz
3 3 12 12
6 6 FS 18 18 CLOCK
9 9 24 24 INT
kHz 30 30
12 12 42 42
18 18 CLOCK ∞ ∞
24 24 INT
30 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

ABS

Flashing M S F

PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
SETUP 3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
OL OL 30 30
0 0
BIT 24 42 42
∞ ∞
3 3
6 6 FS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Track numbers 1 through 8 are effective.

Also, note that if you change a program recorded in

3. Select the desired FS via the Jog dial and press the 24-track mode to an FS of the 8-track mode,
the [EXECUTE/YES] key. tracks 1 through 8 can be used as real tracks,
Either 44.1 or 48 can be selected in a 16 bit program however, tracks 9 through 24 are data for additional
and any one of 44.1/48/88.2/96 can be selected for a tracks.
24 bit program. In other words, you cannot playback song data on
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key will set the selected FS track 9 through 24 in realtime.
and change the display to the “Sample Rate?” menu. To playback tracks 9 through 24, use the track
exchange function to move data to real tracks.
4. Press the [EXIT/NO] key, or the [STOP] button.
The recorder will change to the head (ABS 0) of the
Normal display.

39
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Punch In/Out)

Punch In/Out
What is Punch In/Out recording?
Punch In/Out recording enables you to record over previously-recorded parts. See the
diagram below. For example, using the Punch In/Out function allows you to change an
unsatisfactory guitar solo. The D2424LV offers two types of Punch In/Out functions. One
is called Auto Punch In/Out, in which you automatically re-record a specified part. The other
is called Manual Punch In/Out, in which you record data manually (using your foot to operate
an optional foot switch, model 8051). Both functions feature “Rehearsal mode” to enable
you to practice repeatedly until you are ready.

• Select a Program for Punch In/Out recording.

• Initialize the recorder.
• Check a sampling frequency of the recorder and external device.

<Notes>
• You can use the Punch In/Out recording only for Real tracks. If you wish to use Punch In/Out
recording for data on an Additional track, first move the data to the Real tracks.

• Before doing punch in/out, check that the SETUP mode “Chain Play?” menu is “Off.” If it is set
in other than “Off,” chain play will be executed.

Auto Punch In/Out

To perform Auto Punch In/Out recording, you need to specify the Auto Punch In point (recording
start point) and the Auto Punch Out point (recording end point).

Preparation Previewing and trimming the edit points

You can check the stored edit points by pressing the
Storing the edit points corresponding memory keys to display them on the
LCD. You can also change the points if necessary.
1. Refer to “Storing the edit points” to set the Auto In this example, use the Preview function to fine-
Punch In/Out points. tune the point while previewing.
Store the Auto Punch In point to the [AUTO PUNCH IN]
key, and the Auto Punch Out point to the [AUTO PUNCH
OUT] key. 1. While the recorder is stopped, hold down the
[SHIFT] key and press the memory key.
• Refer to page “51” for more information on storing Pressing the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key enables you to listen
the edit points.
to the sound at the AUTO PUNCH IN point (“previewing
the sound rise [fade-out]”).
Pressing the [AUTO PUNCH OUT] key enables you to listen
<Note> to the sound at the AUTO PUNCH OUT point (“previewing
Make sure that you specify an Auto Punch In point the sound fall [fade-in]”).
that precedes the Auto Punch Out point. If the Auto
Punch Out point precedes the Auto Punch In point, 2. Trim the edit point while auditioning the sound.
“Void Out!” appears and you will be unable to perform
Auto Punch In/Out recording. • Refer to page “64” for more information on the
Preview function.

40
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Punch In/Out)

4. Play the guitar accompanying the playback sound

Rehearsing Auto Punch In/Out recording from tracks 1 - 8 for rehearsal, while adjusting the
In Rehearsal mode, the READY track assumes recording level.
You will hear the guitar performance between the Auto
input monitoring mode between the Auto Punch In and Out points. Otherwise, you will hear the
Punch In and Out points, and the sound is not recorded guitar sound.
recorded. You can practice Auto Punch In/Out
operation repeatedly before you proceed to 5. When you are satisfied with your rehearsal, press
actual recording. Locate the recording start the [STOP] button.
position slightly before the Auto Punch In point.
<Hint 1>
<Tips for rehearsal> Locating a point slightly before the Auto Punch In point
Set the preroll value while referring to the To locate the playback start point for rehearsal, press
“ Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key, then press the [LOCATE] key.
chapter. In this way, the recorder can locate a The recorder displays the time (position) stored in the
point that precedes the Auto Punch In point by [AUTO PUNCH IN] key, and locates the point and stops.
the specified preroll value. This enables you to Press the [REWIND] button to go backward. If you have
start playback slightly before the Punch In point. set the preroll time as described on page “113,” you
(Refer to page “107” for more information on can locate a point that precedes the Auto Punch In point
“Changing the Initial Settings.”) The recorder will by the specified preroll value.
repeat playback data between the AUTO RTN
START point and the AUTO RTN END point if you Auto Punch In point Auto Punch Out point

set the AUTO RTN START point before the Auto Stop here.

Punch In point and the AUTO RTN END point after

the Auto Punch Out point. This allows you to
repeat rehearsal. See the “Hint-2.”. LOCATE
LOCATE

The recorder stops at a point that precedes the Auto

1. Press the [AUTO PUNCH] key. Punch In point by the specified preroll time. (0-10
seconds)
The AUTO PUNCH mode will turn ON. The REHEARSAL
LED (green) and TAKE LED (red) of the [AUTO PUNCH]
key will flash. <Hint 2>
AUTO
PUNCH REHEARSAL Quick and easy operation for repeated rehearsal
TAKE Using the Auto Return function and the Auto Play
function enables you to rehearse repeatedly.
As shown below, set the AUTO RTN START and END
2. Set the track for Auto Punch In/Out to READY.
points for Auto Return and Auto Play. In this way, you
Press the [RECORD TRACK] select key [3/11/19] to set track
can repeat rehearsal easily, while checking the recording
3 to READY.
level and concentrating on your performance.
Refer to page “51” for more information on setting the
3. Start playback of the recorder from a point slightly
AUTO RTN START/END points.
before the Auto Punch In point.
Only the REHEARSAL LED (green) will light up, and start
rehearsal. The recorder operates as shown in the figure Auto Punch In point Auto Punch Out point
below during rehearsal operations. Auto Return Start point Rehearsal area Auto Return End point
AUTO
PUNCH REHEARSAL

TAKE PLayback starts from the Auto Return Start point,

and you can rehearse Auto Punch In/Out.

When the Auto Return End point is reached, the

Auto punch In point Auto punch Out point
Playback start point (Rehearsal In) (Rehearsal Out) Playback end point recorder locates the Auto Return Start point.

Track 8

Track 7
Track 6
Track 5 <Note>
Track 4
If the recorder displays “Over!” when you turn on
Track 3 This part is changed.

Track 2
the Auto Punch mode, the disk does not have
Track 1 enough free space to perform Auto Punch In/
Out. In such a case, erase any unnecessary
All tracks are in playback Only track 3 in input monitoring. All tracks are in playback sections, delete unnecessary program data or
monitoring mode. The sound is not recorded monitoring mode.
at this time. The RECORD optimize the disk and execute again.
LED flashes.

The recorder punches in The recorder punches out

automatically at the automatically at the
Auto Punch In point. Auto Punch Out point.

41
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Punch In/Out)

Auto Punch In/Out Take 5. When you finish recording, press the [STOP]
button.
After you are satisfied with your rehearsal, you 6. Play track 3 to check the result of the Auto Punch
can proceed to an actual take of Auto Punch In/Out operation.
In/Out. If you fail with AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT and are not
You can undo or redo Auto Punch In/Out satisfied, repeat the process by performing the AUTO
PUNCH IN/OUT undo operations described in the next
recording if you change your mind. The control section.
panel settings are the same as those for
rehearsal.

1. Press the [RECORD TRACK] select key [3/11/19]

Single Undo/Redo
to set track 3 to READY.
You can single undo or redo Auto Punch In/
2. Locate a point slightly before the Auto Punch In Out recording.
point. Press the [UNDO/REDO] key after recording is
complete to restore the conditions that existed
3. Confirm that Auto Punch mode is turned on. prior to the recording.
Press the [AUTO PUNCH] key to turn on the function, if it
Press the [UNDO/REDO] key again to restore the
is not already on (REHEARSAL/TAKE LED flashes).
conditions that existed after the recording.
4. Press the [RECORD] button while holding down
However, the procedures explained here is for
the [PLAY] button.
Single Undo/Redo and there are limitations as
Only TAKE LED (red) lights up and starts TAKE.
written in the Notes below. If the current drive
AUTO
PUNCH REHEARSAL was formatted with the multiple undo function
ON, Multiple Undo is also possible.
TAKE
Refer to page “66” for details on the Multiple
Auto punch In point Auto punch Out point Undo function.
Playback start point (Take In) (Take Out) Playback end point

Track 8

Track 7
<Notes at executing single undo/redo>
Track 6
Track 5
Note-1: This function only works when this
Track 4
recorder is in the stop mode.
Track 3 This part is changed.

Track 2 Note-2: After finishing auto punch in/out, please

Track 1
note that single Undo/Redo is not possible if the
All tracks are in playback Only track 3 in input monitoring,
following have been executed.
All tracks are in playback
monitoring mode. and data will be recorded. monitoring mode.
The RECORD LED lights up • If a new recording has been made.
in this area.

The recorder punches in The recorder punches out

• When a new editing job is executed (such as
automatically at the automatically at the Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, or Erase).
Auto Punch In point. Auto Punch Out point.
• When in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when
the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the
• Track 3 indication on the display will only light up
between the AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT point, and will
PLAY (or RECORD) mode.
flash in any other case. • If the power was switched off.
• When the Auto Punch Out point is passed, the recorder
cancels Auto Punch mode automatically, and nothing • If program select was executed.
appears in the A. PUNCH display area.
• When multiple undo is executed.

<Caution after Punch Out>

In an FS=44.1kHz program, the simultaneously
recordable number of tracks is a maximum of 8.
In an FS=88.2/96kHz program, the maximum is 2 tracks
in which “seamless punch out” without mute can be
executed.
In simultaneous recording beyond this number, the
recorder will be muted for 3-5 seconds after punch out
but during actual recording, it will be a seamless punch
out. Depending on the speed of the hard disk being
used, when recording a fewer number of simultaneous
tracks than mentioned above, the recorder will also be
muted, but this poses no problem during actual
recording.

42
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Punch In/Out)

Manual Punch In/Out

This section explains how to perform Manual Punch In/Out using a foot switch (optional Model
8051). You do not need to specify the Punch In/Out points. Instead, you press the foot switch at
the Punch In/Out point. Manual Punch In/Out also offers rehearsal and actual takes. You can
repeat rehearsal until you are ready. As an example, replace a part of the recorded guitar solo on
track 3.
• Initialize the recorder.
• Select a desired Program for Punch In/Out.
• Check a sampling frequency of the recorder and external device.

Preparation 4.Play the guitar accompanying the playback of

tracks 1 to 8.
Check to see that the guitar is connected to the input The recording level and monitor volume is adjusted on
jack of the mixer, as required for [AUTO PUNCH IN/ the mixer in the same manner as done for [AUTO PUNCH
OUT] mentioned earlier. IN/OUT] described earlier.

1. Connect an optional foot switch (Model 8051) to 5.Press the foot switch once at the desired Punch
the PUNCH IN/OUT jack on the rear panel. In point, then press the foot switch again at the
desired Punch Out point.
The rehearsal mode will operate as shown in the figure.
Between the Punch In and Out points the current
performance of the guitar will be played as the guitar
monitor sound. The previous recording is heard in any
other case. The RECORD LED lights up when Punching
In and turn off when Punching Out (the REHEARSAL
LED remains flashing).
Punch In point Punch Out point
Playback start point (Rehearsal In) (Rehearsal Out) Playback end point

Track 8

Track 7
Model 8051 Foot switch Track 6
Track 5

Track 4
2.Set the foot switch function to “Punch I/O” (punch Track 3 This part is changed.

in/out function) by the SETUP mode “Setup of the Track 2

foot switch function” menu. Track 1

All tracks are in playback Only track 3 in input monitoring. All tracks are in playback
monitoring mode. The sound is not recorded monitoring mode.
at this time. The RECORD
LED flashes.

Rehearsing Manual Punch In/Out recording Press the foot switch Press the foot switch
at the Punch In point. at the Punch Out point.
In Rehearsal mode, the READY track enters input
monitoring mode between the Punch In and Out
points (the points at which you press the foot 6. When you finish rehearsing, press the [STOP]
switch), and the sound is not recorded. You can button.
practice the Punch In/Out operation repeatedly If you are still unsatisfied, repeat steps 3-5.
before you proceed to actual recording.
Cancelling Rehearsal mode
1. Press the foot switch while holding down the
[STOP] button. 1. While holding down the [STOP] button, press the
“Rehearsal On” will appear on the display or about 1 foot switch.
second, then rehearsal mode will appear and the The display shows “Rehearsal Off” for 1 second, then the
REHEARSAL LED (green) of the [AUTO PUNCH] key flashes. flashing REHEARSAL LED turns off and cancels the
AUTO
rehearsal mode.
PUNCH REHEARSAL

TAKE
<Hint>
To rehearse repeatedly, set the AUTO RTN START point
slightly before the Punch In point, and the AUTO RTN
END point slightly before the Punch Out point.
2. Press the [RECORD TRACK] select key [3/11/19] This will help you concentrate on your performance or
to set track 3 to READY. check the recording level easily (especially since Manual
Punch In/Out involves operating the foot switch
3. Press the [PLAY] button to play back from a point operation as well as the recorder). (See <Hint-2> in the
“Rehearsing Auto Punch In/Out recording” for more
slightly before the Punch In point. information.)

43
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Punch In/Out)

Manual Punch In/Out take <Hint>

You can use the [PLAY] button and the [RECORD]
You can proceed to record if you are satisfied button, instead of using the foot switch.
with the recording level, foot switch timing, and Follow the steps below.
rehearsal. This method also does not allow you to record
another take unless you stop the recorder first.
<Note> Procedure:
You cannot record a second take during the Manual
Punch In/Out operation without stopping the recorder. 1.Press the [PLAY] button to start playback from
That is, the recorder will continue playing after you a point slightly before the Punch In point.
finish recording a take, but you cannot record another
take by pressing the foot switch. 2.Press the [RECORD] button while holding down
1. Confirm that Rehearsal mode is cancelled, and the [PLAY] button at the desired Punch In point.
start playing the recorder from a point slightly (Punch In recording starts.)
before the desired Punch In point. 3.Press the [PLAY] button at the desired Punch
2. Play the guitar, accompanying the playback of Out point. (Recording is punched out.)
tracks 1 to 8.
• If you press only the [RECORD] button in both
3. Press the foot switch at the desired Punch In steps 2 and 3, you can rehearse Punch In/Out.
point. Press the foot switch again at the desired
Punch Out point.
Punch In point Punch Out point
Playback start point (Take In) (Take Out) Playback end point

Track 8 Single Undo/Redo

Track 7
Track 6 You can single undo or redo Manual Punch In/
Track 5

Track 4
Out recording.
Track 3 This part is changed.
Press the [UNDO/REDO] key after recording is
Track 2 complete to restore the conditions that existed
Track 1 prior to the recording.
Press the [UNDO/REDO] key again to restore the
All tracks are in playback Only track 3 in input monitorin, All tracks are in playback
monitoring mode. and data will be recorded. monitoring mode. conditions that existed after the recording.
The RECORD LED lights up
in this area. However, the procedures explained here is for
Press the foot switch Press the foot switch Single Undo/Redo and there are limitations as
at the Punch In point. at the Punch Out point. written in the Notes below. If the current drive
was formatted with the multiple undo function
ON, Multiple Undo is also possible.
The recorder enters recording mode at the Punch In
Refer to page “66” for details on the Multiple
point, and cancels recording mode at the Punch Out
point.
Undo function.

4. Press the [STOP] button. <Notes at executing single undo/redo>

5. Play track 3 and check the result of Punch In/Out. Note-1: This function only works when this
recorder is in the stop mode.
<Caution after Punch Out> Note-2: After finishing manual punch in/out,
In an FS=44.1kHz program, the simultaneously please note that single Undo/Redo is not possible
recordable number of tracks is a maximum of 8. if the following have been executed.
In an FS=88.2/96kHz program, the maximum is 2 tracks
in which “seamless punch out” without mute can be • If a new recording has been made.
executed.
In simultaneous recording beyond this number, the • When a new editing job is executed (such as
recorder will be muted for 3-5 seconds after punch out Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, or Erase).
but during actual recording, it will be a seamless punch • When in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when
out. Depending on the speed of the hard disk being
the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the
used, when recording a fewer number of simultaneous
tracks than mentioned above, the recorder will also be PLAY (or RECORD) mode.
muted, but this poses no problem during actual • If the power was switched off.
recording.
• If program select was executed.
• When multiple undo is executed.

44
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Recording Digital Data)

Recording Digital Data

Digital recording from an external digital device
In addition to multirecording by connection to a digital mixer as explained in the separate “Quick
Operation Guide” manual, the following explains the direct digital recording method by connection
to external digital equipment (CD, MD, DAT, adat, etc.).
When recording digital signals from an external digital equipment, digital signals to be input to the
[DATA INPUT] connector of the D2424LV must be setup for “S/P DIF” (S/P DIF digital signals) or
“adat” (adat digital signals) in the “Digital Input Setup” menu of the D2424LV SETUP mode.
At the same time, the digital-in clock (Sync mode/async mode) should also be selected and setup
for either sync with external digital signals or with the internal clock. Digital recording can be done
on the currently active program, and “Setup for digital inputs” will be effective on all programs
even when multiple number of programs are currently setup.

• Connecting external digital equipment

1. Interconnect the [DATA INPUT] connector of D2424LV and [OPTICAL OUT] (or adat OUT) connector of the
external digital equipment with an optical cable.
Depending on the digital signal (S/P DIF or adat) to be recorded, the [DATA INPUT] connector will function as explained
below.

<Notes on interconnecting>
When using the D2424LV [DATA INPUT] connector, it must be set for either S/P DIF digital signals (optical)
or adat digital signals via "Setup of digital inputs" in the SETUP mode. The connector type is the same for
S/P DIF digital signals and adat digital signals but information content of the digital signal is different.
Also, depending on the selected digital signal, each [DATA INPUT] connector will function as explained
below.

<When recording S/P DIF digital signals> <When recording adat digital signals>
[DATA INPUT] 1-8 only can be used. [DATA INPUT] 1-8, 9-16, 17-24 can all be used.
By setting the SETUP mode “Setup of digital in- By setting the SETUP mode “Setup of digital in-
puts” to "SPDIF: Async" or "SPDIF: sync," S/P DIF puts” to "adat: Async" or "adat: Sync," adat digital
digital signals that are input to [DATA INPUT] 1-8 signals input to each input connector will be as-
will be assigned to tracks 1 and 2 of the D2424LV. signed to each track of the D2424LV.

Tracks 1-2 Tracks 17-24 Tracks 9-16 Tracks 1-8

DATA
INPUT OUTPUT DATA
INPUT OUTPUT
24 - 17 16 - 9 8-1 24 - 17 16 - 9 8-1
24 - 17 16 - 9 8-1 24 - 17 16 - 9 8-1

S/P DIF digital signal adat digital signal

<Important!>
Be sure to input a digital signal (S/PDIF or adat) of the same sampling frequency as that used on the recorder.

<Note>
The [DATA INPUT] connectors of the unit does not support 96kHz FS adat digital signals.

* If the connected external device has only a COAXIAL (RCA pin) jack for digital output, use an optional
Fostex COP-1/96k (optical/coaxial converter).

45
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Recording Digital Data)

• Selecting a recording Program <Notes>

• Do not connect or disconnect the optical cable to
1. If you already have multiple Programs, select the the [DATA INPUT] connector when digital input is
desired Program using the Program Select assigned. Doing so could generate noise in the
function. D2424LV and affect the external digital equipment.

* See page “37” for more information on the Program • When the digital input is set to “adat” (Async or Sync)
Select function. and locked to any one among the three [DATA IN
PUT] (1-8, 9-16, 17-24), “DIGITAL” will light in the
display, and the tracks not locked will automatically
change to analog input.
• Setting the digital input By using this function, analog/digital 24 track
simultaneous recording will be possible by applying
Set up the digital signal to be input and the digital in analog signals to tracks 1-8 and adat digital signals
clock at the setup mode “Setup of digital inputs” to tracks 9-16 and 17-24.
menu.
The setting of digital input is initially set to “Analog”
and digital signals cannot be input.
In order to record external digital signals, “SP DIF:
• Setting recording tracks
Async,” “SP DIF: Sync,” “adat: Async” or “adat: Sync”
Press the [RECORD TRACK] select keys of the tracks
should be setup in accordance to the purpose.
selected in the digital input track menu to ready the
tracks for recording.
"SPDIF:Async":
S/P DIF digital signals from [DATA INPUT] 1-8 will be
assigned to tracks 1 and 2, and the digital equip- • Recording
ment is synchronized with the internal clock of the
D2424LV. 1. Locate the beginning of the Program.

"SPDIF:Sync": 2. Make sure that the “DIGITAL” indicators light up

S/P DIF digital signals from [DATA INPUT] 1-8 will be on the screen. While pressing and holding down
assigned to tracks 1 and 2, and will be synchronized the [RECORD] button, press the [PLAY] button to
with the S/P DIF digital signals from the external start recording.
digital equipment.
3. Play the external digital device.
"adat:Async" Make sure that the level meter segments light up and
move as the digital signal is being input.
adat digital signals from [DATA INPUT] 1-8, 9-16 and
17-24 will be assigned to tracks 1-8, 9-16 and 17-24
respectively, and the digital equipment synchronized
with the internal clock of D2424LV.
• Completing recording

"adat:Sync" 4. After you finish recording, stop the recorder and

adat digital signals from [DATA INPUT] 1-8, 9-16 and the connected digital equipment.
17-24 will be assigned to tracks 1-8, 9-16 and 17-24
respectively, and synchronized with the adat digital
signals from the external digital equipment. <Hint!>
When a “Digital 0 (zero)” signal is input during digital
* Refer to page “118” for setup of “D.in?” menu. recording under the SETUP mode “Zero File?” menu,
whether or not a “0 file” should be recorded or not can
If digital input is set to "Analog," "SPDIF: Async" or be setup. Although the “Zero File?” menu is initially
"adat: Async," the SETUP mode "Clock Sel?" (setup of set to “Enable,” by changing this to “Disable,” a “0 file”
operating clock) must be set up. will not be registered and the digital signal to be re-
corded can be made as “one file.”
For details on the “Zero File?” menu, refer to page “131.”
<Note>
When the “Setup of digital inputs” is set to sync mode
of “SPDIF: sync” or “adat: Sync”, the SETUP mode "Clock
Sel?" setting will be ignored and the digital-in clock
will have priority. In this case, " DIGITAL" and "EXT"
will light up in the "CLOCK" section of the display.

46
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Recording Digital Data)

[Clock Sel ?]
[D. in ?] setting
setting Int Auto Word Video
When receiving word clock When receiving word clock
from WORD IN, the recorder from WORD IN, the recorder
Regardless of receiving or not
clock received automatically synchronizes to synchronizes to the incoming Available only
from WORD IN
receiving word clock from
the incoming clock, while the clock, while the “DIGITAL” and when installing
WORD IN, the recorder is ref-
“DIGITAL” and “EXT” indica- “EXT” indicators light in the dis- the optional
SPDIF :Async erenced to the internal clock.
tors light in the display. play. Model 8346 TC/
When the recorder receives
adat :Async correct digital signals, the SYNC card. If you
When no word clock is re- When no word clock is re- try to select
“DIGITAL” indicator lights in
no clock ceived, the recorder is refer- ceived, the “EXT” indicator “Video,” “Void w/
received from the display. enced to the internal clock, flashes showing that the unit
WORD IN o 8346” is dis-
while the “EXT” indicator cannot be locked. played and you
flashes. cannot select it.
See the appendix
clock received Regardless of receiving or not receiving word clock from WORD IN, the recorder synchro- of the Reference
from WORD IN
SPDIF :Sync nizes to the external S/P DIF digital signal. When the recorder receives correct digital signals, manual for details.
adat :Sync the “DIGITAL” and “EXT” indicators light in the display. When Digital In is set to a SYNC mode,
no clock if you try to select “Clock Sel?” menu, The display will show “Clock Sel D.in!” (indicating that
received from the clock is set to Digital In!) and the recorder ignores your operation.
WORD IN

Digital recording to external digital equipment

Tunes recorded on the D2424LV can be recorded on external digital equipment such as MD, DAT,
CD-R or adat. In order to digital record to external digital equipment, digital signals to be output at
the D2424LV [DATA OUTPUT] connector must be set to “SP DIF” or “adat” (The initial setup is “adat.”)
by the “Setup of digital output” menu in the D2424LV SETUP mode. The currently active program
can be digitally recorded and “Setup of digital outputs” will be common to all programs.

• Connecting external digital equipment

1. Use an optical cable to connect the [DATA OUTPUT] connector of the recorder to the OPTICAL IN (or adat IN)
jack of the external digital equipment.
Set the external equipment input port to “digital” so that digital signals can be input.
Because some digital equipment must be externally synchronized against digital signals, in addition to setting the input
port to “digital,” be sure to refer to the operating manual of any digital equipment to be used.
Depending on the digital signal that is output, the [DATA OUTPUT] connector will function as explained below.

<Notes on interconnecting>
[DATA OUTPUT] of the D2424LV must be setup for S/P DIF digital signals (optical) or adat digital signals
by the "Setup of digital output" menu in the SETUP mode. Although the connector type is same for both
S/P DIF digital and adat digital signals, their information content is different. Depending on the digital
signal selected, the following signals are output from each output connector.

<At output of S/P DIF digital signals> <At output of adat digital signals>
DATA DATA
INPUT OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

24 - 17 16 - 9 8-1 24 - 17 16 - 9 8-1 24 - 17 16 - 9 8-1 24 - 17 16 - 9 8-1

Output of tracks 5-6 Output of tracks 3-4 Output of tracks 1-2 Output of tracks 17-24 Output of tracks 9-16 Output of tracks 1-8

<Important!>
Be sure to output a digital signal (S/PDIF or adat) of the same sampling frequency as that used on the
recorder.

<Note>
The [DATA OUTPUT] connectors of the unit does not support 96kHz FS adat digital signals.

47
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Recording Digital Data)

<Notes> • Setting the digital output

• Connecting the recorder to an external digital device
via both digital input and output jacks may generate Use the digital output setup menu in Setup mode to
a digital loop. assign output tracks.
• Data on the additional tracks cannot be digitally With the default setting, the digital output is set to
recorded to the external device as it is. To output “adat”. You can select “adat” or “SP DIF”.
digital data from the additional track, move it to the To output adat digital signals to a connected adat
real tracks first, then output it to the external device device, select “adat.” To output S/P DIF signals to a
(using the Track Exchange function). connected CD-R, MD, or DAT recorder, select “SP
For more information on the Track Exchange function, DIF.”
see page “74.”
* See page “119” for more information on the “D. out?”
* If the connected external device has only a COAXIAL menu.
(RCA pin) jack for digital input, use an optional Fostex
COP-1/96k (optical/coaxial converter).
When you finish setting the parameters in Setup
mode, press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button
• Selecting a recording Program
to exit Setup mode.
1. If you already have multiple Programs, select the
desired Program using the Program Select
function.
* See page “37” for more information on the Program
Select function.

Connecting a Digital Mixer

The following explanations assume that this is digital mixer, which can input digital signals whose
clock source can be setup at digital in.

Digital Out Digital In Word In

Digital Mixer

<Precaution against the digital loop>

When interconnecting D2424LV and a digital mixer as shown in above schematic, if the
D2424LV “Setup of the digital input” is set to adat or “Sync” (synchronous mode) of S/P DIF,
and the digital mixer clock source is set to “DIGITAL IN,” a digital loop will be created and it
will not operate correctly.
In such a case, setup the D2424LV “Setup of the digital input” to adat or “Async” (asynchronous
mode) of S/P DIF.

48
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Recording to a Metronome Sound)

Recording to a Metronome Sound

This chapter explains how to record your performance while you are playing an instrument
accompanied by a metronome based on the time signature and tempo specified in the Tempo Map.
The metronome sound is output from track 24 on the D2424LV.

• Initialize the recorder before the operation.

• If multiple Programs exist, first select the desired Program.

<Notes>
* With the metronome function ON and the RECORD TRACK select key for the track (track 24) to which the
metronome sound is to be output set to READY, an attempt to record you cannot record to this track.
Also, information which had already been recorded on this track cannot be played back.

* Always switch off the Metronome function setting in the SETUP mode after finishing.

<Please remember this!>

In D2424LV which had been formatted to 96kHz/24bit or 88.2kHz/24bit (Real track 1-8) the metronome sound
will be output from track 24. Therefore, Real tracks 1-8 can all be used for normal recording/playback.

Preparation

• Creating a Tempo Map • Turning the Metronome function on

* Set the time signature using the “Setting a time * Turn the Metronome function on using the “Setting
signature” menu in SETUP mode. the Metronome function” menu in SETUP mode.
Refer to the “Setting a time signature” section on page Refer to the “Setting the Metronome function” section
“109.” on page “112.”

* Set a tempo for a given point using the “Setting a

tempo” in SETUP mode.
Refer to the “Setting a tempo” section on page “111.”

Recording to a metronome sound

1 12 1

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE

4, 9, 14
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

5, 13 10
6 2, 7

49
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Recording to a Metronome Sound)

• Checking the metronome sound • Checking the recorded sound

1. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the 13.Turn OFF the ready track [RECORD TRACK] select
[SHIFT] key to switch the time base in advance to key .
BAR/BEAT/CLK.
14. Locate the top of the Program and start playback.
2. Start playback from the beginning of the Program. Adjust and monitor the track playback sound recorded
Even if the selected Program does not have any recorded on the mixer. Since the metronome function still remains
data, track 24 outputs the metronome sound and the ON at this time, you can hear the metronome sound
unit counts time. during playback of the recorded sounds when you turn
up the track 24 monitor volume.
3. Adjust the system so the sound output from track
24 can be monitored with the mixer.
You will hear the metronome sound output from track
• If you wish to redo the recording, repeat the recording
24 using the Tempo Map created earlier.
after executing “undo” by using the single undo/redo
4. After confirming the metronome sound, stop the or multiple undo functions.
recorder section and return to the top Program.

• Adjusting monitor/record level of the

musical instrument
5. Press the [RECORD TRACK] select key of the track
to record the musical instrument on, and then put
that track in the READY mode.
6. Press the [RECORD] button.
The LED of the [RECORD] button will flash and the READY
track will go to the input monitor mode.

7. Press the [PLAY] button and playback the Program

from the top.
Only the READY track will go to the input monitor mode
(recording does not take place), and all other tracks will
be in the reproduction monitor mode, therefore track
24 plays back the metronome sound.

8. Play the musical instrument in time with the

metronome and adjust the recording level of the
track to be recorded on the mixer.
9. After adjusting the recording level, stop the
recorder and return to the top of the Program.

• Starting recording
10. Hold down the [RECORD] button and press the
[PLAY] button to start recording.
The READY track will go to the input monitor mode just
as when the recording level was adjusted. The time the
level that was actually adjusted with the mixer will be
recorded.

11. Play the musical instrument in time with the

metronome.

• Quitting recording
12. Press the [STOP] button to stop the recorder.

50
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)

Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)

You can store specific individual time data (time, bar/beat/clock) in each memory key (*).
The time data stored is used as an “Editing Point” to execute “Locate Point” or Auto Punch In/Out, Copy & Paste,
Move & Paste or Erase. You can also store 99 (Locate Number 01-99) time data in the [LOCATE] key, in
addition to the Memory key, to enable locate only features. This chapter will describe how to store specific data
in the memory key and how to edit and re-store data is already stored in the memory key. The data stored in
each memory are used for the following operations.
Also, the 99 locate memories can be used for the Mark STOP memory. For details, refer to "Setup of stop
function at the mark point" in the SETUP mode.

* Memory key
When you set the IN/OUT points for Auto Punch In/Out, IN/OUT points for Copy & Clip/Move & Clip, and
START/END points for Auto Return/Auto Repeat, END points.

• Locating the AUTO PUNCH IN point.

[AUTO PUNCH IN] key • Recording start point for the Auto Punch In/Out operation.
• Paste start point for the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste operation.
• Erase start point for the Erase operation.

• Locating the AUTO PUNCH OUT point.

[AUTO PUNCH OUT] key • Recording end point for the Auto Punch In/Out operation.
• Erase end point for the Erase operation.

• Locating the CLIPBOARD IN point.

[CLIPBOARD IN] key • Copy start point for copying or moving data to the clipboard during the Copy & Paste or Move
& Paste operation.

• Locating the CLIPBOARD OUT point.

[CLIPBOARD OUT] key • Copy end point for copying or moving data to the clipboard during the Copy & Paste or Move
& Paste operation.

• Locating the AUTO RTN START point.

[AUTO RTN START] key • Locate end point from AUTO RTN END in Auto Return or Auto Repeat modes.

• Locating the AUTO RTN END point.

[AUTO RTN END] key • Locate start point to AUTO RTN START in Auto Return or Auto Repeat modes.

<Note on storing the locate point>

When you set the IN/OUT points for Auto Punch In/Out, IN/OUT points for Copy & Clip/Move & Clip, and
START/END points for Auto Return/Auto Repeat, make sure that IN points precede the OUT points and
START points precede the END points.

You can also store time data in the [LOCATE] key, in addition to each memory key explained
above. You can store up to 99 individual time data in the [LOCATE] key for locate only features.
Store the data by specifying Locate Number to locate the intended time data. Note that the
[LOCATE] key always stores the last located time data in real-time. This Locate Number is stored
as 00, and does not require a Locate Number specification to locate it.
Simply pressing the [LOCATE] key directly, will locate that data. This becomes an advantage
since it is possible to repeatedly locate the last located point.
You can edit the data stored in the [LOCATE] key, as so with the data stored in the Memory key.
For more details refer to page “53.”

• You can store locate points for each Program. (You need to select a Program first.)
• When executing save/load of song data via SCSI, these data can be directly saved/loaded.
Save/load by DAT and adat cannot be done.
• All locate points stored in the memory keys will be maintained after you turn off the recorder.

51
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)

Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys

• Select the desired Time Base using the [DISP SEL] key and [SHIFT] key an if you wish to use a Time
Base other ABS.
• The stored or edited locate points are used only in the currently-selected Program.

Storing in real-time
You can store the locate point (in the ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base) in real-time while the
recorder is playing.
3 2

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

4 1
1.Press the [PLAY] button to play back data. 3.Press the desired memory key.
The STORE LED turns off.
2.When the point you wish to store is reached, press The captured time value (or bar/beat/clock value) is
the [STORE] key. stored in the memory key. After the data is stored, the
The time value or bar/beat/clock value of the point is recorder displays the previous Time Base and continues
captured. The recorder enters data edit mode. playback.

<Note> 4.Press the [STOP] button.

The following menu (##=number from 00-99) appears
when pressing the [STORE] key. This menu is used to <Please remember this!>
store data in the [LOCATE] key, described later. Ignore • If you set “BAR/BEAT Resolution mode” in SETUP
this menu and go to the next step when storing data in mode to ON, the recorder will round off the CLK value
the memory key. of the captured bar/beat/clock value. That is, the
locate point will be at the beginning of the beat (00).
Flashing Refer to page “120” for more information.

H M
LOCATE
S F SF
• When pressing the [STORE] key in step 2, if the
OL OL BIT 24
[STORE] key is pressed while holding down the
[SHIFT] key, data to be registered will be held and be
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz

confirmed. To register data after confirmation, press

12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞
the [STORE] key again and press the desired memory
key.

Editing and storing data

You can recall data stored in the memory key, edit it, and store it again.

1, 4 3

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20

RECORD TRACK

5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD
2
FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

52
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the memory • You can store the edited data in a memory key other
key that stores the data you wish to edit. than the one you pressed when you recalled the data.
The stored data appears on the display and the recorder For example, you can recall the AUTO PUNCH IN point
enters data edit mode. data, edit it, and store it to the [AUTO PUNCH OUT]
2.Turn the Shuttle dial to move the flashing cursor key.
to the time value digit, and use the Jog dial to • You can also use the Preview function to edit the
increase or decrease the value. stored locate points (edit points). Refer to “Preview
Function” on page “64” for more information.
3.Press the [STORE] key.
The “Press LOCATE: ##” menu will appear as indicated • Refer to page “40” for more information on Auto
before. Ignore this go to the next step. Punch In/Out.
• Refer to page “68” for more information on Copy &
4.Press the memory key that you pressed in Step 1
Paste, Move & Paste, and Erase.
again. • Refer to page “55” for more information on Auto
The STORE LED will turn off. The edited data is stored, Return and Auto Repeat.
and the recorder displays the previous Time Base
indication.

Storing and editing [LOCATE] key

You can store up to 99 individual time data in the [LOCATE] key for Locate only operations.
The time data stored can also be assigned with a specific locate number from 01-99.
This means the desired locate number can be specified to locate that specific time data.
The memory data of the [LOCATE] key can also be edited in the same manner as the data in the
Memory key. After editing the data the [LOCATE] key can locate that point, or even be re-stored as
data for other Memory keys.

<Notes>
• The last data located with the Memory key or [LOCATE] key is constantly stored as LOCATE number 00.
However, this data is constantly replaced after every LOCATE command. Therefore, do not use Locate Number 00
for independent Locate data.
• You cannot preview the data stored in the [LOCATE] key, though it is possible to preview data stored in other
Memory keys.

* If you use a time base that is not an ABS time, there is a need to priory switch to the desired time base using the
[SHIFT] key and [DISP SEL] key.
* Any editing or storing of data for the LOCATE point is valid only for the program that is currently started up.

Storing in real-time
You can store the locate point (in the ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base) in real-time while the
recorder is playing.
5 1 4 2

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20

RECORD TRACK

5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD
3
FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

Flashing
1.Press the [PLAY] button to start playback.
LOCATE
H M S F SF

2.Press the [STORE] key (the STORE LED lights up). OL

0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24
FS
The memory number selection menu will appear, as 6
9
12
18
6
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz

follows.
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

53
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)

3.Select the LOCATE number desired using the Jog

<Please remember this!>
dial. • If you set “BAR/BEAT Resolution mode” in SETUP
LOCATE number from 00-99 are selectable. However, mode to ON, the recorder will round off the CLK value
select a number other then 00. of the captured bar/beat/clock value. That is, the
locate point will be at the beginning of the beat (00).
4.Next press the [LOCATE] key. Refer to page “120” for more information.
The time base (or bar/beat/clock) put on hold is stored
as data in the LOCATE number selected. The system • When pressing the [STORE] key in step 2, if the
will return to the original time base when the storage [STORE] key is pressed while holding down the
process is completed, and playback is resumed. [SHIFT] key, data to be registered will be held and be
confirmed. To register data after confirmation, press
5.After completing the store process, press the the [STORE] key again and press the desired memory
[STOP] button to stop the recorder section. key.

Edit and re-store data that is already stored

RECALL the desired time data already stored in the [LOCATE] key, edit that data and re-store it.

2, 6 4

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP DISP SEL STORE RECALL

1
UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20

RECORD TRACK

5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD
2, 5
FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

1.Press the [RECALL] key while the recorder is 4.Press the [STORE] key (the STORE LED lights up).
stopped. The LOCATE number selection menu to store data will
The menu to select the LOCATE number will appear. appear.
Flashing
Flashing
LOCATE
H M S F SF

LOCATE OL OL
0 0
BIT 24
H M S F SF
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
OL OL 12 12
0 0
BIT 24 18 18 CLOCK
3 3 24 24 INT
6 6 FS 30 30
9 9 42 42
12 12
kHz ∞ ∞
18 18 CLOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• If the [STORE] key is press instead of the [LOCATE]

2.Turn the Jog dial to select the desired LOCATE key at this stage, it becomes possible to directly
number, then press the [LOCATE] key. LOCATE the time data of the selected LOCATE
The data edit mode will appear when the data stored in number. For more details refer to the next section
the selected LOCATE number appears. on “Locate Functions.”

Flashing

H M
LOCATE
S F SF
5. You can use the Jog dial to input the desired
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
LOCATE number.
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
CLOCK
6. Press the [LOCATE] key.
18 18
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
The edit time data is stored as the time data for the
selected LOCATE number.

3.Turn the Shuttle dial to move the (cursor) column

of the time indication to edit (cursor flashing point),
increase or decrease the number setting with the
Jog dial or input the desired time base.

54
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Locate Function)

Locate Function
The recorder swiftly locates (it moves the current location of the recorder section) the desired
point when necessary. Locate include edit points (in ABS time, MTC time, or in bar/beat/clock) that
are stored for the Copy, Move, Paste, Erase, or Auto Punch In/Out operations.
They also include Locate by specifying a voluntary time, and Locate specifying a voluntary Locate
Number (01-99), as well as Locate directly to the recording end point in a Program (REC END).
An application of he Locate function includes auto functions such as Auto Play, Auto Return and
Auto Repeat.

Direct Locate
The Direct Locate function enables you to locate the following points:

• Locate the beginning of the Program (LOCATE ABS 0) • Specify the Locate Number to locate data

Press the [REWIND] button while holding down the 1. Press the [RECALL] key.
[STOP] button. The Locate Number selection menu
The recorder will immediately locate the beginning of appears.
the currently-selected Program. H M
LOCATE
S F SF

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

2. Turn the Jog dial or press the [NEXT]

key / [PREV] key to select the desired
number.

• Locate the recording end point of the Program (LOCATE

REC END)
3. Press the [LOCATE] key once.
Press the [F FWD] button while holding down the The time stored in the selected Locate
[STOP] button. Number appears.
The recorder will immediately locate the end point of
the currently-selected Program.

4. Press the [LOCATE] key again.

The time data of the selected LOCATE number is swiftly

located. The located time data is constantly stored as
time data in Locate Number 00.

• Locate a specified point

• Locate the position stored in one of the memory keys
Refer to “Editing and storing locate data” in the chapter
Press the desired memory key, then press the [LOCATE] “Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)” for information
key. on how to edit the data and on pressing the [LOCATE]
The recorder will locate the point (edit point) stored in key instead of the [STORE] key.
the corresponding memory key immediately. The point at specified time value (or bar/beat/clock
value) will be located immediately.

• Locate the last-located point

Directly press the [LOCATE] key.

The time data of Locate number 00 is located. Locate
number 00 is always update with the last data located
(excluding LOCATE ABS 0 and LOCATE REC END).
Therefore, you will locate the data in memory number
00 every time you directly press the [LOCATE] key.

The located time data is always stored as time data in

Locate Number 00.

55
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Locate Function)

Auto Play function

The Auto Play function allows the recorder to start play back automatically from the located point.
AUTO PLAY mode should be turned on before you execute the Direct Locate function described
above.
<Notes>
• This function is effective within 24 ABS hours. Therefore, if playback continues over the recording end point,
the recorder will still continue counting the time. Also, when the recorder locates ABS REC END, it will continue
counting the time from the recording end point. (However, the unit does not access the disk after reaching the
recording end point.)
• If the "Chain Play?” menu in the SETUP mode is set other than "Off," ON/OFF of AUTO PLAY cannot be executed.

<Example: Operation at locating to the AUTO PUNCH IN point.> 2. Press the [LOCATE] key, or memory key.
The recorder locates the point and plays as shown
AUTO PUNCH IN point
in the diagram.
3. Press the [STOP] button to stop the unit.
PLAYBACK
LOCATE
LOCATE PLAYBACK
START
• You can set a preroll time in the “Preroll Time?” menu
LOCATE LOCATE
START
in SETUP mode so that the recorder will start playback
preroll time before the locate point. You can set the
preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds. Refer to the chapter
“Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” on page
1. Press the [AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY] key to turn on “113.”
the [AUTO PLAY] LED.

Auto Return function

This function allows the recorder to play data up to the AUTO RTN END point, then automatically
locate the AUTO RTN START point as shown in the diagram below. To enable this function, AUTO
RTN mode should be on and the AUTO RTN START point and AUTO RTN END point should already
be set.
2. Press the [AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY] key to turn on
<Note>
If the "Chain Play?" menu in the SETUP mode is set other
the [AUTO RTN] LED.
than "Off," ON/OFF of AUTO RETURN cannot be ex-
ecuted.

<Operation of the Auto Return mode.>

AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point 3. Start playback a little before the AUTO RTN END
point.
The recorder operates as shown in the diagram.
PLAYBACK PLAYBACK
START

• You can set a preroll time in the “Preroll Time?” menu

STOP
LOCATE
in SETUP mode so that the recorder will start playback
Automatic locating to the AUTO RTN START point preroll time before the locate point. You can set the
subsequent to playback to the AUTO RTN END point. preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds. Refer to the
chapter “Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)”
on page “113.”
1. Store the AUTO RTN START and AUTO RTN END
points.
Refer to the chapter “Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)”
on page “51” for information on storing the desired
points in the [AUTO RTN START] key and the [AUTO RTN
END] key.

56
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Locate Function)

Auto Repeat function

The Auto Repeat function allows the recorder to repeat playback up to the AUTO RTN END point, automatically
locate the AUTO RTN START point, then play up to the AUTO RTN END point until you cancel the function by
pressing the STOP button. To enable this function, both AUTO PLAY mode and AUTO RTN mode should be
turned on, and the AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO RTN END point should already be set.
Using this function will facilitate the Auto Punch In/Out and Manual Punch In/Out rehearsal. See “Hint!” after
the following section.

2. Press the [AUTO RTN/AUTO PLAY] key to turn on

<Note>
the [PLAY RTN], [AUTO PLAY] LEDs.
If the "Chain Play?" menu in the SETUP mode is set other
than "Off," ON/OFF of AUTO REPEAT cannot be executed.

<Operation of the Auto Repeat mode.>

AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point

3. Start playback a little before the AUTO RTN START
point.
The recorder operates as shown in the diagram, and stops
PLAYBACK
PLAYBACK
START at the AUTO RTN START point.

LOCATE
• You can set a preroll time in the “Preroll Time?” menu
in SETUP mode so that the recorder will start playback
preroll time before the locate point. You can set the
preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds. Refer to the chapter
1. Store the AUTO RTN START and AUTO RTN END “Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP Mode)” on page
points. “113.”
Refer to the chapter “Storing a Locate Point (Edit Point)”
on page “51” for information on storing the desired
points in the [AUTO RTN START] key and the [AUTO RTN
END] key.

<Hint!>
You can make repeated Auto Punch In/Out rehearsal much easier and quicker by using the
Auto Repeat function.
Set the AUTO RTN START point prior to the AUTO PUNCH IN point, and set the AUTO RTN
END point after the AUTO PUNCH OUT point. The recorder will repeat the operation
automatically so you can concentrate on your rehearsal.
Cancel Auto Repeat mode before you record a take.
The recorder will play this range repeatedly for rehearsal, which makes it easy for you to
check the recording level and practice your performance.

AUTO PUNCH IN point AUTO PUNCH OUT point

AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point

Rehearsal range

PLAYBACK
PLAYBACK
START

LOCATE

57
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Chain Play function)

Chain Play function

“Chain play” functions to playback, in any order, the tunes recorded on a multiple number of programs.
There are three modes of chain play and each operates as shown below.
Before executing these modes, “AUTO RTN START point” and “AUTO RTN END point” must be set for each
program. For details, please read the explanations starting from the next page.

<Pause mode>
AUTO RTN START point
STOP
AUTO RTN END point In the pause mode, as shown in the
example on the left, upon reaching the
PGM 02 Playback “END point” at playback of program 02,
the recorder automatically stops at the
“START point” of program 05 which is to
AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point be played back next.
STOP
If chain play is executed again at the
PGM 05 Playback stopped point, it will stop again at the
next program 10 “START point.”

AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point

STOP

PGM 01 Playback

<Auto Play mode>

AUTO RTN START point
STOP
AUTO RTN END point In the auto play mode, as shown in the
example on the left, upon reaching the
PGM 02 Playback “END point” of program 02 started in
playback, the recorder will automatically
playback in setup order between the
AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point
“START points - END points,” and, at the
moment playback is finished at the “END
PGM 05 Playback
point” of the last program 01, stops at the
“START point” of the first program.

AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point

PGM 01 Playback

<Repeat mode>
AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point In the repeat mode, playback is repeated
until the above auto play mode is
PGM 02 Playback canceled.

<Note>
AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point If power is switched off and then switched
on again while set to the Repeat mode,
PGM 05
playback will automatically start from the
Playback
first program.

AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point

PGM 01 Playback

58
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Chain Play function)

Setup of the Chain Play List

The chain play list is setup via the “Chain Play List?” menu in the SETUP mode.
The following procedure is based on the assumption that a multiple number of programs are in the current
drive and that a tune is recorded in each program.

1. Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the [SETUP] key

while the D2424LV is in the stop mode. <Setup example of the chain play list>
As an example, if the chain play list is set as
2. Use the Jog dial to display the “Chain Play List?,” shown below, chain play is possible in the
and then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. order of: program 3 - program 5 - program 2.
The display will change to setup of the play list.
If the chain list is to be ended after program
SETUP 1, as shown in the example below, set “EE” at
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
fourth (“c04”) in the chain list.
By selecting “EE,” the chain play list setting
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT
will be “c01” - “c03,” and beyond “c04” will be
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
invalid.
“EE” can be selected with the Jog dial while
Flashing the right program number is flashing.
SETUP

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS OL OL
9 9 0 0
BIT 24
kHz
12 12 3 3
18 18 CLOCK 6 6 FS
24 24 INT 9 9 kHz
30 30 12 12
42 42 18 18 CLOCK
∞ ∞ 24 24 INT
30 30
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

This display indicates the initial setting in which no

chain list is setup (“EE” means “invalid.”).
The chain play number can be set in the currently
blinking section (left) and numbers “01” through “99” SETUP

can be input via the Jog dial. OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3
FS
Also, the flashing section can be moved from the left 6
9
12
18
6
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz

“01” to the right “EE” by pressing the [EXECUTE/YES]

24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞

key, and except for “EE,” each program number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

currently in the disk can be selected via the Jog dial.

3. Input the chain number via the Jog dial and press
the [EXECUTE/YES] key. SETUP

The flashing section will move from left to the right OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3

“EE.” 6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz

Flashing 18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞ SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT

4. Select the desired program number via the Jog dial 30

42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
30
42
∞

and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

The chain number of the selected program will be set
and, the same as in <Step 2>, the left section will flash.
<Note>
For example, if it has been set as shown below, the
• In order to execute chain play, “AUTO RTN
setting will be for playback of the program 5 tune in
START point” and “AUTO RTN END point” must be
the second order.
setup in each program to be played back.
Refer to previous page “50” for how to register
SETUP
memory points.
PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
FS • If the chain play list is edited even once, the
kHz
12
18
24
30
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
Chain Play Mode will be set “OFF.”
In such case, after setup of the chain play list,
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

reset the Chain Play Mode to “ON” .

Repeat these procedures to set up the chain play

number in the desired program.

59
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Chain Play function)

Setup of the Chain Play Mode

Upon setup of the previous “Chain Play List,” select the desired mode in the “Chain Play MD?” (Setup of the
chain play mode) menu in the same SETUP mode.

<Important>
Be sure the Chain Play List is set up correctly before setting the chain play mode. Each setting of the
chain play mode except “Off,” will not function if the previously mentioned “Chain play list” is not
set up correctly beforehand. If the mode is executed while set up of with an incorrect list, after
displaying “Illegal P.List!,” the D2424LV will automatically go to the previously mentioned “Chain
Play List?” menu.

<Note>
The chain play mode setting will be held even though power is switched off, and if power is
switched when the D2424LV is set to pause mode, the recorder will automatically execute chain
play. If chain play is no longer required, reset to “Off” the “Chain Play?” menu after ending chain
play.

1. Press the [SETUP] key while the D2424LV is in the If the D2424LV is played back after this, functions of
stop mode to switch to the SETUP display. the mode selected will be executed from the first
program in the chain list.

2. Display the “Chain Play MD?” menu via the Jog dial Normally, in chain play as explained above,
execution starts from the first program on the chain
and then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
list but any program of your choice can be specified
The recorder will change to the display for setting up
and chain play executed from that program.
of the chain play mode and the present setup mode
For details, refer to “Specify the program and execute
will flash (In the initial setup, “Off” will flash).
chain play”.
SETUP

OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
<The “Current” display after setup>
If the “Chain Play?” menu is set to other than
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT
“Off” (“Pause,” “Auto P” or “Rpt”), then exit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
from the SETUP mode, the current display
will change as shown in example below and,
the display will be different from when it is
set to “Off.”
Flashing

SETUP <When “Chain Play?” is set to “Off.”>

OL OL ABS
0 0
BIT 24
M S F
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 PGM
kHz
12 12 OL OL BIT 24
18 18 CLOCK 0 0
24 24 INT 3 3
30 30 6 6 FS
42 42 9 9 kHz
∞ ∞ 12 12
18 18 CLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3. Select the desired mode via the Jog dial.

When the Jog dial is rotated, modes other than the
<When “Chain Play?” is set to other than “Off.”>
currently shown “Off” listed below can be selected.
ABS
M S F

“Off” OL OL
PGM

0 0
BIT 24
3 3

“Pause” (Pause mode) Refer to previous page 58 on

6
9
12
18
6
9
12
18 CLOCK
FS
kHz

24 24 INT
the function of each mode. 30
42
30
42
“Auto P” (Auto play mode) ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞

“Rpt” (Pepeat mode)

The above is an example showing that pro-
4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key after selecting the gram 03 (P03) activated by the ABS time
mode. base, is set at fourth in the chain list.
The recorder will exit from the SETUP mode after setup As shown here, when the chain list is cor-
is completed. rectly setup and the “Chain Play?” menu set
In this step, if it was completed in the setup other to other than “Off,” in which order (For ex-
than the “Off” mode, the D2424LV will automatically ample, “c04”) of the chain list had the pres-
locate to the “AUTO RTN START point” of the first ently active program been setup, will be in-
program in the previously setup “Chain list” and stop.
dicated. Should it be changed to another
If it was completed after setup to “Off,” the D2424LV
will return to the first display of the program prior to
time base, the chain list number will be in-
entering the SETUP mode.). dicated in the same manner.

60
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Chain Play function)

Specify the Program and Execute Chain Play

Specify at random a program set in the chain play list and execute chain play from the program specified.
This operation can be executed only when the “Chain Play?” menu is set in other than “Off.”

<Note>
You cannot record or edit in the chain play mode. It will only play back the program set in the chain play
list.

1. Press the [PGM SEL] key while the D2424LV is in the 2. Select the desired program with the Jog dial and
stop mode. press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
After “Select Chain No!,” is displayed, the first number The sequence number currently set in the chain list
in the present chain play list will flash and the can be selected by rotating the Jog dial. The program
program, and its title, will be displayed. /title in selected order will be simultaneously
displayed. After selection, when the [EXECUTE/YES]
key is pressed, the D2424LV will locate to the “AUTO
RTN START point” of the selected program.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18
24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT 3. Start playback by pressing the [PLAY] button.
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Chain play will be execute in compliance to the
currently set “Chain Play MD?” mode.
Flashing

SURE?

PGM
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

61
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Cue & Review Function)

Cue & Review Function

This chapter explains how to use the “Cue & Review” function with the [REWIND] button, the [F
FWD] button, and the Shuttle dial, and also explains “Digital Scrubbing” with the envelope function.
During Cue/Review and Digital Scrubbing you will hear the sound recorded on the disk, which
makes it easy for you to swiftly locate the desired point without failure while listening to the
sounds.
The prerequisite of the following operation is that the time base is ABS, however, the operation can
be executed in any time base. To execute this function with a non-ABS time base there is a need to
priory switch over to the desired time base.

Cue & Review function using the [REWIND] and [F FWD] buttons
You may cue & review the audio data at five-times speed while the recorder is playing.

1. Press the [PLAY] button to play the audio data. 4. Press the [PLAY] button again to restore the original
play back speed.
2. Press the [F FWD] button during playback.
This cues in the forward direction at five-times speed. 5. Press the [REWIND] button instead of the [F FWD]
The PLAY LED and F FWD LED lights up while cuing is button.
taking place. This cues in the rewind direction at five-times speed.
The PLAY LED and REWIND LED lights up while cuing is
3. Adjust the monitor sound of the track to monitor on the taking place.
mixer.
6. Press the [PLAY] button to restore the original playback
speed.

Cue & Review function using the Shuttle dial

You can use the Shuttle dial for +1~-7 times or -1~-8 times

1. Press the [PLAY] button to start playback. 4. Let go of the Shuttle dial to return to normal play speed.

2. Turn the Shuttle dial clockwise during playback. 5. Similarly, turn the Shuttle dial counterclockwise during
The forward direction cue speed variates from +1~ -7 playback.
times speed depending on the degree (angle) of turning The rewind direction review speed variates from -1~ -8
the dial. PLAY LED flashes and F FWD LED lights up times speed depending on the degree (angle) of turning
during the cue process. the dial. PLAY LED flashes and REWIND LED lights up
during the review process.
3. Adjust the monitor sound of the track to monitor on the
mixer. 6. Let go of the Shuttle dial to return to normal play speed.

Digital scrubbing using the envelope function

You may perform digital scrubbing using the “Envelope Function” of the recorder while the recorder
is stopped. The envelope function allows digital scrubbing for each track recorded. The display
will show the envelope indication of the track selected.
1

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

2
RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD
1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

1, 4 5

62
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Cue & Review Function)

1. While the recorder section is stopped, depress the

[SHIFT] key and then press the [RECORD TRACK] select
key of the desired record track.
This turns ON the envelope function.
The envelope indication of the selected track will appear
on the display. The following example shows the
indication of track 4 envelope, after [RECORD TRACK]
select key [4/12/20] is pressed. At this time the recorder
is in the STILL status (scrub mode is in still status) and
the REWIND LED and F FWD lights up.

Playback point (time)

ABS
H M S F SF

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
4

Playback point
Track indication

2. You can use the Jog dial to digitally scrub the

performance of the track selected.
The envelope of the performance recorded on the track
variates in real-time. During forward direction scrub
the F FWD LED lights up, and during rewind direction
scrub the REWIND LED lights up.

3. Adjust the monitor sound of the selected track so that

it can be monitored on the mixer.

4. Press the [RECORD TRACK] select key of the desired

record track to select another track.
“Please Wait!” will briefly appear and then go to the
envelope indication of the selected track.
The following example shows the case when the
indication is switched from track 4 to track 12.

ABS
H M S F SF

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
4

ABS
H M S F SF

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
12

5. Press the [STOP] button to stop the envelope function.

Doing so will turn OFF the envelope function.
The recorder will return to the time base indication prior
to turning the envelope function ON.

63
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Preview Function)

Preview Function
The preview function enables you to repeatedly audition the rise (fade in) or the fall (fade out)
of the sound data at a locate point (edit point) that is stored in the [AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT], [AUTO
RTN START/END], or [CLIPBOARD IN/OUT] key. This is also called “point rehearsal.”
With this function, you can check the locate points in real-time. You can also use this function to
fine-tune the position of the locate points while previewing the sound. This function is effective
only when the recorder is stopped.

• Previewing the rise of the sound (fade in) • Previewing the fall of the sound (fade out)
While holding down the [SHIFT] key, press the [AUTO RTN While holding down the [SHIFT] key, press the [AUTO END
START] key, the [AUTO PUNCH OUT] key, or [CLIPBOARD START] key, the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key, or the [CLIPBOARD
IN] key. OUT] key.

[AUTO RTN START] key [AUTO PUNCH IN] key

[AUTO PUNCH OUT] key
[CLIPBOARD] IN key [CLIPBOARD OUT] key [AUTO RTN END] key

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END AUTO PLAY START END
IN OUT IN OUT

PREVIEW PREVIEW
CHARACTER CHARACTER
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT

SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC

SHIFT key SHIFT key

<Display indication during the Preview operation> <Display indication during the Preview operation>

Memory data Memory data

LOCATE LOCATE
H M S F SF H M S F SF

OL OL 24 OL OL BIT 24
0 0
BIT 0 0
3 3 3 3
6 6 FS 6 6 FS
9 9 kHz 9 9 kHz
12 12 12 12
18 18 CLOCK 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT 24 24 INT
30 30 30 30
42 42 42 42
∞ ∞ ∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

During operation, the meter display will light up from left to right. During operation, the meter display will light up from left to right.

Approx. 2sec. Approx. 2sec.

1 sec. (mute playback) 1 sec. (normal playback) 1 sec. (normal playback) 1 sec. (mute playback)

The sound rises at the memory point. The sound falls at the memory point.

The recorder repeats playback the “rise sound” The recorder repeats playback of the “fall sound”
at the locate point (edit point). As shown in at the locate point (edit point).
the diagram, one-second of data prior to the As shown in the diagram, one-second of data
locate point is muted during playback. prior to the locate point is played back, then
The mute is off (fade in) at the locate point muted (fade out) at the locate point. The muted
and the sound is played back for one second. playback continues for one second.
The recorder will repeat this operation until The recorder will repeat this operation until you
you quit the Preview function. quit the Preview function.

64
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Preview Function)

Executing the Preview function

1. Press the desired memory key while holding down the 2. Adjust the monitor sound of the selected track so that
[SHIFT] key when the recorder is stopped. it can be monitored on the mixer.
Pressing the desired memory key will enable you to
preview the sound at the locate point (edit point) stored <Note>
in the corresponding memory key. If data stored in each memory key is in the initial state,
all memory keys will be in ABS time 00H 00M 00S.
Memory key Operation In other words, the program head value is in the
memory. Should fade out preview be executed in this
[AUTO PUNCH IN] key The recorder plays the fall condition, the “Void Data!” message and memory data
[AUTO RTN END] key (fade out) of the sound at the “00H 00M 00S” will alternately flash in the display as a
[CLIPBOARD OUT] key locate point stored in the keys. warning. However, for fade in preview, this will
function as the memory data “00H 00M 00S” point.

[AUTO PUNCH OUT] key The recorder plays the fall

[AUTO RTN START] key (fade in) of the sound at the 3. Press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key.
[CLIPBOARD IN] key locate point stored in the keys.

Trimming the sound while previewing

You can trim the position of the locate point (edit point) using the Jog dial while you preview the
sound. At this time, you can also adjust the size of the trimming steps (the amount of offset
controlled by the Jog dial).
Trimming allows you to fine-tune the position of the locate point stored in the memory keys
while previewing the sound. Use this function to change the Auto Punch In/Out points, the start
point of Copy & Paste and Move & Paste, and the start and end points of the Erase function.

<Notes>
• You can audition the result of trimming during the next preview. That is, if you trim the position while previewing
the sound for the first time, you can check the result when you preview the sound next time.

• If the locate point is shifted outside the range of the preview playback as a result of trimming, “Void Data!” and the
locate point indication appear alternately. In this case, you cannot use the Preview function. Trim the position
again so that it will be within the playback range.

• When Auto Punch mode is turned on and you trim the Auto Punch In or Auto Punch Out point while previewing the
sound with “Void Data!” indicated on the display, Auto Punch mode will be cancelled.

1. Start previewing the sound by following the steps 3. To change the unit of trimming, turn the Shuttle dial.
described on the previous page.
Time base
2. Use the Jog dial to trim the position. ABS or MTC BAR/BEAT/CLK
When previewing starts, the unit of Jog trimming
flashes on the screen. Shuttle dial SF H M S F CLK BAR
For example, value of SF (sub-frame) flashes if ABS Time (clockwise)
Base or MTC Time Base is selected. CLK (clock) flashes
if BAR/BEAT/CLK is selected. The flashing value also
indicates the position you can trim.
Shuttle dial SF H M S F CLK BAR
Flashing (counter clockwise)

LOCATE
H M S F SF

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9
12
18
24
12
18
24
CLOCK
INT
kHz
4. Trim the position at the selected unit (digit).
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

5. Press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key.

The trimmed locate point (edit point) data will be stored
Flashing in the corresponding memory key.
LOCATE

BAR CLK
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

65
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Multiple Undo Function)

Multiple Undo Function

To undo recordings or edits, you can use the Multiple Undo (Time Jump) function (explained in this
section) as well as the Single Undo/Redo function (explained in the Quick Operation Guide and the
“Punch in/out” and “Track editing” sections of this manual).
You can use the Multiple Undo (Time Jump) function only for a current drive disk that was formatted
with the Multiple Undo turned on. (See page 31 for more information on the format operation.)
The Single Undo/Redo function enables you to undo and redo the current take of recording or edit
(Punch in/out, Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase). However, if you record a new take, you will no
longer be able to apply the Undo/Redo function to the previous take.
On the other hand, the Multiple Undo (Time Jump) function can be applied to all takes made after the
current drive disk is formatted. To undo a take, select the date and time (at which you finish
making the corresponding take) of the edit based on the internal clock.

When you finish recording or editing a take on a current drive disk that was formatted with the
Multiple Undo function turned on, that take will get the time stamp of the internal clock (e.g.: [10:50.37
11.Dec?]). Therefore, you can always recall the desired take. This is quite different from the Single
Undo/Redo function.
Completion Completion Completion Completion Completion Completion
data and time data and time data and time data and time data and time data and time
of Take 1 of Take 2 of Take 3 of Take 4 of Take 5 of Take 6

Time axis

<Notes regarding the Multiple Undo operation>

• The time stamp of each take references to the internal clock of the recorder.
Therefore, after formatting the current drive disk, be sure to set the internal clock correctly. Refer to the
Quick Operation Guide for more information on how to set the internal clock.

• Recording (or editing) more takes will consume more disk space on a current drive disk that was formatted
with the Multiple Undo function turned on. This is because more disk space is required to enable the
Undo function for any take. Therefore, such a current drive disk with a smaller capacity may not have
enough disk space to perform the Multiple Undo function. In this case, performing the disk optimization
in Setup mode may increase the free space available for the Undo function. (For more information, see the
“Helpful Tips” on page 67.)

• If you use the Multiple Undo function, you cannot use the Single Undo/Redo function.

• If you try to use the Multiple Undo function on a current drive disk that was formatted with the Multiple
Undo function turned off, the recorder displays “Void!” and ignores your operation.

66
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Multiple Undo Function)

Using the Multiple Undo function

1.While the recorder is stopped, press and hold 2.Use the Jog dial or the [NEXT] key and [PREV]
down the [SHIFT] key and press the [UNDO/REDO] key to select the desired date and time, and press
key. the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The recorder displays the date and time of a take (as The recorder displays “Multiple Undo” momentarily,
shown below), and “?” and “SURE ?” flash. performs the Undo function, and recalls the time base
To select the date and time for another take, turn the indication that was shown before the function was
Jog dial. performed. “COMPLETED!” lights up on the screen.
Flashing Flashing
3.Press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button.
SURE?
“COMPLETED!” turns off.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

<Helpful Tips>
To increase the free space on the disk available for the Multiple Undo function, optimize the
current drive disk using the “Disk Optimize?” menu in Setup mode. However, remember that
if you optimize a current drive disk that recorded several takes, only the most recent take
will remain and other takes will be erased. If you wish to keep other takes, follow the procedure
below, then optimize the disk.

<Keeping only one take>

• First, apply the Multiple Undo function to the take you wish to keep, then optimize the disk.
For example, if six takes exist on the disk, as shown below, and you wish to keep only Take 4, apply the
Multiple Undo function to Take 4. As shown on the second time axis, Take 4 moves up to the most
recent position. Now, if you optimize the disk, all takes but Take 4 will be erased.

Completion Completion Completion Completion Completion Completion

data and time data and time data and time data and time data and time data and time
of Take 1 of Take 2 of Take 3 of Take 4 of Take 5 of Take 6

Time axis

Multiple Undo for Take 4

Optimize

Completion
data and time
of Take 4

Time axis

<Keeping multiple takes>

• Apply the Multiple Undo to the desired takes and copy the Program.
For example, if you wish to keep Take 2 and Take 4, follow the procedure described above to apply the
Multiple Undo function to Take 2, then create a copy of the Program. (The Program copy will have
only Take 2 available for the Multiple Undo function.) In the same way, apply the Multiple Undo
function to Take 4 this time, then create another copy of the Program. In this way, you can create
copies of the Programs that contain the desired takes.

67
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

Editing Tracks
The recorder features speedy, nonlinear, nondestructive editing of independent audio tracks because
it uses a 3.5 inch E-IDE hard disk. The following four editing functions allow “Editing of Independent
Audio Tracks.”
Copy & Paste Track Exchange
You can copy a specific range of data from a specific Between tracks 1-56, exchanging is possible in mono
track and paste it to the same or a different track. track units or group track units (Stereo pair 2 tracks
Copy & Paste is possible in the presently active program or 8 tracks).
or also in a different program.

Move & Paste Editing the track name

You can move a specific range of data from a specific
Any type of track name can be registered and edited
track and paste it to the same or a different track.
for each channel.
Move & Paste
You can erase a specific range of data from a specific
track or all tracks.

<Note>
Although Copy & Paste can be executed in a different program, all other editing work can only be done
within the currently active program. Consequently, in order to edit the active program, the desired program
should be selected before starting to edit. In general, don’t change a program until you finish editing
except to Copy & Paste to a different program.
If editing is started while in another program, you could accidentally lose data.
Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, and Erase with the exception of track exchange and editing the track name, is
possible only for data recorded on the real track. If data stored in the additional track is to be edited, move
it temporarily to a real track, and then edit it.

Copy & Paste and Move & Paste

Copy & Paste and Move & Paste might seem like the same function. However, they are different, as
shown in the diagram. Remember this difference when you start using these functions.

• Copy & Paste • Move & Paste

Using the Copy & Paste function enables you to Move & Paste is almost the same as Copy & Paste.
copy a specific range of data from a specific track As shown in the figure, it allows you to move a
to the clipboard as shown below (this is called specific range of data from a specific track to the
“Copy Clip” operation on the unit), then paste clipboard (this is called “Move Clip” on the unit),
the data at a specific point in a specific track. and paste it to a destination track. The difference
The number of copy source tracks and the from Copy & Paste is that the data on the source
number of destination tracks are the same. That track and the clipboard will be erased when you
is, if you copy mono track data, you can paste it paste the data to the destination. That is, you
to a mono track. If you copy adjacent odd/even cannot paste the moved data repeatedly.
tracks (e.g., track 1 and track 2), you can paste it Unlike Copy & Paste, this cannot be executed
to adjacent odd/even tracks. After paste is between programs.
executed, data on the clipboard will remain intact
and as can be repeatedly pasted, as well as to CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point

other programs. Move source track

Move clip
CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point

Copy source track AUTO PUNCH IN point Paste

Copy clip
Paste destination track

AUTO PUNCH IN point Paste

Paste destination track

As shown in the drawing, points for copy or move are called the CLIPBOARD IN point for the copy (or move) starting
point, and CLIPBOARD OUT point for the ending point, and the paste starting point is called the AUTO PUNCH IN
point.

68
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

<Notes> • Executing Copy (or Move)

• The data on the clipboard will be replaced by new
data each time you execute the COPY or MOVE. <Note>
• If pasted data overlaps the source data, the content You can carry out the copy (or move) function only
of the source data will be altered. when the “Chain Play?” menu in the Setup mode is set
to “Off.” If you press the [EDIT] key when this menu is
Perform Copy & Paste and Move & Paste in the not set to “Off,” “Void Chain Play!” is shown and the
following order. operation is ignored. If “Void Chain Play!” is shown, set
the “Chain Play?” menu to “Off.”
The explanation here is on Copy & Paste or Move &
Paste methods in the currently active program.
For Copy & Paste between programs, read page “71”. 1. Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the copy (or
move) source track to set it READY.
Select from mono tracks or adjacent odd-even tracks (1-
Store the copy (or move) start point (CLIPBOARD 2, 3-4, 5-6 etc.).
1. IN point), end point (CLIPBOARD OUT point), and
the paste start point (AUTO PUNCH IN point). <Note>
If you select non-adjacent tracks, such as track 1 and
3, or tracks 1 and 4, the copied (or moved) data will
be pasted back to the copy (or move) source tracks.
Check the stored edit points using the Preview
2. function and make adjustments if necessary.
2. Press the [EDIT] key repeatedly until “Copy Clip?” (or
“Move Clip?”) flashes on the display.
Select “Copy Clip?” to execute Copy & Paste.
Specify the copy (or move) source track, and copy
3. (or move) the data to the clipboard.
Select “Move Clip?” to execute Move & Paste.

OL OL BIT 24
0 0

Specify the destination track and the number of

3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz

4.
12 12

times for the paste operation (repeated paste), 18

24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT

∞ ∞
and execute the paste operation. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• Storing the edit points

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS

1. Refer to the “Storing and editing the locate points to 9

12
18
24
9
12
18
24
CLOCK
kHz

INT
30 30
the memory keys” section for information on storing 42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞

the copy (or move) start and end points, and the paste
start point.
Store the copy (or move) start point to the [CLIPBOARD 3. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
IN] key, the end point to the [CLIPBOARD OUT] key, and The copy (or move) operation will complete immediately.
store the paste start point to the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key. The display briefly indicates “COMPLETED !”, then flashes
the “Copy Paste ?” (or “Move Paste ?”) message.
• See “Storing and editing the locate points to the The recorder enters standby mode for the paste
memory keys” on page “51.” operation. The indicates (small square) of the selected
[RECORD TRACK] select keys continue to flash.

• Checking and adjusting the edit points <Notes>

• Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key without selecting
After you store the edit points, you can check them track in Step 1 will cause the display to indicate an
on the display by pressing the corresponding keys. alarm message “Select TRK !”. Select a track, then
press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
You may also adjust the points. This section explains
how to preview and fine-tune the edit points using • If an Output point has been specified before the In
the Preview function. point (the In point value is the same or large than
the Out point value), the display will show the error
1. While the recorder section is stopped, press and hold message “Void In Point!” or “Void Out Point!” and the
down the [SHIFT] key and press the memory key for return to the previous screen. In this case, set the
correct In/Out points and try again to copy (or
which you wish to check the edit point.
move) the data.
You can preview “fade in” at the CLIPBOARD IN point,
“fade out” at the CLIPBOARD OUT point, and “fade out”
Now the sound data to be pasted has been copied (or
at AUTO PUNCH IN point.
moved) to the clipboard, you can check the data on the
clipboard by following the steps below. If there is no
2. Trim the edit point while previewing. problem with the data, you can proceed to the paste
• Refer to “Preview Function” on page “64” for more operation.
information.

69
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

• Checking the clipboard data This number will count down as the paste operation
proceeds. When the paste operation is complete, the
flashing “Copy Paste” (or “Move Paste”) lights up
• Hold down the [STOP] button and press the [PLAY] continuously, and “COMPLETED !” is displayed.
button.
The recorder indicates whether the sound data on the <Note>
clipboard is a copied data or moved data (“Copy Clip” or If you try to execute the paste operation by pressing
“Move Clip”) and plays the data (this is called “clipboard the [EXECUTE/YES] key when the disk has insufficient
playback”). Monitor the playback sound through the free space, “Over !” appears on the display and edit
mixer channels that correspond to the copied (or moved) mode is cancelled.
tracks. During clipboard playback, the indicates of the In this case, you need to delete unnecessary data or
[RECORD TRACK] select key for the copied (or moved) programs.
track will flash.
• Refer to the following section, “Erase,” “Deleting a
• Press the [EDIT] key again to get ready for the paste Program,” or “Duplicating a Program.”
operation. • Refer to page “73” for more information on erasing.
“Copy Paste?” or “Move Paste?” flashes on the display. • Refer to page “37” for more information on deleting
a program.
• Refer to page “36” for more information on
duplicating a program.
• Executing Paste
4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again. 8. Press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button.
The display indication enables you set the number of The recorder exits edit mode and displays the previous
the paste operations. The number and “SURE?” flash. Time Base indication.
At this time, the flashing [RECORD TRACK] indicator
becomes continuously lit. 9. Turn off the [RECORD TRACK] select key of the copy
Flashing Flashing (or move) source track.

SURE?

• Single Undo/Redo Paste

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30

You can single undo or redo a Copy & Paste

42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

and Move & Paste operation.

Track display ( ) of the item to be copied (or moved) will change to lit.
• To restore the data that existed prior to the paste
5. Select a destination track to paste data. operation, press the [UNDO/REDO] key.

• If paste is to be done on the same track, it is not • To restore the pasted data after you undo the paste
necessary to select the track.
operation, press the [UNDO/REDO] key again.
• Changing the destination track for paste is
permissible to a mono track or adjacent two tracks When you press the [UNDO/REDO] key, the recorder
in odd and even numbers (1-2, 3-4, 5-6, etc.) only will undo or redo the operation immediately, and
when the copy (or move) data is on the clip board. display “Undo !” or “Redo !” and “COMPLETED !”.
For this procedure, if the [RECORD TRACK] select
key of the track to be changed is pressed, and an
objective track for pasting can be selected. <Note>
This function only works when this recorder is in
• If a multiple number of tracks (1-3, 5-8, etc.) other
the stop mode.
than those above had been copied (or moved),
paste can be done only to the same track as that <Note>
of the copy (or move) originating track.
If you perform one of the following operations
The track cannot be selected even though the
[RECORD TRACK] select key is pressed.
after you use the Copy & Paste or Move and Paste
operation, the Undo/Redo function will no longer
6. Turn the Jog dial to enter the number of repeats (Repeat be effective.
= **).
You can enter up to 99. However, this is automatically 1. If a new recording has been made.
limited by the available recording source on the disk. 2. When a new editing job is executed (such as
That is, if the disk has enough free space, you can set up Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase).
to 99 repeats. If the disk has only a small amount of 3. While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when
free space, the Jog dial allows you to set a lower number the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the
of repeats. PLAY (or RECORD) mode.
4. If the power was switched off.
7. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
5. If program select was executed.
“Copy Paste” (or “Move Paste”) flashes and the duration
of the pasted data appears as a negative number on the
6. When multiple undo is executed.
display.

70
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

• Copy & Paste between programs • Checking the clipboard data

Copy & Paste between programs can be performed Data copied to the clipboard can be confirmed even
using the procedures below in the same manner as after switching the program by the above procedure.
in the previous “Copy & Paste in the same program.”
For example, when a specific data in Program 1 is
copied to the clipboard and then switched to
<Notes> Program 2 in which it is to be pasted, as mentioned
• Only copy/paste can be executed between before, if the [PLAY] button is pressed while pressing
different programs. Move/paste cannot be on the [STOP] button, you can listen to data copied
executed between different programs. in Program 1 (clipboard play).

• Do not copy/paste between programs with During clipboard play, “P01” will appear in the
different FS such as copy/paste FS=48kHz display to indicate that copy data in Program 1 is
program data to an FS=44.1kHz program. being played back.
Sound data cannot be guaranteed if copy/paste
had been executed between programs with
different FS.

Store the copy (or move) start point (CLIPBOARD

1. IN point), end point (CLIPBOARD OUT point), and
the paste start point (AUTO PUNCH IN point).

Check the stored edit points using the Preview

2. function and make adjustments if necessary.

3. Specify the track to be copied and copy it in the

clipboard (Copy Clip).

Switch to program for pasting using the program

4. select function.

Register the copy starting point (AUTO PUNCH

5. IN point) in the switched program.

Check the registered editing point with the

6. “Preview function” and if necessary, correct the
editing point.

In the same way as before, enter the editing mode

7. by pressing the [EDIT] key. “Copy Paste?” will be
displayed after pressing the [EDIT] key.

Next, specify the track and amount to be pasted

8. and execute paste.

71
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

Erase
There are two methods for erasing data. Understand the difference between these methods before
you use the Erase function.
• If multiple Programs are set on the disk, first select the desired Program. Do not select another Program, or select
another sampling rate until you finish the erase operation.

• Erasing a specified part of the data between ABS 0 • Erasing data from a specified point to REC END:
and REC END:
You may erase all data in the range from a specified
You may erase a specified part of the data between ABS point to REC END in the currently-selected Program. You
0 and REC END (the end point of the recording) in the can erase data on a mono real track or multiple real
currently-selected Program. (The erased part is replaced tracks. To erase data on an additional track, you need
with silence.) You can erase data on a mono real track to move the data to a real track, then erase it.
or multiple real tracks. To erase data on an additional When you erase all tracks’ data, the REC END point will
track, you need to move the data to a real track, then move backward. However, if you erase data on a mono
erase it. As shown below, the REC END point (the end track or multiple tracks (but not all tracks), the REC
point of recording) is not affected. END point may not be affected. (Refer to the note below.)
The erased area is replaced with silence. As a result, the After the erase operation, the REMAIN time and space
REMAIN time and space will increase. (You will have more will increase.
recordable space on the disk.)
AUTO PUNCH OUT point
AUTO PUNCH IN point (REC END)
AUTO PUNCH IN point AUTO PUNCH OUT point

Any real track

Any real track

Erase
Erase

Any real track Silence

Any real track Silence
ABS 0 REC END

<Note>
If all real tracks contain data as shown below, erasing data on tracks 1 and 2 will not affect the position of REC END.
On the other hand, if all Real tracks contain data as shown below, erasing data on tracks 3 - 6 will move up REC END
to the end point of tracks 1 and 2.
AUTO PUNCH OUT point AUTO PUNCH OUT point
ABS 0 AUTO PUNCH IN point (REC END) ABS 0 AUTO PUNCH IN point (REC END)

Trk 6 Trk 6
Trk 5 Trk 5

Real tracks Trk 4 Trk 4

Real tracks
Trk 3 Trk 3
Trk 2 Trk 2
Trk 1 Trk 1

Trk 6 Trk 6 Erase

Trk 5 Trk 5 Erase
Real tracks Trk 4 Trk 4 Erase
Real tracks
Trk 3 Trk 3 Erase
Trk 2 Erase Trk 2
Trk 1 Erase Trk 1

ABS 0 REC END ABS 0 REC END

Follow the steps below to erase data:

• Storing the edit points
Store the erase start point (AUTO PUNCH IN point)
1. and the erase end point (AUTO PUNCH OUT
point).
1. Refer to the “Storing and editing the locate points
to the memory keys” section for information on
storing the erase start and end points.
Store the erase start point to the [AUTO PUNCH IN] key,
Use the Preview function to check the stored edit and the end point to the [AUTO PUNCH OUT] key.
2. points and adjust them if necessary.
• If you wish to erase the data from a specific point,
store the REC END or later point as the erase end
point. Refer to the <Note> for information on storing
the REC END point.
3. Specify a track to erase and execute the function. • See “Storing and editing the locate points to the
memory keys” on page “51”.

72
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

• Checking and adjusting the edit points <Check Points!>

• To erase the data in its entirety from the tracks,
After you store the edit points, you can check them you can also use the Program Delete function to
on the display by pressing the corresponding keys. erase the entire Program.
You may also adjust the points. In either case, you can expand the recordable area
on the disk. Use either one of the erase operations
1. While the recorder section is stopped, press and to erase unnecessary data if the recorder displays
an alarm message indicating insufficient recordable
hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the memory space for Auto Punch In/Out, Copy & Paste, or Move
key for which you wish to check the edit point. & Paste.
You can preview “fade-out” at the AUTO PUNCH IN point
and “fade-in” at AUTO PUNCH OUT point. • To erase the data in its entirety from ABS 0 - REC
END, it is recommended that erase end point (AUTO
2. Trim the edit point while previewing. PUNCH OUT point) is stored after the REC END time
to ensure through erase performance. To do this,
• Refer to “Preview Function” on page “64” for more move the recorder section location to the REC END
information. point prior to storing the AUTO PUNCH OUT point,
press the [PLAY] button from that location, move
the ABS time after the REC END, and store.
The hard disk will not successfully access points
• Executing Erase after REC END though play is executed after REC
END, however, this makes it possible to move up
the ABS time.
<Note>
You can carry out the erase function only when the
“Chain Play?” menu in the Setup mode is set to “Off.”
If you press the [EDIT] key when this menu is not set to
“Off,” “Void Chain Play!” is shown and the operation is
ignored. If “Void Chain Play!” is shown, set the “Chain • Single Undo/Redo Erase
Play?” menu to “Off.”
You can single undo or redo the Erase operation.

1. Press the [RECORD TRACK] select key to select • To restore the data that existed before you erased it,
the track to erase, to set it READY. press the [UNDO/REDO] key.
You can select a mono track or multiple tracks (including
all tracks). The selected track indication flashes. • To restore the data after you undo the Erase operation,
press the [UNDO/REDO] key again.
2. Press the [EDIT] key repeatedly until “Erase”
flashes on the display. When you press the [UNDO/REDO] key, the recorder
will undo or redo the operation immediately, and
3. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. display “Undo !” or “Redo !” and “COMPLETED !”.
The flashing “Erase” message lights up steadily, and
“SURE?” flashes.
<Note>
Flashing
This function only works when this recorder is
SURE?
in the stop mode.
OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24
FS
<Note>
6 6
9
12
18
24
9
12
18
24
CLOCK
INT
kHz
If you perform one of the following operations
30 30
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞ after you use the Copy & Paste or Move and Paste
operation, the Undo/Redo function will no longer
Lit be effective.

• To cancel the erase operation, press the [STOP] 1. If a new recording has been made.
button or the [EXIT/NO] key while “SURE ?” flashes 2. When a new editing job is executed (such as
on the display. Copy & Paste, Move & Paste, Erase).
3. While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode, when
the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the
4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again. PLAY (or RECORD) mode.
The recorder starts erasing the data and “Wait Erasing!”
4. If the power was switched off.
flashes. When the erase operation is completed,
“COMPLETED !” lights up. 5. If program select was executed.
6. When multiple undo is executed.
5. Press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key.
The recorder exits edit mode and displays the previous
Time Base indication.

73
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

Track Exchange
"Track exchange" is the function that exchanges tracks -- all real tracks and all additional tracks--
currently in the programs, in mono track units or in multiple track (Stereo pair 2 tracks; 8 track
units) units.
In other words, exchanging tracks in any combination, as shown below, means that data recorded
on those tracks will be relocated. This function enables effective use of tracks. Not only will it be
possible to make exchanges between real tracks but, by dumping a real track to a blank additional
track, another blank real track is created for future recording.
However, since data in this additional track cannot be directly played back in real time, if the data
need to be played back or edited, it must be moved to a real track.
Also, as explained in the previous "Erase," “Track Exchange” is necessary when checking REC END in
the additional track.

Exchange in 8 track units

Exchange in 2 track (stereo pair) units

Track 1 Track 9 Track 17 Track 49

Track 2 Track 10 Track 18 Track 50
Track 3 Track 11 Track 19 Track 51
Track 4 Track 12 Track 20 Track 52
.........................
Track 5 Track 13 Track 21 Track 53
Track 6 Track 14 Track 22 Track 54
Track 7 Track 15 Track 23 Track 55
Track 8 Track 16 Track 24 Track 56

Exchange in mono track units

Exchange in 8 track units

<Note>
In the “Format conversion of the additional track” menu of the SETUP mode, the range of tracks that can be exchanged will
be 1-24 in the current drive in which the “V2 (56)” format was converted to “V1 (24)” format. For details on the “Format
conversion of the additional track” menu, refer to the SETUP mode on page “132.”

• Execution of Track Exchange

• Exchanging in group units
<Note>
You can carry out the track exchange function only Flashing
when the “Chain Play?” menu in the Setup mode is set
to “Off.” If you press the [EDIT] key when this menu is OL OL BIT 24
0 0

not set to “Off,” “Void Chain Play!” is shown and the op- 3
6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz

eration is ignored. CLOCK

18 18
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
If “Void Chain Play!” is shown, set the “Chain Play?” menu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

to “Off.”
• Exchanging in mono units
Flashing
1. In the stop mode, press the [EDIT] key to display
"TRK Exch.Mono?" or "TRK Exch.Group?."
OL OL
Select "TRK Exch.Group?" to exchange tracks in 2 track 0
3
6
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
9 9
(stereo pair)/8 track units, and "TRK Exch.Mono?" to
kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30

exchange in mono track units. 42

∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞

2. After either is displayed, press the [EXECUTE/

YES] key.
The display will change to selecting the tracks for
exchanged. To actually select the tracks, please refer
to the next page.

74
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

• Exchanging in group track units • Exchange in mono track units

1. By pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key after “TRK 1. Upon display of the previously mentioned "TRK
Exch. Group?” is displayed, the display will change Exch.Mono?," then pressing the [EXECUTE/YES]
as shown below. key, the display will change as shown below.
This display is indicating that, at present, tracks 1-
This display indicates that, at present, tracks 1 and
8 and 9-16 can be exchanged.
2 can be exchanged.
"*****" is indicating the track name of the flashing
"*****" is indicating the track name of the flashing
track left two digits (In this example - Name of track
track. In this case, the name of track 01.
01).
Flashing
Flashing

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 OL OL BIT 24
kHz 0 0
12 12
18 18 CLOCK 3 3
24 24 6 6 FS
INT 9 9
30 30 kHz
42 42 12 12
∞ ∞ 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

2. If the Jog dial is rotated while "01 08" is flashing,

the 8 track unit numbers ("09 16," "17 24," "25 32," 2. If the Jog dial is rotated when "01" is flashing, the
"33 40," "41 48," "49 56") or pair track unit numbers mono track unit numbers ("01"-"56") will be
("01 02," "03 04"... "55 56") will be alternately alternately displayed.
displayed.
3. After selecting the left side track, move to the right
3. After selecting the left side track, press the [NEXT] side flashing by pressing the [NEXT] key.
key to move to the flashing right side.
Flashing
Flashing

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
OL OL 3 3
0 0
BIT 24 6 6 FS
3 3 9 9 kHz
6 6 FS 12 12
9 9 kHz
18 18 CLOCK
12 12 24 24 INT
18 18 CLOCK 30 30
24 24 INT 42 42
30 30 ∞ ∞
42 42
∞ ∞ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

4. Display the desired track by rotating the Jog dial 4. The same as in Step 2, display the desired track by
in the same manner as Step 2. rotating the Jog dial.
If the flashing display is to be moved from right to Press the [REV] key or rotate the Shuttle dial to move
left, either press the [REV] key or rotate the the flashing number from right to left.
Shuttle dial.

5. After selecting the left and right tracks, press the

5. After selecting the left right tracks, press the
[EXECUTE/YES] key.
[EXECUTE/YES] key. Track exchange is executed and simultaneous with
Track exchange is executed and simultaneous with completion, "COMPLETED!" is displayed and then
completion, "COMPLETED!" is displayed. returned to the display prior to entering the edit
The D2424LV will then return to the display prior mode.
to entering the edit mode.
Regardless as to whether "Exch.01 08-09 16" or Whether "Exch.01-09" or "Exch.09-01" is input, there
"Exch.09 16-01 08" is input, there will be no will be no difference in the fact that track 1 and
difference in the fact that tracks 1-8 and tracks 9- track 9 have been exchanged.
16 have been exchanged.

<Notes>
• You cannot select the same track for left and right.
If the same track is mistakenly specified, "Select Err" will be displayed for an instant and then returned
to the display prior to execution.
• As it stands, data in the additional track cannot be played back or REC END confirmed.
To do this, data must be moved temporarily onto a real track. When saving the data to an external DAT,
adat or SCSI, data on the additional track will be saved in its original state and, when reloading, will be
reinstalled on the disk the same as prior to saving it.

75
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Editing Tracks)

Registering the Track name

Any type of track name can be registered or edited for each real track/additional track.
In general, after the current drive is formatted, a "Temporary title"("#TRACK 1," etc.) is automati-
cally registered for all tracks.
This temporary title can be changed and registered as you wish using the "Track Name Edit?" menu
in the SETUP mode.
For example, to allow checking at a glance, sound sources (guitar, keyboard, vocal...etc.) recorded
on each track, a maximum 8 digit track name can be registered, such as "Guitar" for track 1,
"Keyboard" for track 2, "Vocal" for track 3, and so on.

1. Enter the SETUP mode while in the stop mode by

pressing the [SETUP] key.

2. Select the "Track Name Edit?" display by rotating

the Jog dial, and then press the [EXECUTE/YES]
key.
As shown below, the display will change to selecting
the desired track and the track number will flash.
In the example below, "01" in "TRK:01" will flash.

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz
<Hint>
24 24 INT
30
42
∞
30
42
∞
If the [PREV] key or [NEXT] key is pressed when in-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
putting letters/symbols/numbers at the edit point
(flashing position), it is possible to jump to the let-
ters/symbols in the above square box.
Flashing This is convenient for quickly selecting the letters/
symbols/numbers to be input.
SETUP

PGM
OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
5. After input of the desired track name, press the
9 9 kHz
12
18
24
30
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
[EXECUTE/YES] key.
42 42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞
By pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key, the D2424LV will
change to the track number selecting display, the same
as in Step-2 (Track number will flash).
3. Rotate the Jog dial while "01" is flashing to select
the desired track number, and press the 6. If you wish to continue registering track names,
[EXECUTE/YES] key. repeat <Step-3> and <Step-4>.
The flashing number will move to the left-end digit to
allow input of new letters and symbols (In example 7. Upon completing registering of the track names,
below, "#" will flash).
press the [EXIT/NO] key to exit from the SETUP
Flashing mode.
SETUP

OL OL BIT
PGM
24
* Example: Track 1 -> “Rhythm”
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12 SETUP
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞ OL OL
0 0
BIT 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
4. Numbers and symbols can be input at the selected
(flashing) digit by rotating the Jog dial, and the
flashing digit can be moved with the Shuttle dial. * Example: Track 5-> “Vocal-A”
If the Jog dial is rotated at the edit point, letters/
SETUP

numbers/symbols listed in the following can be input.

A maximum of 8 digits can be input for a name. OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24

6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

76
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

MIDI Sync Function

The following are examples concerning general types of systems using MIDI related functions
contained in the recorder.

MIDI clock sync system

By setting any desired meter at any desired point of the programmable tempo map contained in
the recorder, and by output of a MIDI clock and song position pointer according to the setting, a
hardware type MIDI sequencer can be synchronized as a MIDI clock slave. Consequently, in this
system, the recorder will be the master and the MIDI sequencer the slave.

* Restore the default settings on this recorder.

* Check for the correct program and proper sampling frequency.

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20

RECORD TRACK

5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD
MIDI OUT MIDI clock & song position pointer
FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

Master Recorder

METER
OL
-3
-6
MIDI IN
-9
-12
-18
-24
-36
-40
L R
ST BUSS/SOLO

MIDI Sequencer
PAGE SELECT
1-8 ANALOG IN 9-16 ADAT IN 17-20 EFF RTN

SETUP EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID EQ/HI-MID EQ/HI-MID SELECTED EQ EFF EDIT

SYSTEM MIDI GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN EQ ON EFF 1 EFF 2

EQ LIBRARY EFF LIBRARY

CURRENT SCENE STATUS FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q
RECALL STORE RECALL STORE

PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN

EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT

KEY MODE

ROUTING/ PAIR/
PHASE GROUP

SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO

REC BUSS
SOLO RECALL
SCENE MEMORY
STORE
MIDI OUT
MMC SEND

CHANNEL/
CH VIEW METER

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

FADER MODE

AUX1 AUX2 /-1 +1/

AUX3 AUX4 EXIT

DATA
+10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0

ADD.AUX
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10
EFF1 EFF2

-10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20

-30
CHANNEL ENTER
-20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
-40

-30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30

-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -60

- - - - - - - - -

ANALOG IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ADAT IN 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MASTER
EFF RTN 17 18 19 20

MIDI IN
MIDI sound sources

• Connecting external equipment (Refer to connecting schematic)

1. Connect the unit [MIDI OUT] to [MIDI IN] of the MIDI sequencer.

2. Set the MIDI sequencer for “external sync mode (EXTERNAL SYNC) by MIDI clock.”
* Refer to the Owners Manual of the equipment in use for details.

77
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

• Setup of the D2424LV

1. Because the MIDI clock and song position pointer will be output from the recorder, set the SETUP mode
“MIDI sync signal output setting” to “CLK.”
* Initial setting: MTC
* Permissible setting: CLK (MIDI clock and song position pointer:”CLK”)
MTC (MIDI time code: “MTC”)
Off (No output of MIDI sync signal)
* This item can be setup for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “114”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output setting” for correct operating procedures.

2. The meter in the desired bar can be set by “Time signature setting” of the SETUP mode.
* Initial setting: 001 bar, 4/4 signature.
* Permissible bar setting: 001~999
* Permissible meter setting: 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, 6/8, 7/8, 8/8,
— — (Elimination of signature)
* Permissible setting of maximum number of points: 64 points
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “109”, SETUP mode “Time Signature Setting” for operating procedure.

3. Tempo in the desired bar can be set by “Tempo setting” of the SETUP mode.
Tempo map is made in steps 2 and 3.

* Initial setting: 001 bar, 1st meter, Tempo120.

* Permissible bar setting: Follows the previous “Setup of the time signature.”
* Permissible signature setting: Follows the previous “Setup of the time signature.”
* Permissible setting of tempo: Quarter note=30~250 .... (Tempo elimination)
* Permissible setting of maximum number of points: 64 points
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “111”, SETUP mode “Tempo Setting” for operating procedure.

4. Set the SETUP mode “Metronome setting” to ON if click sound is to be output according to the setup
tempo map.
* Initial setting: Off
* Permissible setup item: Off, On
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “112”, SETUP mode “Metronome setting” for operating procedure.

5. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, and then change the time base display to
BAR/BEAT/CLK.

• Confirming the MIDI clock sync

During recording and at playback following the recording, the time base (BAR/BEAT/CLK) is
displayed in accordance to the setup tempo map, and the MIDI clock and song position pointer
is also output.
Confirm that the travel position (BAR/BEAT/CLK) of the recorder and the travel position of the
synchronized MIDI sequencer are matched.

78
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

* If correct sync cannot be obtained, re-check the connections/cables and setting of both equipment.

<Note>
In the recorder, the “ABS 0” position is set at “-002BAR/1BEAT /00CLK.”
This setting is made in consideration of the time required (it will not sync immediately) for the MIDI sequencer,
etc. to enter into sync. As a result, if the recorder is played back from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0), sync will be
completed by the time it reaches the first bar, and will thus synchronize from head of the tune.

• Execution of recording
Various ways of recording can be conducted while synchronizing the recorder and the MIDI
sequencer with the MIDI clock.

MTC sync/MIDI machine control system

The following will explain synchronization by the MTC (MIDI time code) output and the computer
controlling system using MMC (MIDI machine control). In this system, the recorder will be the
master and the computer (with sequence software) will be the slave. The recorder will attach
any desired offset (time difference) against ABS time (absolute time) and output it as MTC in any
desired frame rate. It can also carry out the proper operation upon receiving an MMC and
Fostex System Exclusive Message from outside. In this case, because the recorder can setup a
DEVICE ID number by the SETUP mode “MIDI Device ID Setting” menu, a multiple number of the
unit’s can be separately controlled by changing the DEVICE ID numbers in the transmitted message
from the computer. In regards to the corresponding content for MMC, refer to the “MMC list” on
page “134” and on the Fostex System Exclusive Message, the “Fostex Exclusive List” on page “135.”

* Set the recorder in the initial state.

* Confirm the program and sampling frequency.

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW
CHARACTER
EJECT CHASE
LOCATE MEMORY
MIDI IN MMC or Fostex System Exclusive Message
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20

RECORD TRACK

5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD MIDI OUT
FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

Master Recorder

METER
OL
-3
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
-6
-9
-12
-18
-24
-36
-40
L R
ST BUSS/SOLO
Computer System
with
MMC/MTC software
PAGE SELECT
1-8 ANALOG IN 9-16 ADAT IN 17-20 EFF RTN

SETUP EQ/LO EQ/LO-MID EQ/HI-MID EQ/HI-MID SELECTED EQ EFF EDIT

SYSTEM MIDI GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN EQ ON EFF 1 EFF 2

EQ LIBRARY EFF LIBRARY

CURRENT SCENE STATUS FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q FREQ Q
RECALL STORE RECALL STORE

PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN

EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT EQ EDIT

KEY MODE

ROUTING/ PAIR/
PHASE GROUP
REC BUSS SCENE MEMORY
SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO RECALL STORE
MMC SEND

CHANNEL/

MIDI OUT
CH VIEW METER

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

FADER MODE

AUX1 AUX2 /-1 +1/

AUX3 AUX4 EXIT

DATA
+10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 +10 0

ADD.AUX
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -10
EFF1 EFF2

-10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -10 -20

-30
CHANNEL ENTER
-20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20 -20
-40

-30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30 -30

-40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -40 -60

- - - - - - - - -

ANALOG IN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ADAT IN 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MASTER
EFF RTN 17  18 19 20

MIDI IN
MIDI sound sources

79
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

• Connecting to external equipment

Connect the recorder MIDI IN/OUT to the computer (with MIDI interface) MIDI IN/OUT (MMC/
MTC complied sequence software is activated in the computer).

• Setup of external equipment

Setup the following in the sequence software.

* Set to MTC external sync mode (EXTERNAL SYNC).

* Set for output of MMC.
* Set to the desired MTC read out frame rate.
* Set start time of the tune (which MTC time is to be the first bar). Refer to precaution in regards
to MTC offset, farther on.

For details, refer to Owners Manual of the external equipment.

• Setup of the D2424LV

1. Because MTC will be output from the recorder, set to “MTC” the SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output
setting.”

Refer to page “113”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output setting” for operating procedure.

2. Set a random offset time by the SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting.”

* Initial setting: 00H (Hour) 59M (Minute) 57S (Second) 00F (Frame) 00SF (Sub Frame)
* Permissible setup time: 00H 00M 00S 00F 00SF ~ 23H 59M 59S 29F 99SF
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “115”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting” for operating procedure.

3. In the SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting,” whether the MTC offset time setup in Step 2 should be
output (ABS) at the ABS 00M 00S 00F 00SF position or at the 001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK (bar, signature) must
be selected.
* Initial setting: ABS
* Permissible setup item: ABS, Bar Beat
* This item can be setup for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “116”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting” for operating procedure.

4. Setup to the same frame rate as that setup by the sequence software by “MTC Frame rate setting” of the
SETUP mode.

* Initial setting: 25 frames

* Permissible setup of frame rate: 24, 25, 29.97nd, 29.97df, 30nd, 30df
* This item can be setup for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “114”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting” for operating procedure and details.

5. Set to the same figure as the sequence software MMC device number (and Fostex System Exclusive
Message device number) by the SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting.”
When the sequence software transmits by “7F,” it means “ALL DEVICE” and therefore, it need not be
setup.

80
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

* Initial setting: 00
* Permissible setup ID: 00 ~ 99
* This item will be the setting common to all programs.
* This setting cannot be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “121”, SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting” for operating procedure and details.

6. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key to show time base in the MTC display.

<Notes on MTC related setups>

By “MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode setting,” at what position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/
1BEAT/00CLK) should the setup MTC (MTC offset time) is to be output is set. When setting the
start time of the tune in the sequence software by these setups, be careful of the following
points.

• Offset mode: For ABS

If playback is started from ABS 0, since MTC will be output starting from the MTC offset time
that has been set, the start time of the tune set by the sequence software must be set about 3
seconds later from the MTC offset time that was setup. This will provide time because the
sequence software cannot sync immediately after MTC is output. For example, if the initial
setting of “00H 59M 57S 00F 00SF” is used, set the start time of the tune to “01H 00M 00S 00F.”
If playback is thus started from ABS 0 (LOCATE ABS 0), sync will be obtained by the time it
reaches the first bar and therefore it can be made to sync from the head of the tune.

• Offset mode: For BAR BEAT

As mentioned before, because the “ABS 0” position is set at the “002BAR / 1BEAT / 00CLK” position,
the setup MTC offset time can be set to the head of the tune without taking into account the time
until reaching sync, as mentioned above. The length of the time two bars beforehand will change
in accordance to the first bar setting for “signature” and “tempo.” For example, it will be long if
the tempo is set slow. This mode can be effectively applied when using the MIDI clock and MTC
in parallel, and when using MTC for the sync signal while controlling the recorder with time
base BAR/BEAT/CLK.

• Confirming MTC sync/MMC

1. During recording and at playback after recording, time base MTC is displayed according to the setting
and MTC is output at the same time.
Check that the recorder traveling position (MTC) and the traveling position of the sequence software in sync are
matched.

2. Send MMC commands such as PLAY, STOP and LOCATE from the sequence software to see that the
recorder will be properly controlled.
When a correct MIDI command (MMC or FEX) is received, “MIDI” in the display will be lit for about 40msec.
There is no setting in the recorder to receive MMC or FEX but it will operate if a correct MIDI signal is input.

* If sync and control cannot be done correctly, re-check connections/cables and the setting of
both equipment.

• Execution of recording
Carry out various recordings while synchronizing the recorder and a MIDI sequencer with the
MIDI clock.

81
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

Multitrack system by the slave mode

An example of how to make a multitrack system by interconnecting three recorders in a slave
mode function, will be explained in the following.

* Initialize the recorder.

* Confirm the program.
* Set all three recorder’s to the same sampling frequency.

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

EDIT SETUP
PREVIEW

UNDO/REDO
CHARACTER
PREV NEXT DISP SEL
EJECT

STORE
CHASE
LOCATE MEMORY
RECALL
Master <#1>
POWER
24bit
96kHz
SHIFT

AUTO
PUNCH
TC READY

REHEARSAL

TAKE
TC GEN M.UNDO

LOCATE
PREV TC

VARI PITCH
NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

[Clock Sel?]=Int.
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

WORD OUT MIDI OUT

WORD IN MIDI IN

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY START PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

Slave <#2>
IN OUT IN OUT END

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER
24bit
96kHz
SHIFT

AUTO
PUNCH
TC READY

REHEARSAL

TAKE
TC GEN M.UNDO

LOCATE
PREV TC

VARI PITCH
NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

[Clock Sel?]=Word
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

MIDI THRU

WORD IN MIDI IN

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

Slave <#3>
PREVIEW EJECT CHASE
CHARACTER LOCATE MEMORY
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

[Clock Sel?]=Word
24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

• Equipment interconnections
1.From the recorder (#1) to the recorder (#2), connect WORD OUT to WORD IN and MIDI OUT to MIDI IN.
2.From the recorder (#1) to the recorder (#3), connect WORD OUT to WORD IN.
3.From the recorder (#2) to the recorder (#3), connect MIDI THRU (Note!!!) to MIDI IN.
<Notes>
* In order to slave drive the recorder with each other, the best setting is to supply word clock signals together with
MTC from the master.
* As shown in the above schematic, at input or the Word Clock from the master to the second slave, WORD OUT
from the master must always be branched to the second slave. Do not connect the first slave WORD OUT to the
second slave WORD IN .

• Setup of the recorder (#1): <Master>

1. Because MTC, which is the reference for sync, is output from the recorder (#1), set the “MIDI sync signal
output setting” of the SETUP mode to “MTC.”
Refer to page “114”, SETUP mode “MIDI sync signal output setting” for operating procedure and details.

2. A random frame rate to be used is set by the SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting.”
Refer to page “114”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting” for operating procedure and details.

82
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

3. With the SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting,” whether the MTC offset time will be output (ABS) at the
ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F 00SF point or at the 001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK (bar/signature) point of the tempo map,
is selected.

Refer to page “116”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting” for operating procedure and details.

4. A random offset time is set by the SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting.”

Refer to page “115”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting” for operating procedure and details.

5. “00” is set with the SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting.”

Refer to page “121”, SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting” for operating procedure and details.

6. Set to “Int.” the clock setting by the SETUP mode “Clock setting.”

Refer to page “122”, SETUP mode “Clock setting” for operating procedure and details.

7. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key to change the time base display to MTC.

• Setup of the recorder (#2) <Slave 1> and (#3) <Slave 2>
1. Set the SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting” to the same frame rate as in the recorder (#1).

Refer to page “114”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting” for operating procedure and details.

2.Set the SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting” to the same mode as in the recorder (#1).

Refer to page “116”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting” for operating procedure and details.

3. Set the SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting” to the same offset time as in the recorder (#1).

Refer to page “115”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting” for operating procedure and details.

4. Set the SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting,” to “01” in the recorder (#2), and to “02” in the recorder (#3).

Refer to page “121”, SETUP mode “MIDI device ID setting” for operating procedure and details.

5. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key While holding down the [SHIFT] key, set slave mode to “On.”
“CHASE” indicator will be flashing in the display.

6. Using the SETUP mode “Slave type setting,” set slave type to “Free.”

* Slave type initial setting: Vari

* Permissible setup item: Vari, Free
* This item can be set for each program.
* The setting can be saved/loaded as song data.
* This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF.

Refer to page “117”, SETUP mode “Slave type setting”, for operating procedure and details.

7. Set to “Word” the clock setting by the SETUP mode “Clock setting.”

Refer to page “122”, SETUP mode “Clock setting” for operating procedure and details.

8. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, to change the time base display to MTC.

83
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

<Note>
After this setup, check the following in the recorder (#2) and (#3).

• Blinking of “CHASE” in the display: This will change to constant lit upon completing chase lock
in lateroperation.

• “EXT” and “WORD” are lit in the display: This means it is externally synchronized against the
input word clock signal.

• Check chase lock

1. When the master recorder (#1) is played back, MTC IN LED of the slave recorder (#2) and (#3) will be lit,
“CHASE” in the display will immediately change from blinking to lit and chase lock will be completed.
Check that the MTC time on display are same in both master and slave units.

2. When the master starts recording, the slave will also start recording upon completing chase lock.

3. When the master is stopped, the slave will also stop as MTC from the master will be interrupted.
“CHASE” in the display will change from lit to blinking.

4. During FF/REW, the master only will be in the FF/REW mode and the slaves will remain stopped but
when playback/recording is started, the slaves will immediately chase lock.

<Note>
The unit re-chase window is fixed at “10 frame.” In other words, when MTC of the master and slave drifts apart
more than 10 frames, it will assume that chase lock is disengaged and the slave will match the position again
with the master (re-chase operation). During the re-chase operation, sound output will be muted. If the drift
is within 10 frames, the slave will recognize this and continue to travel.
Because the master supplies digital signal to slave in this system, re-chase is rarely carried out following chase
lock.

* Should the unit fail to correctly chase lock and control, re-check the connection /cables and all settings.

• Execution of recording
A variety of recording work can be carried out with all three recorder’s in the chase lock mode.

84
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode

Up to this point, synchronization with external MIDI equipment has been explained with the
recorder as the master and MIDI equipment as the slave but depending on the slave mode setting,
the MIDI equipment can be set as the master and the recorder as the slave.

<Note>
External MIDI equipment which can be used as the master is limited to those which can output MTC.

* Initialize the recorder.

* Confirm the program and sampling frequency.
* In the following, the explanation will be on the assumption that a computer (with sequence software) is
used.

<Master>
Computer with MMC/MTC
software

<Slave>

AUTO RTN AUTO RTN

CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH
AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END PGM SEL EXIT/NO EXECUTE/YES

24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDER

PREVIEW
CHARACTER
EJECT CHASE
LOCATE MEMORY
MIDI IN MIDI OUT
EDIT SETUP UNDO/REDO PREV NEXT DISP SEL STORE RECALL

POWER SHIFT TC READY TC GEN M.UNDO PREV TC NEXT TC TIME BASE SEL HOLD

24bit
AUTO REHEARSAL
PUNCH LOCATE VARI PITCH
96kHz

TAKE
OPTICAL
P.EDIT

RECORD TRACK RECORD STOP PLAY REW F FWD

1/9/17 2/10/18 3/11/19 4/12/20 5/13/21 6/14/22 7/15/23 8/16/24 TRACK SHIFT

FOOT SW
ENVELOPE ALL INPUT ALL READY

ACCESS 9-16 17-24 TRACK SHIFT CLIPBOARD PLAY

LOCATE ABS 0
LOCATE REC END

• Connection to external equipment

Connect MIDI OUT of the computer (with MIDI interface) with MIDI IN of the recorder.
The computer sequence software complying to MMC/MTC must be activated.

• Setup of external equipment

Sequence software is setup as follows.
* Set for output of MTC.
* Set frame rate of the MTC to be output.
* Confirm start time of the tune.

Refer to Owners Manual of the respective equipment for details.

• Setup of the D2424LV

1. Set to same frame rate as the sequence software by the SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting.”
Refer to page “114”, SETUP mode “MTC Frame rate setting” for operating procedure and details.

2. Set to the desired mode by the SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting.”

Refer to page “116”, SETUP mode “MTC offset mode setting” for operating procedure and details.

3. A random offset time can be set by the SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting.”

Refer to page “115”, SETUP mode “MTC offset time setting” for operating procedure and details.

4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key holding down the [SHIFT] key, set the slave mode to “On.”

85
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Sync Function)

5. Set slave type to “Vari” by the SETUP mode “Slave type setting.”

Refer to page “117”, SETUP mode “Slave type setting” for operating procedure and details.

6. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key, to change the time base display to MTC.

<Precautions at MTC related setups>

The position (ABS 0 or 001BAR/1BEAT/00CLK) when the setup MTC (MTC offset time) should be output was
setup by the “MTC offset time setting” and “MTC offset mode setting.” In accordance to start time of the tune set by
the sequence software, setup as explained below.

Offset mode: For ABS

Set the MTC offset time about three seconds prior to the start time of the tune set by the sequence software.
Because the recorder cannot immediately chase lock after input of MTC, in order to sync the unit from head of
the tune, set the preroll using the sequence software, and playback from before the actual head of the tune to
allow the recorder to enter into sync by the time it arrives at the head of the tune.

Offset mode: For BAR/BEAT

The MTC offset time can be set to the same time as the start time of the tune set by the sequence software.
Because the “ABS 0” position is set at the “002BAR/1BEAT/00CLK” position in the unit, as mentioned before, the
preceding time required for sync is already set. The preceding time of two bar lengths could change in length
depending on the first bar’s “signature setting” and “tempo setting” mentioned before. For example, it will be
longer if the tempo is slowed down.

• Confirming chase lock

1. When the sequence software is played, MTC IN LED of the recorder will light, “CHASE” in the display will
change from blinking to lit and the chase lock will be completed.
Check that the MTC output by the sequence software and MTC time displayed in the recorder are the same.

2. When the sequence software stops, MTC will be interrupted and the recorder will also stop.
“CHASE” in the display will change from lit to blinking.

3. During FF/REW of the sequence software, the recorder will remain stopped but upon starting to record,
the recorder will immediately chase lock.

<Note>
Chase lock of the recorder by MTC only is permissible when speed difference of the MTC from the master is within
+/- 5.6%. Against the MTC within this range, variable pitch will be constantly applied internally for chasing.
Chase lock, however, will not function against MTC at a speed difference outside this range. Also, when the master
speed difference is large, it is advised to let the recorder learn the master speed by entering PLAY prior to recording.
By doing so, it will be lock faster from the second and later sessions.

* Should it not be possible to chase lock, re-check connections / cables and all settings.

• Execution of recording
Carry out various recordings while the recorder is chase locked to the sequence software.

<One Point Advice>

Sync signal “Free” of the “Slave mode setting” menu:
When the recorder is made to chase lock by MTC only, variable pitch will be constantly applied by external MTC.
If a digital signal is output to an external digital equipment from the recorder, it will not be able to follow the
speed difference (MTC speed difference of the master) of the recorder and the external digital equipment, in
some cases, may not be able to input a continuous digital signal.
As a counter measure, the sync signal should be set to “Free” by the “Slave mode setting” menu. Using this setting,
the recorder will enter self operation by the internal clock, after completion of chase lock, and it will be possible
to supply a stable digital signal to the external equipment.
Under this setting, when MTC drift between the master recorder and slave recorder exceeds 10 frames, the
recorder will assume that chase lock has been disengaged and the slave recorder will carry out position matching
again with the master unit (re-chase operation). During the re-chase operation, sound output will be muted and
the digital signal will also be interrupted. If it is within 10 frames, the slave recorder will continue to run while
admitting this drift.

86
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Saving and Loading Song Data

The recorder allows you to select the data (audio data and Setup data) from a current Program and save it to
a DAT machine as an S/PDIF digital signal or to an adat machine as an adat digital signal, or save it to a SCSI
device. You can also re-load the saved data to the recorder. In particular, using a SCSI device enables you to
save and load the data of all Programs (up to 99 Programs), as well as an individual Program. These save and
load functions are convenient when you wish to store Programs (complete or in progress) temporarily to a
DAT, adat, or SCSI device to clear enough space on the internal hard disk to make new recordings.
Also, in addition to save/load by FDMS-3 Ver. 3, save/load in WAV file is also possible and the saved data
transferred to a computer for editing.
Furthermore, by installing the optional Model 9044 (BAY+CADDY) in D2424LV, it becomes possible to install
an E-IDE hard disk for backup purpose or the Model 9046 (DVD-RAM drive) and in the same way, and save/
load by FDMS-3 Ver. 3.0 or WAV file can be realized.

**********About saved and loaded data**********

The data format and time required to SAVE/LOAD song data will vary between saving and loading with
a DAT using S/P DIF digital signals, saving and loading with an adat device using adat digital signals, or
saving and loading with a SCSI device/IDE2 (E-IDE hard disk or optional DVD-RAM drive).

S/PDIF digital signal (You can save and load each Program individually.):
Following about five seconds of pilot signal (shown in the diagram below), song data in the current drive
is output to a connected DAT. Two tracks of audio data (shown in black in the diagram) are output.
To save data from Real tracks 1-24, two-track data will be output twelve times, which takes twelve as
much time as the song duration (ABS 0 to REC END). To save all data including Additional tracks 1-56,
two-track data will be output twenty eight times, which takes twenty eight times the song duration.
Saved data is also loaded two tracks at a time.

Trk 1&2 Trk 3&4 Trk 53&54 Trk 55&56

Program 1 (P01) Program 2 (P02) Program 99 (P99)

adat digital signal (You can save and load each Program individually.):
After about five seconds of pilot signal (shown in gray in the diagram below), song data in the current
drive is output to a connected adat. Eight-track audio data (shown in black in the diagram) is output.
To save the data from Real tracks 1-24, data will be output three times, which takes the same amount of
time as the song duration (ABS 0 to REC END).
To save all data including Additional tracks 1-56, eight-track data will be output seven times, which takes
seven times the song duration. Saved data is also located eight tracks at a time.

Trk 1 ~ 8 Trk 9 ~ 16 Trk 49 ~ 56

Program 1 (P01) Program 2 (P02) Program 99 (P99)

SCSI or IDE2 (You can save and load each Program individually or all program.):
All Real track data and Additional track data is output simultaneously to a SCSI disk as shown in black in
the diagram. Therefore, saving and loading a Program takes much less time relative to a DAT or adat.
No pilot signal or beep is recorded. If the available disk space is smaller than the song data size, you may
use multiple disks (up to 99 disks) to save and load an entire song. You can also save/load WAV files in
DOS formatted disks.

Trk 1 ~ 56

Program 1 (P01) Program 2 (P02) Program 99 (P99)

87
Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

<The following items can be saved and loaded as song data>

Memory data: CLIPBOARD IN/OUT, AUTO RTN START/END, AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT point data
Locate data (locate number 00~99): when saving and loading song data using SCSI
Time Base: ABS, MTC, or BAR/BEAT/CLK
Setup mode: • Time signature setting (BAR BEAT), • Tempo setting, • Click On/Off setting
• Preroll Time setting, • Midi Sync Out setting, • MTC Frame Rate setting
• MTC Offset setting, • MTC Offset Mode setting, • Rec Protect On/Off setting
• Slave Mode on/off setting, • Slave Type setting, • Virtual TC Setting (when saving
and loading song data using SCSI)

<The following items cannot be saved or loaded as song data>

Auto Play mode and Auto Return mode On/Off
Vari-pitch mode On/Off, and pitch data
Setup mode: • Digital In setting, • Digital Out setting, • Bar/Beat Resolution On/Off setting
• Device ID setting, • Foot switch function setting, • Mark stop function setting
• Auto EE mode setting, • Chain play mode setting and chain list
• Reference level setting, • Bal/Unbal setting, • Contrast level setting

<Notes in using DAT and adat>

• Execution of save/load is permissible only in 44.1kHz/16 bit, 44.1kHz/24 bit, 48kHz/16 bit or
48kHz/24 bit asynchronous recording in S/P DIF format, or with digital devices that have the
adat format digital recording function.
• When a 24 bit data recorded in the recorder is saved to a 16 bit digital device, Audio 16 bit only
will be saved. Also, when a 20 bit data is saved, Audio 20 bit only will be saved.
• When loading DAT or adat data, if it is 16 bit, even if the current drive of the recorder has be
formatted in 24 bits, only the upper 16 bits will be loaded and the lower 8 bits will be "0."
Likewise, in a 20 bit machine, the upper 20 bits only will be loaded and the lower 4 bits will be
"0."

<Note when saving data using DAT or adat>

Song data can be saved as a real track, additional track or ALL data. Please note the following points
when saving song data using a DAT or adat device.
The save time of the data depends on the time of the song data (ABS 0-REC END) on the real track.
Therefore, if you attempt to save data that exists on an additional track that is longer than the data
on the real track, the data on the additional track will only be saved for the same amount of time as
the data on the real track.
Let’s say, you have 10 minutes recorded on the real track and you tentatively move it to the
additional track (track exchange function). Then you save a real track by leaving that moved
portion blank, which leaves you with only 3 minutes of recording on the track. This means only 3
minutes of the data on the additional track will be saved, and the remaining 7 minutes will not be
saved. If you want longer save time, you can edit the save time during save operations (Go to page
"90" <Step-6>).
This can be done by either setting the save time to a longer save time (however, the maximum time
that can be edited is 59 minutes 59 seconds), or move the data with the longest recording time on
the additional track to the real track and then save that data. Be careful not to erase the data that
you need on the additional track when conducting these procedures. For more details on track
exchange go to page "74."

<Notes on using the optional DVD-RAM drive (Model 9046)>

Please use the following disks for the DVD-RAM media to be used in the optional DVD-RAM drive
(Model 9046). You cannot save/load correctly by using any other type disk listed here.

2.6GB/4.7GB/5.2GB/9.4GB
The headphone jack provided in the optional Model 9046 cannot be used. Do not plug in the
headphone.
Installation of Model 9046 must be done by the Fostex Service Department. After purchasing this
unit, please request the nearest Fostex Service Station.

88
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Saving the data using a adat or S/P DIF digital signal

S/P DIF digital signal (or adat digital signal) from the [DATA OUTPUT] connector of the recorder is
saved.
* Restore the initial settings on the recorder.
* Set the same sampling rate on the external digital device and the recorder.

Connecting an external device

Connect [DATA OUTPUT] 1-8 connector of the recorder to the digital input connector on the external digital
device.

<Notes>
• The recorder has [DATA OUTPUT] connectors for an S/P DIF digital signal (OPTICAL) and for an adat digital signal.
These connectors have the same shape but carry different information.
Use the [DATA OUTPUT] 1-8 connector to save data. Do not use the [DATA OUTPUT] 9-16 and 17-24 connectors.
• Save/load by S/P DIF or adat digital signals cannot be executed from the current drive that is formatted in 96kHz/
24 bit or 88.2kHz/24 bit.

adat or DAT

[DATA OUTPUT] 1-8 adat In (or Digital In)

• If the external device has only COAXIAL type (RCA) digital I/O connectors, connect an optional COP-1/96k (optical/
coaxial converter) to use an S/P DIF digital signal.
• Connecting both output and input connectors on the recorder to the input and output connectors on the external
digital device respectively may generate a digital loop.

Setting up an external device

1.Set the same sampling rate to that of the recorder.
2.Select digital input on the external device so that the external device will accept a digital signal.
On some external devices, you may have to set up so that the external device will synchronize with the incoming digital
signal.

<Note>
If the external device does not accept the digital signal or if you notice digital noise, check the connection, cabling, and
the settings of the recorder and the external device.

* Refer to the instruction manuals that came with any external digital device for details.

Executing the save operation

Use the “Save PGM?” menu in Setup mode.

• Output format available : adat, SPDIF, SCSI, IDE2

• Programs available : When using an adat/SPDIF -> P01 - P99 (each program individually)
: When using a SCSI/IDE2 -> P01 - P99 or All program
• Track available : When using an adat or DAT -> Tracks 1-8, 1-16, 1-24, 1-32, 1-40, 1-48,
1-56, 9-16, 9-24, 9-32, 9-40, 9-48, 9-56, 17-24, 17-32, 17-40, 17-48,
17-56, 25-32, 25-40, 25-48, 25-56, 33-40, 33-48, 33-56, 41-48, or 49-56
: When using a SCSI/IDE2 -> All tracks (1-56) will be automatically
selected.

89
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

1.Press the [SETUP] key. 7.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again.

The recorder enters Setup mode. “Save Trk ? 1-24” (“1” is flashing) appears on the display
and you can select tracks to save.
2.Use the Jog dial to select “Save PGM?,” and then
press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The message “Save Device?” and an indication of the 8.Select the desired track range using the Jog dial.
digital signal to be saved (“SPDIF,” “adat,” “SCSI” or You can select 1, 9,17, 25, 33, 41, and 49 of the points
“IDE2” ) will flash on the display. that are flashing(left). Use the Shuttle dial to move the
flashing cursor to the left, then turn the Jog dial to
select 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48 and 56.
SETUP

OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 <Note>
3 3
6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz
Refer to the <Note> on page "88" prior to saving data
18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT including the additional track.
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing
9.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
“Start Recorder !” (Start recording on the recorder)
SETUP
appears on the display, and “SURE?” flashes.
Flashing
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12 SETUP SURE?
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞ OL OL
0 0
BIT 24
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
3.Rotate the Jog dial to select a type of digital signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

("adat" or "SPDIF") format to be used for the save

operation.
Selecting “adat” will save data in the adat digital signal 10. Confirm that the external device is syncing with
format. Selecting “SPDIF” will save data in the S/P DIF the digital input signal, and start recording on the
digital signal format.
external device (DAT or adat).
Setting a START-ID (DAT) or a locate point at the
4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. recording start point will facilitate future loading
Selection of the digital signal format for the save operations.
operation will be confirmed, and the existing Program
numbers will flash on the display.
11. Confirm that the recording on the external device
Flashing has started, and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The save operation starts, and the time required for the
SETUP SURE? save operation appears on the display and a few seconds
later, it will start counting down. This few seconds delay
OL OL
0
3
6
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
is due to the pilot signal which is recorded to mark the
9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz
beginning of the Program to facilitate future load
24 24
30
42
∞
30
42
∞
INT
operation. Therefore, the actual save operation starts
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
when counting down starts. Two tracks are saved each
time in the order of Track 1 and 2, 3 and 4, etc. to a DAT
machine. Eight tracks are saved each time in the order
5.Rotate the Jog dial to select a Program to save. of Track 1-8, 9-16, etc. to an adat machine.
You can select any existing Program (up to 99) to save.

6.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 12. When data is successfully saved a

The length of the time (ABS 0 - REC END) of the program “COMPLETED!” message will appear on the
recording selected appears and the time shown can be display, and stop the external DAT or adat.
edited. The time is usually saved according to the time
displayed, however, it is possible to shorten the time to
13. Press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key to
save at this stage when saving the time. In other words,
though the actual recording may be 9 minutes 00 quit the Setup mode.
seconds, as shown in the example below, that time can The display will return to the previous time base
be edited to 5 minutes when saved. indication.
As mentioned in the <Note> on page 88, if the data on
the additional track is longer the time can be set to a To cancel the operation or restore the indication shown
longer time and saved (however, the maximum time that before you pressed the [EXECUTE/YES] key, press the
can be edited is 59 minutes 59 seconds). [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Pressing one of
these keys repeatedly takes you to the previous layer,
Flashing
finally quitting the Setup mode, and the display will
SETUP
return to the previous time base indication. If you press
M S
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key any time after
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 you execute the save operation but before it is complete,
3 3
6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz
the saved song data will be invalid.
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

90
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Loading the data using a adat or S/P DIF digital signal

Load the data by S/P DIF digital signals (or adat digital signals) from the [DATA INPUT] connector of
the recorder.

* Restore the initial settings on the recorder.

* Set the same sampling rate on the external digital device and the recorder.

Connecting the external device

Connect [DATA INPUT] connectors of the recorder to the digital output connectors on the external digital
device.

<Notes>
• The recorder has [DATA INPUT] connectors for an S/P DIF digital signal (OPTICAL) and for an adat digital signal.
These connectors have the same shape but carry different information.
Use the [DATA INPUT] 1-8 connector. Do not use the [DATA INPUT] 9-16 and 17-24 connectors.
• Do not remove the optical cable or perform any other operation that would disconnect the S/P DIF signal until
the session is complete. Otherwise, the recorder will generate noise, and affect the connected device.

adat or DAT

[DATA INPUT] 1-8 adat Out (or Digital Out)

• If the external device has only COAXIAL type (RCA) digital I/O connectors, connect an optional COP-1/96k (optical/
coaxial converter) to use an S/P DIF digital signal.
• Connecting both output and input connectors on the recorder to the input and output connectors on the external
digital device respectively may generate a digital loop.

Setting up an external device

1.Setup the external device so that it can output a digital signal.
2.Locate the beginning of the pilot signal recorded in the saved data.

* Refer to the instruction manual that came with your external digital device for details.

Executing the load operation

You will use the “Load PGM ?” menu in Setup mode.

• Input format available : adat, SPDIF, SCSI, IDE2

• Programs available : When using an adat/SPDIF -> P01 - P99 (each program individually)
: When using a SCSI/IDE2 -> P01 - P99 or All program
• Track available : When using an adat or DAT-> Tracks 1-8, 1-16, 1-24, 1-32, 1-40, 1-48,
1-56, 9-16, 9-24, 9-32, 9-40, 9-48, 9-56, 17-24, 17-32, 17-40, 17-48, 17-56
25-32, 25-40, 25-48, 25-56, 33-40, 33-48, 33-56, 41-48, or 49-56
: When using a SCSI/IDE2 -> All tracks (1-56) will be automatically
selected.

91
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

1.Press the [SETUP] key. 7.Select the desired track range using the Jog dial.
The recorder will enter the Setup mode. You can select 1, 9, 17, 25, 33, 41 and 49 of the points
that are flashing (left). Use the Shuttle dial to move the
2.Use the Jog dial to select “Load PGM ?,” and then flashing cursor to the left, then turn the Jog dial to select
press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48 and 56.
The message “Load Device?” and the type of digital signal
to be loaded (“SPDIF,” “adat,” “SCSI” or “IDE2”) will flash 8.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. (“SURE?” flashes.)
on the display. "EXT" and "DIGITAL" will light up and "SURE?" will flash
SETUP
in the display.
Flashing
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz SETUP SURE?
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞ OL OL BIT 24
0 0
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 3
DIGITAL 6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24
30
42
∞
30
42
∞
EXT Lit
Flashing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DIGITAL
Lit
SETUP

OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
<Notes>
3
6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
• If digital signal is being input correctly, a “DIGITAL”
12 12
18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT and “EXT” indicator will light up on the display.
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞ If the “DIGITAL” and “EXT” indicator flashes, check
the connection, cabling, and the settings of the
recorder and the external device.
3.Rotate the Jog dial to select the type of digital • The FS indication will flash and warn you if the
signal format ("SPDIF" or "adat") to be used for sampling frequency of the recorder and DAT vary
the load operation. when loading with S/P DIF digital signals. Be careful
Selecting “adat” will load data in the adat digital signal when setting the sampling frequency for adat digital
format. Selecting “SPDIF” will load data in the S/P DIF signals because there will be no FS warning though
digital signal format. there may be a discrepancy.

4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

The digital signal selected is set and the program number 9.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again.
currently set on the load destination current drive “Start Player !” (Start playing the recorder) appears on
flashes. The size of the program recording is also the display.
displayed.
Flashing
Flashing
SETUP SURE?

SETUP SURE?
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
OL OL BIT 24 9 9
0 0 kHz
3 3 12 12
6 6 FS 18 18 CLOCK
24 24
9 9 kHz 30 30
12 12 42 42 EXT
18 18 CLOCK ∞ ∞
24 24 INT
30 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42 42 DIGITAL DIGITAL DIGITAL
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

10. Play the corresponding external device (DAT or

5.Rotate the Jog dial to select a Program into which adat).
to load data. The load operation starts when the recorder accepts the
You can select any existing Program (from up to 99). incoming digital signal. The time required for the load
If you select a Program that already contains data and operation appears on the display and starts counting
execute the load operation, the existing data will be down.
overwritten by the new data. If you do not wish to
Two tracks are loaded at a time from a DAT machine in
overwrite any data in any current Program, use the Jog
the following order: Track 1 and 2, 3 and 4, etc. from a
dial to select “New PGM” to execute the load operation.
DAT machine. Eight tracks are loaded each time in the
You can do this only when the number of existing
order of Track 1-8, 9-16, etc..
Programs is 99 or less and the hard disk has enough
free space to accommodate the new data.
If a program that is already recorded with some sort
11. When the load operation is complete,
of data is selected and loaded, only the song data “COMPLETED!” flashes on the display.
loaded will be valid. All the data of the programs
recorded on that same track up to then will be erased.
12. Press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key to
quit Setup mode.
The display will indicate the time base set for the loaded
6.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. Program.
Now you can select tracks into which to load.
Flashing Flashing Press the [STOP] button or [EXIT/NO] key to return to
one previous menu prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key or
SETUP SURE? if you want to cancel a procedure. Every time you press
OL OL
these keys you will move back one previous hierarchy,
BIT 24
0
3
6
0
3
6 FS
and eventually escape from the SETUP mode and return
9 9
12
18
24
12
18
24
CLOCK
kHz
to the time base display. Note that all the song data
30
42
∞
30
42
∞ saved will be invalid if you press the [STOP] button or
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
[EXIT/NO] key while saving at <Step-10>.

92
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Saving the data using SCSI

This procedure will SAVE/LOAD using a removable SCSI drive disk (zip, MO, DVD-RAM etc.) that is
a backup disk. In save/load using SCSI, the program can be selected separately or in whole.
A backup purpose SCSI disk is generally used after formatted in the backup format, however, a DOS
formatted (computer format) SCSI disk can also be used to SAVE/LOAD in WAV.
Data saved in WAV can be re-loaded and even directly be read by the computer. Therefore, this
kind of data can be used as music software, as well.

Connecting a SCSI device

Refer to the diagram to connect a SCSI device to a D2424LV.

<Notes on connection>
• Before making connections, make sure that both the recorder and the SCSI drive are turned off.
• One SCSI drive may be connected on the recorder.
• The SCSI connector on the recorder is a half pitch 50-pin connector compatible with Macintosh computers.
Use a cable with connectors that conform to the standards for connecting a SCSI drive.
• The SCSI drive should be terminated. Install a SCSI terminator, or turn the termination switch to “on” if the
drive has a termination switch (like a zip drive).
• You must format the SCSI disk after you connect it to the recorder. Refer to the “Formatting” section on the
next page for the formatting procedure.

D2424LV

SCSI terminator

Removable
SCSI drive

[SCSI] connector
(Half-pitch 50-pin)

SCSI cable

<CAUTION>
In using a removable disk for backup purpose, be sure Write Protect is disabled. Please note that it
cannot be used in the Write Protect mode.

93
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Formatting a SCSI disk

An unformatted disk or a disk used with the computer can also be used. Check to see that the data on the disk
is no longer necessary prior to formatting a disk that was previously used with the computer. Once formatting
is started it cannot be stopped. The formatting process will erase all data. Be especially careful not to erase
the data that you still need. The prerequisite here is that a removable disk is used.

1.Connect the SCSI device to the recorder and turn

The backup format quantization display:
the power on to the both machines.
In the initial setup, the backup format quantization that
is displayed in the previous procedure will always be
2.If you are using a removable disk, insert the disk
of the same figure as that of the current drive
into the drive. quantization.
This is due to the fact that save is not possible unless
3.Press the [SETUP] key to enter the Setup mode. quantization is same for both the current drive and
the backup drive.
4.Turn the Jog dial to select “Disk Format?” (“?” In other words, when using a current drive formatted
flashes), and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. in 44.1 or 48kHz/24 bit, "24 bit Backup?" will always be
“IDE1” flashes appears. displayed.

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
7.Press and hold down the [RECORD] button and
0 0
3
6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz
press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT “REMAIN” lights up and formatting starts.
42
As the formatting operation progresses, the size of the
42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
area to be formatted on the disk will count down on the
Flashing display.
When formatting is complete, “COMPLETED!” will
SETUP
appears.

OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 8.Press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button to
6 6 FS
9
12
18
24
9
12
18
24
CLOCK
kHz
quit the SETUP mode.
INT
30
42
∞
30
42
∞
The recorder returns to the ABS display of the Program
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
that was selected before it entered Setup mode.

<CAUTION> Your backup purpose SCSI disk has been formatted

If format is executed while “IDE1” is flashing, the after completing the steps up to this point.
internal IDE hard disk will be formatted and data in
The SCSI disk is now ready to SAVE/LOAD.
the IDE hard disk will be lost.
To continuously format another disk, remove the
disk from the SCSI drive and then repeat the same
5.Rotate the Jog dial to display the flashing “SCSI*” procedures.
and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The ID number and name of the connected SCSI device Press the eject switch on the SCSI drive to remove
appear on the display, and “?” and “SURE?” flash. the disk from the SCSI drive.
Flashing Flashing

SETUP SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

6.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

The “24bit Backup ?” (“?” flashing) message appears
and “SURE?” flashes.
This indicates that you are in the stand-by mode to
format the backup purpose SCSI hard disk in the “24 bit
Backup Format”. Quantization figure identical to the
current drive will be displayed.
Flashing Flashing

SETUP SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

94
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Saving data of an individual Program

When saving with a SCSI disk it is possible to save each program or all programs.

• Output format available : adat, SPDIF, SCSI, IDE2

• Programs available : When using an adat/SPDIF -> P01 - P99 (each program individually)
: When using a SCSI/IDE2 -> P01 - P99 or All program
• Track available : When using an adat or DAT-> Tracks 1-8, 1-16, 1-24, 1-32, 1-40, 1-48
1-56, 9-16, 9-24, 9-32, 9-40, 9-48, 9-56, 17-24, 17-32, 17-40, 17-48,
17-56, 25-32, 25-40, 25-48, 25-56, 33-40, 33-48, 33-56, 41-48 or 49-56
: When using a SCSI/IDE2 -> All tracks (1-56) will be automatically
selected.

1.Press the [SETUP] key.

The recorder will enter the SETUP mode.
• If you have selected each Program that requires only
one disk to save:
2.Use the Jog dial to select “Save PGM?” (“?” will
Flashing
flash.), and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The indication of the type of digital signal to be saved SETUP SURE?

will flash on the display.

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
SETUP 12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
OL OL BIT 24
0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• If you have selected all Programs:

Flashing
Flashing

SETUP
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24 OL OL
0 0 0 0
BIT 24
3 3 3 3
6 6 FS 6 6 FS
9 9 kHz 9 9
12 12 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT 24 24 INT
30 30 30 30
42 42 42 42
∞ ∞ ∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

If all programs can be saved in one disk, same

3.Rotate the Jog dial to select a flashing “SCSI *,”
numbers such as 03/03 will be shown in (**/**).
and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. (“SURE?” However, if it displays, for example 02/04, it means
flashes.) only 2 from among the 4 programs can be saved in
It will change to the display for selecting the backup the backup disk.
mode ("FDMS3" or "WAVE").
In the example here, "FDMS3" is flashing.
• If you have selected each Program that requires
Flashing multiple disks:
The following indication, for example, appears.
("****" is the tentative title, the program number
SETUP

OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
flashes, the information on the size of the program
3
6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
and number of disks necessary, alternate.)
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24
30
42
∞
30
42
∞
INT
This display indicates that one SCSI hard disk is
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
not enough to save the program chosen, and that
several disks are necessary to proceed with the save
procedure. In the following example you see a “2D”
4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. indication as the number of disks necessary.
This indicates that 2 disks are necessary to execute
It will change to the display for selecting the program to
the save procedure.
be saved.
At this point, when the Jog dial is rotated, in addition Flashing
to separate programs, "Save All (**/**)?" can be selected.
SETUP SURE?

When "Save All (**/**)?" is selected, all the programs can OL OL BIT 24
0 0

be saved (Read explanation in following). 3

6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
12 12

Depending on the selected program, the display will be 18

24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT

∞ ∞
as follows. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

95
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

5. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 6.Press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key to
The recorder performs the save operation differently quit the Setup mode.
depending on the selected Program.
<Note>
• When selecting a program that can be saved on one You cannot interrupt the save operations on the SCSI
backup disk: hard disk, as with adat or S/P DIF digital signal.
The backup disk will indicate that a new program is You will have to start the save process from the very
going to be created (backup disk shows B01). first disk again, if you erroneously press the [EXIT/NO]
key during the insertion of several disks required to
Flashing
save the program on.
SETUP SURE?

Press the eject switch on the SCSI drive to remove the

OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
disk from the SCSI drive after the program has been
9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz
successfully saved.
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

<Please remember this!>

Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key will start save The instructions on the left was based on use of disks
operations and then the following indication will appear. that were already formatted for backup use, when
This indicates that the song data of the current drive saving programs using several disks.
selected is being saved on the B01 backup disk. It is recommended that all the disks to save data on are
The disk space necessary to save the data is counted already formatted prior to the save process. However,
down while the data is being saved. there may be times that you will unexpectedly not have
SETUP
enough formatted disks during the save process thus,
forcing you to use an “unformatted disk” or a “used disk”
OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 that already has other data saved on it. Observe the
FS
respective procedures described when inserting the disk
6 6
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT
according to the "Insert Disk 2" or "Insert Disk 3" message
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
that prompts you to “Insert another disk!” as shown in
the instructions on the left.
When the data is saved, the system goes to the program
• When inserting an unformatted disk
time base indication prior to going to the SETUP mode,
The recorder automatically recognizes an
then “COMPLETED!” lights up.
“Unformatted” disk, and will indicate "Unformat!", then
automatically go to the "Disk Format?" menu in the
• When selecting a "Save All ? (**/**):
SETUP mode, to format the backup disk.
The display will change for selecting the program to
Follow the formatting procedures to actually format
start the save. When the Jog dial is rotated, 01 through
the backup disk. The save process automatically
the last program number can be selected.
resumes when the disk is successfully formatted.
Flashing

SETUP
• When inserting a disk that is saved or loaded with
other data
OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24
FS
The following display may appear as an example,
6 6
9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz
when inserting such type of disk. This prompt is
24 24
asking you whether you want to erase the existing
INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
data saved on the disk that was inserted, and
indicates that you have entered the "Delete PGM?"
If it is executed with 01 displayed, all programs will be menu in the SETUP mode.
saved. If another number is selected, from the selected
number to the last can be saved. If the [EXECUTE/YES] If it is okay to erase that disk, press the [EXECUTE/
key is pressed after selecting the starting program, the YES] key. The "Delete ALL PGM?" message will appear.
save will start and at the instant it is finished, Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key to delete all programs.
"COMPLETED!" will light up. Save is automatically resumed after the programs are
deleted. If it is not okay to erase the disk, turn the
• When selecting a program to save that requires Jog dial to select "Eject" when the above indication
several disks: appears to eject the disk. Press the [EXECUTE/YES]
Save will immediately start if the [EXECUTE/YES] key key after "Eject" is selected.
is pressed. The save process appears as in the above When the disk is ejected, then a prompt to "Insert
case. When the first disk is full, that disk is ejected Disk" will appear on the display. Insert another disk.
and the display will indicate “Insert second disk !”.
• When inserting a disk that was used as the current
SETUP
drive
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 "Wrong Disk" will briefly appear, the "Disk Format?"
menu of the SETUP mode will appear for backup
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18
24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT formatting, then the following indication will appear.
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

If it is okay to proceed formatting, then execute the

Save is automatically resumed when the second disk is formatting process as done in the above case. If it is
inserted in the SCSI drive. The same process is repeated not okay to proceed formatting, then turn the Jog dial
when a third, or more disks are required. to select "Eject" to eject the disk.
When the program is successfully saved on the last disk, The save operations can automatically be resumed in
the program time base indication (ABS 0) that was such manner when the disk is formatted as a backup
started up prior to entering the SETUP mode appears disk or when a program is deleted.
and “COMPLETED!” lights up.

96
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

<Notes on saving all programs in several disks>

In the previous procedure, when the left and right numbers were different such as "(05/08)" in the "(**/**)" display of
"Save All (**/**)," it could not be saved in one disk, and indicated that a multiple number of disks were required.
For example, if save was executed while "Save All (05/08)" was displayed, programs 1-5 could be saved in the first disk
but programs beyond 6 had to be saved in another disk.
In this case, if save is continued in the second disk, the same B01 (backup number 01) for the first disk will be
attached and saved. In other words, if "All Save" is executed in a multiple number of disks, backup number "B01" will
be attached to all of the backup disks. For this reason, on the disk after it has been saved, it is recommended to clearly
indicate what program is stored in it.

Loading the data using SCSI

Here you are loading on the current drive, the data of each program saved on the backup purpose
SCSI disk. The prerequisite is that a backup SCSI drive is connected to the recorder.

Load the data saved on one removable disk.

Load the program with the “Load PGM?” menu in the SETUP mode.

• Input format available : adat, SPDIF, SCSI, IDE2

• Programs available : When using an adat/SPDIF -> P01 - P99 (each program individually)
: When using a SCSI/IDE2 -> P01 - P99 or All program
• Track available : When using an adat or DAT-> Tracks 1-8, 1-16, 1-24, 1-32, 1-40, 1-48,
1-56, 9-16, 9-24, 9-32, 9-40, 9-48, 9-56, 17-24, 17-32, 17-40, 17-48, 17-56
25-32, 25-40, 25-48, 25-56, 33-40, 33-48, 33-56, 41-48, or 49-56
: When using a SCSI/IDE2 -> All tracks (1-56) will be automatically
selected.

1.Press the [SETUP] key. 4. Select the backup number and press the
The recorder will enter the SETUP mode.
[EXECUTE/YES] key.
It will change to the display for setup of a new program
2.Use the Jog dial to select “Load PGM?,” and press in the current drive.
the [EXECUTE/YES] key. Flashing Flashing
An indication of the type of the digital signal to be loaded
will flash on the display. SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
SETUP 0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
OL OL BIT 24 24 24
0 0 INT
30 30
3 3 42 42
6 6 FS ∞ ∞
9 9 kHz
12 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
DIGITAL
Turning the Jog dial in this state makes it possible to
select another program, other than the above, on the
Flashing
current drive. The size of the program appears when
the program is selected.
SETUP

OL OL
If you select a program that is already recorded with
BIT 24
0
3
6
0
3
6 FS data and load is executed for the load destination, the
9 9

existing data is deleted while loading takes place.

kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 If you do not want to overwrite the existing data, select
“New PGM” mentioned above, prior to loading.

3. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key while "SCSI *" is 5.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
flashing. Song data will be loaded to the selected Program.
It will change to the display for selecting the backup If, for example, backup 1 is started for Program 1, then
number saved in the backup disk. “B01 >> P01 ***MB” will appear, “REMAIN” lights up, load
proceeds, and “***MB (program size)” is counted down,
Flashing
when individual programs are loaded.
SETUP
When the load operation is complete, “COMPLETED!”
OL OL BIT 24
will light and the recorder will display the Time Base
0 0
3
6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
that was shown before the unit entered the Setup mode.
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞
6.Press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key.
“COMPLETED!” will turn off.
When the Jog dial is rotated, in addition to each backup
number, "Load All?" can be selected. <Note>
All programs can be loaded when "Load All? (**/**)" is You cannot abort a load operation on a SCSI device
selected.
while it is in progress.

97
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Loading data saved on several removable disks

As an example here, we will load the data of a Program saved onto two removable disks.

1.Insert the first disk (Disk-1) into the SCSI device. 5.Insert Disk 2 (second disk) into the SCSI hard disk
drive according to what the display requests.
<Note> Loading automatically resumes when Disk 2 is inserted.
Make sure that you insert the disks in the correct
order. If you insert the wrong disk, the recorder The display will show the same count down as shown
displays "Wrong disk" -> "Illegal No!" and ejects the for Disk 1. The size of the program is counted down
disk. Follow the disk markings you made during the along with the load process.
save operation.
When all data is loaded, “COMPLETED!” lights up, and
the program time base (ABS 0) started up prior to going
2.Follow Steps 1-3 of the “Loading Song data” into the SETUP mode will appear.
procedure.
The display flashes the number of the existing Backup
data in the SCSI disk, and then indicates that the first
<Note>
disk has been inserted. You cannot abort a load operation on a SCSI device
while it is in progress.
Flashing

SETUP

OL OL
6.Press the [EXIT/NO] key, or [STOP] button.
BIT 24
0
3
6
0
3
6 FS The “COMPLETED!” go off.
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Rotating the Jog dial will toggle between “B**” and “Eject.”
If you wish to cancel the load operation and remove the
disk, select “Eject” and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

3.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

A prompt inquiring whether to set a new program on
the current drive which is the load destination will
appear. ("New PGM" appears and "SURE?" flashes.)

Flashing Flashing

SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Turning the Jog dial in this state makes it possible to

select a program on the current drive. The size of the
program appears when the program is selected.

If you select a program that is already recorded with

data and load is executed for the load destination, the
existing data is deleted while loading takes place.

If you do not want to overwrite the existing data, select

“New PGM” mentioned above, prior to loading.

4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key after selecting the

program.
Loading is started and the display will show “B** >> P**
***MB”. This indicates that the backup data (B**) on
the SCSI hard disk is being loaded on the current drive
program (P**).
The “***MB” (load size) is counted down as loading
proceeds.

When Disk 1 loading is completed, an “Insert Disk 2”

message appears, and Disk 1 is automatically ejected.

98
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Saving and Loading with IDE2 (E-IDE Hard disk/DVD-RAM)

It is possible to setup an optional Model 9044 (Bay and Caddy) to mount an E-IDE hard disk (IDE2), or optional
DVD-RAM drive (Model 9046) for backup purposes.
With this setup it becomes possible to save/load files in WAV (RIFF WAVE file format, hereafter WAV) described
later, or save/load in FDMS-3 V3.0 (Fostex Disk Management System-3) format described earlier.

<Precautions>
• This model can only save/load in IDE2 (E-IDE or DVD-RAM) FDMS-3 Ver3.0 format. When using
an IDE2 to save/load WAV files, priority format it in FAT16 DOS on another PC.
• Our Service Division will assemble optional Model 9044 or Model 9046. For installation, please
contact the Fostex distributor in your territory.
• Note that the optional Model 9046 (DVD-RAM drive) only provides limited space on the disk,
when using it as a backup drive. For more details refer to page 88 “Precautions When Using a
DVD-RAM Drive”.

Saving in FDMS-3 Ver3.0 Mode

Here we will save files in FDMS-3 Mode on a backup 4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key while “FDMS 3” is
E-IDE hard disk (or optional DVD-RAM). flashing.
Go to the “Save PGM?” menu in the SETUP mode, to A menu appears so you can select the program that
save S/P DIF and adat digital signals, described you want to save. The currently selected program
earlier, in the same manner as saving on SCSI devices. number flashes. The size of the program also appears.
Turn the Jog dial in this state to select individual
programs or select “Save All” (**/**)”.
1. Press the [SETUP] key when the equipment is stopped. Flashing
Go to the SETUP mode.
SETUP SURE?

2. Turn the Jog dial to select “SavePGM?” (“?” flashing). OL

0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
9 9 kHz
Then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 12
18
24
30
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
42 42
The menu to select the device to save the program on ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞

appears. “SCSI” flashes in the default mode.

Flashing or
SETUP

SETUP
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
OL OL BIT 24
9 9 kHz 0 0
12 12 3 3
18 18 CLOCK 6 6 FS
24 24 INT 9 9
30 30 kHz
12 12
42 42 18 18 CLOCK
∞ ∞ 24 24 INT
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing
Use an optional DVD-RAM as a device to save your
SETUP
programs on. A menu appears when you select programs
OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 that can be saved on one DVD disk. If you select too
FS
many programs and all those programs cannot be saved
6 6
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24
on one disk, then the number of disks required to save
INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
all those programs and the program size alternately
appears on the LCD.
Flashing
3. Turn the Jog dial to “IDE2” so that it flashes.
Then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. SETUP SURE?

Find “IDE2” + “Device Name”. The backup mode selection OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3

menu appears. “FDMS3” flashes in the default mode. 6 6 FS

9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞

Flashing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

SETUP

OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 5. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key to select the program
6 6 FS
9
12
18
24
9
12
18
24
CLOCK
kHz
that you want to save.
INT

If you select individual programs, the menu to select

30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
programs from the backup disk appears.
In the default mode “New PGM” appears so you can
create a new program on the backup disk.

99
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Flashing If, for example, you choose 01 as illustrated in the case

above, you can save all programs. If you select 03 you
SETUP SURE?
can save the programs from program 03 to the last
OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 program.
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK

6. Select either “New PGM” or an existing program

24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
number. Then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The save process starts. The REMAIN counter (size to
If you create a new program and you go to the save save) starts counting down. (The following is an example
menu, a “p01” indication appears if nothing is saved on of saving data to backup number “p01”.)
the disk. The program number flashes if there is data
already saved on the disk. SETUP

If data is saved on a backup disk, you can turn the Jog OL

0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24
FS
6 6

dial to select existing program numbers, in addition to 9

12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz

24 24 INT
“New PGM”, or even select “Eject”. 30
42
∞
30
42
∞

Select and save an existing program. The current data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

saved will be erased and overwritten with the new data

being saved. ALWAYS select “New PGM” if you do not When the data is saved “COMPLETED!” lights up on the
want to overwrite (erase) any existing data. display. Then the system escapes from the SETUP mode.
Select “Eject” to eject the disk then press the [EXECUTE/ If you are saving data on more than one DVD-RAM disk,
YES] key. the first disk is ejected when data is saved on it, then a
The menu to select the program range appears by message prompting “Set Second Disk” appears on the
selecting “Save All? (**/**)”. LCD.
Follow the instructions and set the next disk in the DVD-
Flashing
RAM drive. The data is automatically saved on the
SETUP
second disk.
SETUP
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz OL OL
12 12 0 0
BIT 24
18 18 CLOCK 3 3
24 24 INT 6 6 FS
30 30 9 9
42 42 kHz
∞ ∞ 12 12
18 18 CLOCK
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

“Save All” refers to saving all programs from the very

first program to the very last program.
By turning the Jog dial at this time, you can select 7. When all the data that you want to save are saved, press
program number 01, 02... all the way up to the current the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] button) to turn off the
program number. “COMPLETED!” message.

Loading in the FDMS-3 Mode

Load the data that you saved on you backup E-IDE “IDE2” + “Device Name” appears. Then the menu to
hard disk (or optional DVD-RAM). select the program to load appears.
Data is loaded from the “Load PGM?” menu in the
Flashing
SETUP mode as in the case when S/P DIF and adat
digital signals were loaded or when loading data on SETUP

SCSI devices. OL OL BIT 24

0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12

1. Press the [SETUP] key while in the initial menu, to go 18

24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT

∞ ∞
to the SETUP mode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

2. Turn the Jog dial to select “Load PGM?” (“?” flashes).

You can select the “Load All (**/**)” choice in addition to
Then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
individual backup programs by turning the Jog dial at
The menu to select the loading device appears.
this stage. “Load All (**/**)” refers to loading all programs
“SCSI” is the default setting and the indication flashes.
that are saved.
SETUP You can set the program range to load, as in the case
with “Save” mentioned earlier, by executing the “Load
OL OL
0
3
6
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
All (**/**)” feature.
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
24
30
42
INT
The following display appears if you select “Load All (**/
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
DIGITAL **)”, then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. Now you can
set the range of the program to load (you can load the
Flashing programs in the similar way as the programs were
“Saved”, as described earlier.)
SETUP

OL OL
Flashing
0 0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK SETUP
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞

3. Turn the Jog dial to select “IDE2”. Now “IDE2” is 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

flashing. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

100
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

4. Select the program to load with the Jog dial. 5. Select the load destination program. Then press the
Then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The menu to select the load destination (current drive) Start loading to the load destination program that you
program appears. selected.
Then “New PGM” appears so you can create a new “COMPLETED!” lights up after successfully loading, and
program in the default setting. the mode escapes from the SETUP mode.
Flashing Flashing SETUP

SURE? OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
OL OL BIT 24 18 18 CLOCK
0 0 24 24 INT
3 3 30 30
6 6 FS 42 42
9 9 kHz ∞ ∞
12 12
18 18 CLOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] button) to turn OFF

If the current program is selected as the load the “COMPLETED!” message.
destination, then “dEL” appears, which refers to deleting
that program. This means the current data will be
overwritten when loaded.

SAVE/LOAD by “WAV” file

In addition to save/load by the aforementioned FDMS-3 (Fostex Disk Management System-3), save/
load to a DOS formatted disc by using WAV (RIFF WAVE file format, hereafter called WAV) file is
possible. In the same way as the aforementioned “Save/Load by FDMS-3,” it is possible not only to
save data from this recorder but also to read data by this recorder; because data in WAV file is
saved to the backup disk, the computer can read/write it directly and therefore, playback/editing
the WAV file using various software is possible. Additionally, WAV files edited with a computer can
be read by this recorder.

< Notes when using a WAV file >

THE BACKUP DISK:
• Save/load by WAV file is possible only to disks formatted in DOS FAT 16.
This recorder will execute save/load by WAV file only when this DOS disk is acknowledged by DOS FAT 16.
Disks DOS formatted in FAT 32 will not be acknowledged.
• DOS formatting using the SETUP mode “Disk Format?” menu is not possible.
Consequently, backup disks to be used for WAV file must be formatted in FAT 16 before being used.
If a disk of more than 2GB is formatted in FAT 16, the disk will be partitioned to a maximum 2GB capacity.
In this case, this recorder will acknowledge the first partition only; the other partitions will not be acknowledged.
As a result, the maximum capacity for the backup disk used by this recorder will always be 2GB for one disk drive.
At save/load by WAV file, it is recommended to use a newly formatted disk to prevent loss of data due to overwriting.

DIRECTORY OF THE BACKUP DISK:

• The saved WAV file will be recorded in the root directory (first level) of the backup disk.
• WAV files that can be loaded must be placed in the root directory of the backup disk.
WAV files that have been moved from the root directory to another location such as a different folder, cannot be
acknowledged by this recorder and could cause a malfunction.

FILE NAME OF THE “WAV” FILE:

• WAV files saved by this recorder will be recorded under the file name of “******##.WAV.”
• WAV files which can be loaded by this recorder must have a file name of “******##.WAV.”
The first 6 letters “******” will be the title displayed by “Title Edit?” in the SETUP mode.
These 6 letters can be changed at save of the WAV file and also edited by the computer.
The latter 2 letters “##” represent each track number (1-56) at save/load of the WAV file.
The last “WAV” is the extension to indicate that this file is a WAV file. File names other than those described here will
not be acknowledged by this recorder. For details, refer to each procedure.
Using these specifications, WAV files can be loaded in any single track or tracks exchanged and loaded in the WAV
file. Refer to “Loading of WAV files” in later pages.

101
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Saving of “WAV” files

A WAV file is saved by the following procedure. Before proceeding to save, make sure a DOS
formatted disk in FAT 16 is set in the SCSI equipment. The following explains the procedures for
using a backup disk after it had been formatted.
The E-IDE hard disk (or optional DVD-RAM drive) for backup can be used by the same procedures
at saving in the DOS formatted disk.

1.The SETUP mode is entered by pressing the 5.Select "OFF" and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
[SETUP] key. The display will change to selecting the program for
saving.
2.Select “Save PGM?” (“?” flashes) with the Jog dial Flashing
and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. SETUP SURE?

The currently setup content will flash in the display.

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
Flashing 6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
SETUP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12
18
24
30
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
6.Select the desired program with the Jog dial and
42 42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞
press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The display will change to selecting the track to be saved.
In the initial state, "All Trk" will flashes.
3.Select the flashing “SCSI *” with the Jog dial and Flashing
press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. (Select "IDE2" SETUP

when saving in the E-IDE hard disk or optional

OL OL

DVD-RAM disk.) 0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
BIT 24
FS
kHz

After displaying "drive name", the display will change to

12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30

"Bkup Mode?" for selecting the backup mode ("WAVE" 42

∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞

will flashes).

Flashing If the Jog dial is rotated at this stage, in addition to

"All Trk" (flashing), "01 01" (flashing)-"56 56" (flashing)
SETUP
can be selected. This function is used when specifying
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
any desired track and saving it.
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12
18
24
12
18
24
CLOCK Flashing
INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3

4.Select the backup mode "WAVE" with the Jog dial 6

9
12
18
6
9
12
18 CLOCK
FS
kHz

24 24 INT
and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 30
42
∞
30
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
The display will change to "CB Export? OFF" ("OFF"
flashes) and ON-OFF of the clip board export can be
setup. For example, if tracks 5-24 must be saved, "05 05" is
Flashing selected. Then proceed to the following.

SETUP

OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
7.After selecting the track, press the [EXECUTE/YES]
9 9
12
18
24
30
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
kHz
key.
If "All Trk" or any desired track was selected, the display
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

will change to the following.

When "All Trk" is selected:
Normally, when saving ABS 0-REC END data, proceed to
the next step while the setup is OFF. The display will change to making a new WAV file on
But, under the following condition, save is executed with the disk and "SURE?" will flashes.
the setup ON. Flashing

SETUP SURE?

< Please remember! > OL OL BIT 24

0 0

When clip board export is set to ON, save is to be 3

6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
12 12

executed only on data within a desired range. 18

24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
42 42
In such a case, the desired range must be registered by ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞

the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT points previous

to executing save. For explanation on registering of
CLIPBOARD IN/OUT points, refer to "Registering of the When the Jog dial is rotated, "Eject" can be selected.
locate point (=editing point)" on page 51. To eject the disk, select "Eject" and press the [EXECUTE/
YES] key.

102
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

If "05-05" is selected:
The Flashing "05 05" will change to flashing only of the “WAV” FILE WHICH WAS SAVED
right "05". Flashing
• Composition of WAV file
SETUP A WAV file on the backup disk is made, one file to one
track in the root directory, for a total of 24 files. File
OL OL
names will be from “******01.WAV” to “******24.WAV.”
0 0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9
12
18
24
12
18
24
CLOCK
INT
kHz
“******” is the file name specified in above and numbers
0124 correspond to each track.
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
An unrecorded track will be made as one file for “Data
number zero.”
The last track can be selected. After setting to "05 24"
by rotating the Jog dial and pressing the [EXECUTE/YES]
key, the display will change the same as the previous
"WAV [#0001] New PGM". Numbers that can be selected
for the right two digits must be greater than the left two
digits (In this example, either of "05 24").
This means that if the track was specified as "05 05", ###### 01.WAV ###### 02.WAV ###### 24.WAV

track 5 only will be saved.

• Composition of WAV file on multiple discs
8.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. WAV files are saved in order from track 1 through
The display will change for entering the file name for track 24. When saving on a multiple number of backup
the WAV file. disks, remaining space is constantly calculated
automatically and should the capacity on the track
Flashing for saving the next WAV file be insufficient, the disk is
exchanged with the next one.
SETUP

OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
• Capacity of the WAV file
After saving a WAV file, in some cases the capacity
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT will increase compared to the current drive capacity.
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
For example, depending on the status of the recording
such as record starting time and ending time or size
If the Jog dial is rotated at the flashing point, any of the recorded and unrecorded length, in some cases
desired number/symbol/alphabet can be input. capacity will increase. For example, in the case of a
The flashing point can be moved with the Shuttle dial. track, which is recorded from ABS:0 minute to ABS:1
Characters which can be input are limited to the minute, and from ABS:10 minutes to ABS:11 minutes,
following: in the current drive it will be “2 minutes” file but in
the WAV file, it will be a file of “11 minutes.”
Alphabet capitals (A-Z)
Numbers (0-9) Also on the unrecorded track, capacity will increase
Symbols (!, #, $, %, &, ', (, ), @, ^, _, -) as a “data zero” and a WAV file (small capacity) will
be made.

Although up to 6 letters can be input for the file name,

some of the letters/symbols/alphabets input here will
be converted as follows.

Alphabet capitals (A-Z) -> No conversion • When using a backup disc in which a program
Alphabet small letters -> (a-z) Converted to capitals
Numerals (0-9) -> No conversion
is already saved.
If a program is already saved in the backup disk, depending
Symbols -> No conversion
on the remaining capacity, the following selectable item
Other symbols -> Under bar is converted to “_” may be added to the Step 6 Save Method.
These can be selected by rotating the Jog dial.
9.After inputting a file name, press the [EXECUTE/
YES] key. "Title" & "Eject" display
Save will be executed and the following displayed. The present disk must be removed and return to Step 5.
During save, the capacity display will continue to count This is selected when another disc is to be used.
down. For a case where a multiple number of disks are
required, disks will automatically eject and the next disk "Title" & "New PGM" display
must be loaded. There is enough remaining capacity to make a new WAV
At completion of save, the display returns to the original file in addition to a WAV file on the disk. Press the
time base and "COMPLETED!" will light. [EXECUTE/YES] key and proceed to Step 7. When saved
to the disk, this WAV file will be additionally recorded.
<Note> Alternate display of "Title" & "New PGM" and
If you attempt to save a WAV file with the same name
"-###MB"
as an existing WAV file on the backup disk, "Already
Exist" (The same file already exists) will be displayed Disk capacity is short by the amount of “-###” to be able
and save cannot be executed. For details, refer to the to add a new WAV file. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key
later “Using a backup disk in which a program is already and after display of "Disk Full", "Delete All WAV?" is
saved.” displayed, then, press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again, and
it will go to Step 7 for deleting all WAV files on the backup
disk. After save, only saved WAV files will be recorded.
10. Press the [EXIT/NO] key or [STOP] button.
"COMPLETED!" is extinguished.

103
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

"Title" & "###MB" display:

< Notes>
In this instance, the selected WAV file on the backup
disk is deleted and there is now enough capacity to make • If you attempt to save a WAV file with the same file
a WAV file. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key and "DEL" name as one already existing on the backup disk,
(delete of WAV file) will be displayed, and when "Already Exist" (Same file name already exists) is
[EXECUTE/YES] key is pressed again, it will go to Step 7 displayed and save will not be executed. In this case,
for deleting the selected WAV file on the backup disk. change the WAV file name by the previous Step 7.
After save, the selected WAV file will be replaced as the • In a disk which had been repeatedly saved by
new file and recorded on the disk. overwriting, access speed could be lowered due to
file fragmentation. We recommend that you use a
"Title" & "-###MB" display: disk immediately after formatting for backup
The disk is short of capacity by the amount of “-###” to purposes.
be able to make a WAV file although the selected WAV
file on the backup disk is deleted. If the [EXECUTE/YES] • In a save requiring a multiple number of backup disks,
key is pressed, after display of "Disk Full", "Delete All if the backup disc already saved with programs is
WAV?" is displayed, and when the [EXECUTE/YES] key is used, "Delete All WAV?" (Delete of all WAV files) will
pressed again, it will go to Step 7 for deleting all WAV be displayed due to "Disk Full" and all WAV files will
files on the backup disk. After save, only saved WAV be deleted. For save on multiple number of disks, we
files will be recorded. recommend that you use a disk immediately after
formatting.

• When files and folders other than file names

“******##.WAV” which can be acknowledged by this
recorder are made on the backup disk by using a
computer, in some cases save cannot be completed
as it cannot calculate the accurate remaining capacity
of the backup disk. Great care should be taken when
changing file names and making folders by a
computer.

Loading WAV files

WAV files will be loaded. Prior to this, make sure the backup disk is connected to the SCSI equipment.
The following explains how to use a backup disk in which WAV files were saved by this unit.
Loading from the E-IDE hard disk for backup (or the optional DVD-RAM drive) is possible by the
same procedure.

1.Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the [SETUP] key. 4.Select the WAV file to be loaded with the Jog dial.
If a multiple number of WAV files with different file
2.Select “Load PGM?” (“?” flashes) with the Jog dial names (Beginning 6 letters) have been saved, the WAV
and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. file names (beginning 6 letters) and capacity will be
The currently set content will be displayed (flashing). sequentially displayed. If "Eject" is selected, the backup
disc can be removed.
Flashing
<Note>
SETUP
File names other than “ ******##.WAV ” cannot be
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 acknowledged nor loaded by this recorder. WAV files
3 3
6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz with the beginning 6 letters of the file name will be
18
24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT individually acknowledged and can be selected.
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

5.Select WAV file, then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

The display will change to selecting the track to be
3.Select the flashing “SCSI *” (or "IDE2") with the loaded. "All Trk" will flashes.
Jog dial and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. If the Jog dial is rotated at this stage, "01-56" (mono
After display of "Drive name" and "DOS format", the tracks) can also be selected in addition to "All Trk".
WAV file name and its capacity is displayed and "SURE?"
Flashing
will flash at the same time.
“No SCSI Disk!” will be displayed if no disk is loaded. SETUP

Flashing OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
SETUP SURE? 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
OL OL BIT 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30
42
∞
30
42
∞
Select the mono track (01-56) then press the [EXECUTE/
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
YES] key. A menu appears to select the load destination
track.

104
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

Flashing
<Notes>
SETUP
• If there is insufficient capacity in the current drive
OL OL BIT 24
to load a WAV file, the capacity will be indicated in
0 0
3
6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
minus as "-###".
12 12
18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT In such a case, select a program of a the right size or
delete an unnecessary program by using the SETUP
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

mode “Delete PGM##.”

Turn the Jog dial in this state to select the load • The title of the loaded program will be replaced by
destination track (01-56 are selectable with the above the WAV file name (beginning 6 letters) which is
example). loaded.
If, for example, you select “01>05”, it means Track 1
that is saved will be loaded to Track 5 that is specified
as the load destination.
8.Press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button.
Flashing
"COMPLETED!" will be extinguished.
SETUP Press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button to return
OL OL
to an earlier step or stop.
0 0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

As an example, if the track is setup as shown below,

data in track 1 will be loaded in track 8.
Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

6.Select the track, then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

It will change to the display for compiling a new program
(“New PGM”) in the objective track for loading.
Flashing

SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

When the Jog dial is rotated while in this state, the

program in the objective track for loading can be
selected, and its recording capacity will also be shown.
When loading by selecting an existing program, loading
can be done in parallel with erasing (super scripting)
this existing program.
Flashing

SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

7.After selecting the program to load, press the

[EXECUTE/YES] key.
The following will be displayed during load. As load
progresses, the capacity indication will count down.
Upon completion of the load, the display will return to
the original time base and "COMPLETED!" is displayed.
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

105
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Saving and Loading Song Data)

<< Special loading method when using a computer >>

< Note>
WAV files which can be saved/loaded by this recorder must have file names written as “******##.WAV.”
Other file names cannot be acknowledged by this recorder.
Unknown file names will not be acknowledged and could cause malfunction. Extreme care should be taken when
changing file names and making folders on a computer.

• The first six letters will be the title shown in the SETUP mode “Title Edit?” display.
• The last two letters “##” represent each track number (1-56) of the WAV file which are to be saved/loaded.
• The last “WAV” is the extension which indicate that this is a WAV file.
• File name of the WAV file which is to be saved in the backup disk of this recorder will all be recorded in capital
letters. However, in certain computers, this WAV file name will be displayed in small letters.

(*) Method to load specific tracks.

The backup disk in which files are saved will contain files from “******01.WAV” up to “******56.WAV.”
Should these files be deleted, moved from the root directory, for example, into a another folder or the
file name changed which cannot be acknowledged, this recorder will not recognize this file.
When a backup disk changed in this manner is loaded, only WAV files with file names “******##.WAV”
which are located in an acknowledgeable root directory can be loaded.
For example, if the “zero number of data” made at save is deleted from the backup disk and then load is
executed, only WAV files recorded with any other sound can be loaded.
(*) When loading WAV files saved in a multiple number of disks, they can be loaded by a special method
derived from the above method.
Assume that there is backup disc 1 saved with “******01.WAV” through “******12.WAV” and disc 2 saved
with “******13.WAV” through “******24.WAV.”
First, when backup disk 1 is loaded, files in tracks 1-12 will be loaded. At this point, tracks 13-24 will not
be loaded and thus be non-recorded. Next, when backup disk 2 is loaded, files in tracks 1-12 remains
intact and tracks 13-24 only will be loaded.

......... .........

******01.WAV ******12.WAV ******13.WAV ******24.WAV

Backup Disk 1 Backup Disk 2

(*) Method in loading by changing the track.

If the two letters “##” in file name “******##.WAV” in the backup disk are changed, it will be possible to
load them on this recorder on a track different from that at the initial save. For example, if a WAV file
named “ABCDEF01.WAV” on track 1 is changed to “ABCDEF03.WAV” this WAV file will be loaded on
track 3.

(*) Method in loading by changing the title.

If the 6 letters “******” in file name “******##.WAV” in the backup disk are changed, it will be possible to
load them on this recorder under a title different from that at the first save. Letters which can be used
at changing the file name in a computer are those only indicated below. All of these letters must be one
byte size.

Alphabets : A-Z and a-z

Numerals : 0-9
Symbols : !#$%&’()@‘_=

106
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Changing the Initial Settings (SETUP mode)

The SETUP mode offers the Changing the initial settings menus to configure the operating environment
of the recorder, a “Check” menu that enables you to check the number of events of each track and the
“Execution” menus to execute certain operations such as save/load and disk formatting.
In this chapter we will explain procedures only on <Table-1> “Changing the initial settings” menu (except
setting the internal clock) and <Table-2> “Check” menu. To learn how to set the internal clock, refer to
the “Quick operation guide,” and on the “Execution” menu, the “Reference page” written in <Table-3>.

<Table-1> “Changing the initial settings” menu

Parameters Display Default setting Refer page Community
Setting a time signature Signature Set ? 001bar 4/4 109
Setting a Tempo Tempo Map Set ? 001bar 1 120 111
Setting the metronome function Click ? Off 112
Setting a preroll time Preroll Time ? 00s 113
Setting MIDI sync output signal Midi Sync Out ? MTC 114
Setting an MTC frame rate Frame Rate ? 25 frame 114
Setting an MTC offset value MTC OFFSET 00h 59m 57s 00f 00sf 115
Setting Offset mode Offset Mode ? ABS 116
Setting a reference time code Ref. TC ? Void! Available with option Model 8346 (Refer to APPENDIX)
Setting the slave type Slave Type ? Vari 117
Setting the record protect function Rec Protect ? Off 117
Setting digital input tracks D. in? Analog 118
Setting digital output tracks D. out ? adat 119
Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode Resolution ? Off 120
Setting the MIDI device ID number Device ID ? 00 121
Setting the operating clock Clock Sel ? Int. 122
Setting the SYNC preset Sync Preset ? Available with option Model 8346 (Refer to the APPENDIX)
Setting the Virtual LTC display Virtual LTC ? Available with option Model 8346 (Refer to the APPENDIX)
Setting the chase offset display Offset Disp ? Available with option Model 8346 (Refer to the APPENDIX)
Setting the internal clock Date & Time Set ? Please refer to the “Quick Operation Guide.”
Setting the Auto EE mode Auto EE Mode ? Off 124
Setting the Foot switch function Foot SW ? Punch IO 124
Setting the stop function at the mark point Mark Stop MD ? Off 125
Setting input/output Balance/Unbalance BAL/UNBAL ? UNBAL 126
Setting the display contrast level Contrast ? Level 6 130
Setting the 0 file recording Zero File? Enable 131
Setting the sampling freq. of the PGM Sample Rate? - 39 -
Setting the chain play mode Chain Play? Off 58
Drive setting Drive Sel. ? IDE1 129 -

: Modes applicable program by program. They can be saved/loaded.

: Modes applicable to all programs. They cannot be saved/loaded.

<Table-2> “Check” menu

Check item Display Refer page Community
Check of the Event number on the track NOs Of Event ? 123 -
Check of the current drive status Drive Info ? 127 -

<Table-3> “Execution” menu

Execution item Display Refer page Community
Editing a program title Title Edit PGM** ? 38 -
Deleting a program Delete PGM** ? 37 -
Loading song data Load PGM ? 87 -
Saving song data Save PGM ? 87 -
Optimizing a Disk Disk Optimize ? 34 -
Formatting a Disk Disk Format ? 34 -
Editing a track name Track Name Edit? 76 -
Converting the additional track Add. Trk Convert? 133 -
Setup of the Chain Play List Chain Play List? 58 -

107
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Selecting SETUP menu

Follow the steps below to select the desired SETUP menu in SETUP mode.

1. While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] The title of the SETUP menu appears. You can select a
key on the control panel. different menu via the Jog dial.
Pressing the [SETUP] key causes the recorder to enter
SETUP mode. The recorder displays the first hierarchy SETUP
level of the SETUP menu you selected before you turned
off the power. At this time, the menu graphic appear as OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24

shown below. The flashing menu indicator is the 3

6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
currently-selected menu. Turning the Jog dial will 12
18
24
12
18
24
CLOCK
INT
30 30
select a different menu and the corresponding menu 42
∞
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
indicator will flash.

<Note>
With the factory initial settings, or when you turn on This indicates the position of the SETUP menu.
the power again after you format a current drive disk, Selecting a menu via the Jog dial will move the
“ Signature Set? (Setting a signature)” appears. flashing cursor.
Otherwise, the first hierarchy level of the previously-
selected SETUP menu appears.
2. Select the desired menu using the Jog dial, then
To exit SETUP mode, press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/ press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
NO] key. Each time you press one of these keys, the The recorder displays the second hierarchy level of the
selected SETUP menu, where you can set parameters.
recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the
menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.

Tempo Map Set ? Track Name Edit ? Click ? Midi Sync Out?
MTC Offset ?
Offset Mode?
Delete PGM ? Preroll Time? Frame Rate ?
Signature Set? Title Edit ? Ref. TC ?

Disk Format? Slave Type ?

Add. Trk Convert? Rec Protect ?

Disk Optimize ? D. in ?

Zero File? D. out?

Date & Time Set ?
Resolution?

Save PGM ? Device ID ?

Load PGM? Clock Sel. ?

Drive Sel. ? Auto EE Mode? Sync Preset?

Reserved BAL/UNBAL? Mark Stop MD? Chain Play?
No of Event ?
Drive Info ? Offset Disp ? Virtual LTC ?
Contrast? Reserve Chain Play List? Foot SW ?
Sample Rate?

<Note>
Although titles of the “Ref. TC ?” menu, “Offset Disp ?” menu, “Virtual LTC ?”menu and “Sync Preset ?” menu will also
be displayed, these menus will only function when an optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC card is installed.
Refer to the “APPENDIX” for details. “Reserve” is the extra position for future extension of the SETUP mode menu.

108
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Time Signature Setting (“Signature Set?”)

Using the “Setting a time signature” menu, you can set a time signature of a given measure on the internal
programmable Tempo Map. And also in this setting, the BAR (-002bar, 1 , 00clk) displayed at the head
of the disk in the time base BAR/BEAT/CLK can be set within the range of -009bar ~ -002bar.
For example, you can specify “4/4 for the first and second measures, and 2/2 from the third measure.”
Setting a time signature and tempo will create a Tempo Map, which allows the recorder to manage a
song using the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base. You can also use the Metronome function.
A time signature and tempo setting are required when MIDI clock & song position pointer are output to
an external sequencer.

Storing a time signature

Flashing
• Initial Setting : 001bar 4/4 beat
• Available bars : 001 ~ 999
• Available time signature : 1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8, SETUP

6/8, 7/8, 8/8, - -/- - (Delete) OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3
• Maximum setting points: 64 6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz

* The setting is applicable song by song. 18

24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT

∞ ∞
* The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

data
* The setting is memorized even when the power is off.
* Make sure you choose the right program before setting this • Rotate the Jog dial to enter the desired measure number.
mode. If you wish to keep the initial setting for the first measure,
enter 002. If you try to enter any number other than
001, the time signature indicator shows “-/- ”. This
1.Select a Program for which to set a time signature. means that no time signature is set for any measures
Refer to “Using the Program Change function” on page “37” other than the first measure. To change the time
for information on selecting a Program. signature for the first measure, follow the steps below,
without entering any other measure number.
2. Press the [SETUP] key, use the Jog dial to select
the “Signature.Set ?” menu, then press the • Turn the Shuttle dial to display flashing “-/-” of “-/- ” and
[EXECUTE/YES] key. enter the time signature using the Jog dial.
The indication changes to the current time signature The following measure numbers and time signatures can
appears. The initial setting is “001bar 4/4 ” (4/4 for the be entered via the Jog dial.
first measure).
001-999, selection of [All Clear?]
SETUP
indication.
[All Clear?] means that data in its
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 Measures entirety will be cleared. This is used
3 3
6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz to initialize the parameter. (Refer to
18
24
30
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT “Clearing stored time signature/tempo
42 42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞
data.”)

1/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 1/8, 3/8, 5/8,

6/8, 7/8, 8/8, -/-
[-/-] means no time signature assigned,
SETUP
Time signatures and is used to delete time signature
data. (Refer to “Modifying (or deleting)
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 stored time signatures” for more
3 3
6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz
information.)
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
<Note>
You cannot assign “- - -” to measure 001.
At this time, rotating the Jog dial clockwise enables you
to check the current time signatures in sequence. 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key whenever you enter
With the initial setting, time signatures after the first
measure are all “- - -bar - /- ”. This means that a time a pair of measure/time signature values.
signature of 4/4 applies to all measures. Repeat this step to specify the necessary time signature
for the measures.

3.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. To cancel the setting operation, or to exit SETUP mode
The indication changes to “001 (measure)” of “001bar after storing data, press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/
4/4 ” flashes. You can enter any time signature here. NO] key. Each time you press one of these keys, the
recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of
the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.

109
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Modifying (or deleting) stored time signatures

1.Repeat steps 1-3 described in the “Storing a time <Caution>

signature” section. If modifying or deleting the stored time signature
causes the bar/beat setting for the tempo specified in
2.Turn the Shuttle dial so that the flashing cursor is the “Setting a tempo” menu to disappear, the tempo
on the time signature value. setting will also be automatically erased.

3.Use the Jog dial to enter a new value. To cancel the setting operation, or to exit SETUP mode
Entering “-/-” deletes the existing data. Note that you after storing data, press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/
cannot enter “-/-” for measure 001. NO] key. Each time you press one of these keys, the
recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of
4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.

5.Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] button).

Clearing all time signature and tempo settings

3.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

<Caution>
The stored time signature and tempo data in its entirety
Using this function will erase not only the time signature
are cleared, and the initial settings are restored.
setting but also the tempo data specified in the “Setting
a tempo” menu described in the next section. 4.Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] button).

1.Repeat steps 1-3 described in the “Storing a time To cancel the All Clear operation, press the [STOP]
signature” section. button or the [EXIT/NO] key now. Each time you press
one of these keys, the recorder returns to the previous
2.While the measure number is flashing, turn the Jog hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits SETUP
mode.
dial counter-clockwise to select “All Clear?.”
When “All Clear ?” appears, “SURE ?” flashes, and you
can clear the time signature and tempo data in the next
step.
Flashing

SETUP SURE?

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Changing the bar at ABS “0” of the time base

Bar in -002bar/1beat/00clk, which indicates the head figure of the disk in the time base BAR/BEAT/CLK, can be changed.
Although the initial figure is -002bar, this can be set within the range of -009bar ~ -002bar.

1.Repeat steps 1-2 described in the “Storing a time 4. Use the Jog dial to enter a new value.
signature” section.
5. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
2.Turn the Jog dial counter-clockwise to select
“-002 bar Offset.” 6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or [STOP] button).

3.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. To cancel the setting operation, or to exit SETUP mode
“2” in “-002bar” will flash and the bar figure can be after storing data, press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/
changed with the Jog dial (Numbers that can be input NO] key. Each time you press one of these keys, the
are 2~9.) recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of
the menu, and finally exits SETUP mode.
Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

110
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setting a tempo (“Tempo Map Set ?” menu)

The “Setting a tempo” menu enables you to specify a tempo at a given point in a song that already has a time
signature setting. For example, you can specify a tempo of 150 to the third beat of the 12th measure.
Time signature and tempo settings make a Tempo Map, which is used by the recorder to manage the song
using the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base, and enable the Metronome function. Tempo settings as well as time
signature settings are required when you wish to output MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer to an external
sequencer.

<Note>
The tempo set figure setup here is an approximate figure and not 100% accurate. Therefore, although the tempo
map be matched to a personal computer, they will gradually drift apart. In order to prevent this drift, the
personal computer side can be set to either MIDI Clock Sync or, the MIDI sync output signal temporarily set to
“MIDI Clock,” the figure reset to the accurate tempo and then return again to MTC sync.

• Initial setting: bar 001, beat 1: 120 (001 bar 1 beat 120 tempo)
• Setting range of measures: Determined by the time signature setting.
• Setting range of beats: Determined by the time signature setting.
• Setting range of tempo: 30-250/quarter note, — (delete)
• Max. setting points: 64 points
* You can set the tempo for each Program individually.
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

Checking the stored tempo setting Storing a tempo value

1.Select a Program to check the tempo setting for. 3.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
Press the [SETUP] key, use the Jog dial to select the The indication changes to “001 (measure)” of “001bar”
“Tempo Map Set ?” menu, then press the [EXECUTE/YES] flashes. (See the figure below.)
key. Indication on the display changes as shown below, This means that you can enter a value now.
and the current tempo appears. The initial setting is
Flashing
“001 bar 1 =120”. This means that a tempo for the
first beat of the first measure is set to 120. SETUP

SETUP OL OL
0 0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
OL OL 24 12 12
0 0
BIT 18 18 CLOCK
3 3 24 24 INT
6 6 FS 30 30
9 9 kHz 42 42
12 12 ∞ ∞
18 18 CLOCK 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

4.Turn the Shuttle dial to move the flashing cursor

to the desired edit location, and use the Jog dial
SETUP

to enter the bar/beat/tempo information to be

OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
stored.
The bar and beat settings for the time signatures
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
determine the setting range of bar and beat settings for
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
the tempo. You can specify a tempo between 30 and
250 per quarter note.
The indication “ = - - -” means “no tempo,” which is used
2.Rotate the Jog dial clockwise. to delete a tempo setting.
You can view the current tempo values in sequence. When you turn the Jog dial, “ = - - -” appears for the bars
Tempo value “- - - bar - = - - -” means that no tempo and beats for which no tempo has been set.
values are specified after the current setting.
With the initial setting, “001bar 1 =120” is followed by 5.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
“- - - bar - = - - -”. The display shows the stored bar/beat/tempo, then
returns to the Tempo Edit indication (as shown in step
4).

6.Repeat steps 3-5 to store necessary tempo data.

For example, if you specify tempo values in the song
with “001bar 4/4 ” and “005bar 3/4 ” settings, the Tempo
Map includes the settings shown in the table below.

111
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

4 Tempo Map
4 Time signature setting Tempo setting
001 bar 1 = 120
Tempo=120 Tempo=90 001 bar 4/4
003 bar 1 = 90

3 005 bar 3/4

005 bar 3 = 60
4 007 bar 2 = 120

Tempo=60 Tempo=120

Modifying (or deleting) stored tempo settings

1.Repeat steps 1-3 described in the “Storing a tempo 4.Use the Jog dial to enter a new value.
value” section. Entering “- - -” deletes the data at the selected bar/beat.

2.Turn the Jog dial to select bar/beat to edit or delete. 5.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

3.Turn the Shuttle dial so that the flashing cursor is 6.Press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key
on the TEMPO number. repeatedly to exit SETUP mode.

Setting the Metronome function (“Click ?” menu)

“Setting the Metronome function” menu allows you to determine whether or not the recorder outputs a metronome
sound from Real track (track 24) during playback or recording.
Turning the Metronome function on enables you to record your performance while playing the instrument
accompanying the metronome sound.

<Notes>
• The metronome sound is output from track 24 in the D2424LV.
• When the metronome function is switched ON, the metronome sound cannot be recorded on the output track
nor can the recorded sound be played back. However, in a D2424LV formatted in 96kHz/24bit (8 track) or
88.2kHz/24bit (8 track), as the metronome sound will be output from track 24, real tracks1-8 can all be used
for record/playback.

Setting the Metronome function

• Initial setting: [Off] SETUP

• Option: [Off], or [On] OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12

* You can turn the function on and off for each 18

24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT

Program individually. ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
∞

* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of

the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the Flashing
power to the recorder.
SETUP

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] OL

0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24

6 6 FS

key to enter SETUP mode. 9

12
18
24
9
12
18
24
CLOCK
INT
kHz

30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Click ?” (“?” flashes.),

then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The current setting (“Off” or “On”) appears on the 3.Turn the Jog dial to select “On” or “Off”.
display. Selecting “On” will enable the output of the metronome
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key lights up the flashing sound. Selecting “Off” (initial setting) will disable the
“?” character steadily; the current setting flashes. metronome output.
The initial setting is “Off” as shown below.
4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The display shows the selection (On or Off), then returns
to the indication in step 2.

112
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setting a preroll value (“Preroll Time ?” menu)

The recorder features the Preroll function that enables you to locate a position a few seconds prior to a
specified locate point. The “Setting a preroll value” menu allows you to set the preroll time (in seconds).
The Preroll function is convenient when you wish to monitor the audio data from a point slightly before the
locate point.
• Initial setting: [00] second
• Setting range of preroll time: [00] - [10] seconds in one second steps
* You can set the value for each Program individually.
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

Preroll time (before the locate point) can be set between 00 and 10 seconds.

This point is located if the current position is before the locate point.
This point is located if the current position is after the locate point.

This point is actually located. Locate point (stored in the memory key).

Setting a preroll time

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
key to enter SETUP mode. The display shows the value, then returns to the
indication that appeared in step 2.

2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Preroll Time ?” (“?”

To cancel the setting operation, or to restore the
flashes.), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. setting obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press,
The current preroll time setting appears on the display. press the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key lights up the flashing time you press one of these keys, the recorder returns
“?” character steadily; the current setting flashes. to the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and
The initial setting is “00” as shown below. finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous
Time Base.
SETUP
S

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP
S

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3.Turn the Jog dial to enter a desired preroll time

value.
You can set a value in one-second increments.
Rotating the Jog dial clockwise increases the value, and
rotating it counter-clockwise decreases the value.

113
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setting MIDI sync output signal (“Midi Sync Out ?” menu)

The “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu enables you to select the type of MIDI sync signals output from the
MIDI OUT connector on the rear panel of the recorder to an external MIDI device.
The options are MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, or MTC (MIDI time code). Select an appropriate option
depending on the type of signal supported by the connected MIDI device.
If you select MIDI clock & Song Position Pointer, first you need to set the time signatures and tempo as
described previously. If you select MTC, you first need to set the MTC frame rate, the MTC offset time, and the
MTC offset mode as described later.

• Initial setting: [MTC]

• Option: [CLK] (clock & Song Position Pointer), [MTC] (MIDI time code), [Off] (no output)
* You can set the parameters for each Program individually.
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

Setting MIDI sync signal

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3.Turn the Jog dial to select the desired MIDI sync
key to enter SETUP mode. signal.
Setting this parameter to “CLK” will select MIDI clock &
2.Rotate the Jog dial to select “Midi Sync Out ?” Song Position Pointer.
(“?” flashes.), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. Setting the parameter to “MTC” (initial setting) will select
The currently-selected MIDI sync signal type appears MIDI time code.
on the display.
Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key to turn off the flashing “?” With the “Off” setting, no MIDI sync signal will be output.
indication. The MIDI sync signal type indication flashes,
and the indicator flashes indicating the SYNC OUT
setting. 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The initial setting is “MTC” as shown below. The selected MIDI sync signal type is stored, and the
recorder returns to the display with the flashing “?”
SETUP indicator as shown in step 2.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz
To cancel the setting operation, or to restore a setting
obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time
you press one of these keys, the recorder returns to
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally
Flashing exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time
Base.
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Setting an MTC frame rate (“Frame Rate ?” menu)

The “Setting an MTC frame rate” menu enables you to set the frame rate for MTC output from the MIDI OUT
connector of the recorder to an external MIDI device. If you have already set the type of MIDI sync output
signal to “MTC,” you need to set the frame rate. Use the frame rate of MTC received by the external MIDI
device (or sequence software).

• Initial setting: [25] (25 frames)

• Setting range of frame rate: [24], [25], [29df], [29nd], [30df], [30nd]
* You can set the value for each Program individually.
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

114
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setting an MTC frame rate

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3.Turn the Jog dial to enter the desired frame rate.
key to enter SETUP mode. Rotating the Jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise
displays available frame rates as an alternative.
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Frame Rate ?” ( “?”
flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The current frame rate setting appears on the display. The selected frame rate is stored and the display returns
Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key to turn off the flashing “?” to the indication with a flashing “?” that appeared in
character; the current setting flashes. step 2.
The initial setting of “25” flashes as shown below.
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
SETUP

obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press

OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time
you press one of these keys, the recorder returns to
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT
the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time
Base.

Flashing <Note>
There are no 29.97nd or 29.97df in the MTC standard.
SETUP
Use either 30nd or 30df unless you definitely need
OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 to synchronize the recorder with NTSC video.
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Setting an MTC offset value (“MTC Offset?” menu)

The “Setting an MTC offset value” menu enables you to specify an offset time value - the difference between the
time of MTC output from the recorder and the ABS 00M 00S 00F 00SF time. You need to specify this value if
you have selected “MTC” for the “Setting MIDI sync output signal” menu.
With the initial setting of 00h 59M 57S 00F 00SF, for example, MTC of 59M 57S 00F 00SF is output at the ABS
time 00M 00S 00F 00SF. You can also set an offset value from the 001bar 1beat 00clk value (bar/beat) on the
Tempo Map. Refer to the next section for information on MTC Offset mode.

• Initial setting: [00H: 59M: 57S: 00F: 00SF]

• Setting range of offset time: 00H: 00M: 00S: 00F: 00SF - 23H: 59M: 59S: 29F: 99SF
* You can set the value for each Program individually.
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

Setting an MTC offset

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] SETUP MTC OFFSET
H M S F SF

key to enter SETUP mode. OL OL

0 0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12

2.Turn the Jog dial to select “MTC Offset?” (“?” 18

24
30
42
∞
18
24
30
42
∞
CLOCK
INT

flashes.), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

The current offset value appears on the display.

Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key turns off the flashing Flashing
“?” character, and the value in secondsflashes.
You can enter a value at the flashing digit. SETUP MTC
H
OFFSET
M S F SF

The number “57” of the initial setting “57S” flashes as

OL OL
shown below. 0
3
6
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

115
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

3.Use the Shuttle dial to move the flashing cursor, To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
and turn the Jog dial to enter the desired offset obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
value. the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
For example, if you rotate the Jog dial on the seconds press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
digit up 59, turning the dial further will increase the previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
number on the digit of minute by one. SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.

4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. <Note>

The selected offset value is stored and the display returns For example, if you set MTC Offset mode to “ABS”
to the indication with the flashing “?” that appeared in (see the next section) and you wish to start the song
step 2. from MTC’s 01H 00M 00S 00F, you may wish to set a
preroll of three seconds with an MTC offset of 00H
59M 57S 00F.

Setting Offset mode (“Offset Mode ?” menu)

If you have selected “MTC” in the “Setting Offset mode” menu, you need to select MTC Offset mode.
This menu enables you to determine whether the specified MTC is output at ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F or at
001bar 1beat 00clk (bar/beat) of the Tempo Map.

<Notes>
• As an example, if you set MTC Offset mode to “ABS” and you wish to start the song from MTC’s 1H 00M 00S
00F, you may want to set a preroll of three seconds with MTC offset of 00H 59M 57S 00F.
If you select “BAR “ as the MTC Offset mode, a preroll of two measures is automatically set. Use 01H 00M 00S
00F; do not set a preroll value.
• If you set Offset mode to “BAR “ and use MTC to synchronize sequence software on the computer, the tempo
of the sequencer may sometimes slip gradually. This is because the tempo of the recorder and the tempo of
the software are slightly different even if both use the same tempo. Some sequence software can read the
tempo output from the recorder correctly. We recommend that you use the tempo of the recorder on the
sequence software. No such problems will occur if the sequence software synchronizes the recorder via MIDI
clock, instead of MTC.

• Initial setting: [ABS]

• Offset mode option: [ABS], or [Bar ]
* You can set the mode for each Program individually.
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

Setting MTC Offset mode

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3.Use the Jog dial to select the desired Offset mode.
key to enter SETUP mode. Rotating the Jog dial clockwise or counter-clockwise will
alternately show a flashing “ABS” and “Bar ”.
If you select “ABS”, the specified MTC offset time is output
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Offset Mode ?” (“?” at ABS 00H 00M 00S 00F.
flashes.), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. If you select “Bar ”, the specified MTC offset time is
The current offset mode appears on the display. output at 001bar 1beat 00clk of the Tempo Map.
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key to turn off the flashing
“?” character. The Offset mode indicator flashes.
With the initial setting, “ABS” flashes as shown below. 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
SETUP
The selected offset mode is stored and the display returns
to the indication with flashing “?”.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24
30
42
∞
30
42
∞
INT
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
Flashing previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

116
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setting the Slave type (“Slave Type ?” menu)

The “Setting the Slave type” menu enables you to setup how recorder should function after chase lock, when
recorder is set to sync externally in “slave mode ON” by the previously mentioned “Setting the slave mode.”

• Initial setting: [Vari]

• Option: [Vari], [Free]
[Vari]: The recorder synchronizes only to external MTC.
[Free]: The recorder locks to MTC, then synchronizes to the internal clock.
* You can set the parameter for each Program individually.
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.
* The Program is automatically checked before the operation.
* The sampling rate is automatically checked before the operation.

Setting the Slave type

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] <Notes>

key to enter SETUP mode. • You need to input MTC from an external device to
the recorder with any Slave type.
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Slave Type ?” (“?”
• The recorder re-chase window is fixed to ten frames.
flashes.), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
That is, if an offset between the master device and
The current Slave type appears on the display.
slave device exceeds ten frames, the recorder
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key turns off the flashing
interprets that as out of sync, and tries to chase
“?” character, and the Slave type indicator flashes.
and lock to MTC sent from the master device. (This
With the initial setting, “Vari” flashes as shown below.
operation is called “re-chasing.”) During the re-chase
SETUP
operation, audio output is muted. If the slave
machine slips with MTC from the master device by
OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
less than ten frames, the slave machine continues
9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz
running while recognizing the slippage.
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
• When you set the Slave type, the Vari Pitch function
is automatically disabled. (The “VARI PITCH”
indicator turns off.)
Flashing

SETUP 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

OL OL BIT 24
The selected Slave type is stored, and “?” flashes.
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
24
30
42
INT To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
3.Use the Jog dial to select the desired Slave type. previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
Rotating the Jog dial clockwise and counter-clockwise SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
will cause the “Vari” and “Free” indicators to flash in
sequence.

Setting the Record Protect function (“Rec Protect ?” menu)

The recorder features the Record Protect function, which is similar to the function of record-protect tabs on
cassette tapes. The “Setting the Record Protect function” menu allows you to turn the Record Protect function on
and off.
When this function is turned on, you cannot record, paste, or erase data. Use this function to protect your
precious data from being erased accidentally.

• Initial setting: [Off]

• Option: [Off] or [On]
* You can turn the function on and off for each Program individually.
* The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.
* The Program is automatically checked before the operation.

117
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Recording enabled/disabled

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3.Use the Jog dial to enable or disable recording.
key to enter SETUP mode. Rotating the Jog dial clockwise and counter-clockwise
will flash “On” and “Off” alternately.
Selecting “Off” enables recording; you can record, paste,
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Rec Protect ?” (“?” and erase data.
flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. Selecting “On” disables recording; and you cannot
The current setting appears on the display. record, paste, or erase data.
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key turns off the flashing
“?” character, and the recording enabled/disabled <Note>
indicator flashes. With the initial setting, “Off” flashes When recording is disabled (On) and you try to record,
as shown below. paste, or erase data, the recorder displays “Protected”
for a second, indicating that you cannot perform the
SETUP

operation. To perform the operation, you need to

OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 enable recording (Off).
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting

Flashing
obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
SETUP
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
FS
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
6 6
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Setting digital input (“D. in ?” menu)

In the “Setting a digital input” menu, the signal to be input to the [DATA INPUT] connector of the recorder can be
set for either digital signals (adat digital signal or S/P DIF digital signal) or analog signals, and also setup of the
digital in clock (synchronous or asynchronous).
By using this function, signals from external digital equipment (CD, MD, DAT, adat digital mixer) can be
digitally recorded.
When selecting the clock, there are the “Async” and “Sync” modes; either should be selected depending on the
application. If it is set to “Async” mode, the later explained “Clock Sel?” (Setting the operating clock) should
be setup in accordance to the application.

• Initial setting: [Analog]

• Assignable digital signal/setting digital in-clock:[adat: Async] (adat digital signal/Asynchronous mode)
[adat: Sync] (adat digital signal/Synchronous mode)
[SPDIF: Async] (S/P DIF digital signal/Asynchronous mode)
[SPDIF: Sync] (S/P DIF digital signal/Synchronous mode)
[Analog] (not assigned digital signal)
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

<Function of the [DATA INPUT] connectors>

<Setup for analog signals>
If the digital input is set up for Analog (Initial setting), digital signals cannot be input at [DATA INPUT] 1-8, 9-16
and 17-24 of the D2424LV.
<Setup for S/P DIF digital signals>
If the digital input is set up for S/P DIF (Async or Sync), only [DATA INPUT] 1-8 can be used.
S/P DIF digital signals input to [DATA INPUT] 1-8 will be assigned and recorded in tracks 1 and 2 of D2424LV.
<Setup for adat digital signals>
If the digital input is set up for adat (Async or Sync), all [DATA INPUT] connectors can be used.
Adat digital signals input to [DATA INPUT] 1-8 will be assigned and recorded in tracks 1-8; the signals to [DATA
INPUT] 9-16 in tracks 9-16; and the signals to [DATA INPUT] 17-24 in tracks 17-24.
Note: The [DATA INPUT] connectors do not support 96kHz FS adat digital signals.

118
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setting digital input

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] If you do not wish to synchronize the system with digital
key to enter SETUP mode. in, select “Async” and, if it is to be synchronized, select
“Sync”.

2.Turn the Jog dial to select “D. in ?” (“?” flashes),

4.After selecting, press the [EXECUTE/YES] key
then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
When “D. in?” (“?” flashes) is selected, the presently set
again.
digital input content will be shown. The selected digital signal is registered and “?” in Step-
The flashing “?” is extinguished when the [EXECUTE/ 2 will return to flashing.
YES] key is pressed and the digital input setting will When the digital input is setup and the correct digital
change from lighting to flashing. signal is input, “DIGITAL” will light up in the display.
In the initial setting, “Analog” will flash as shown below. If set to synchronous mode of “adat: Sync” or “SPDIF:
Sync” and locked to the external digital signal, “EXT”
SETUP will simultaneously light up.
OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz
obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
24 24
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
Flashing SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.

SETUP
<Notes>
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 • Should “DIGITAL” flash in the display, check the
connecting cable between the external equipment
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18
24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT and the external equipment setting.
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
• When the digital input is set up for “adat” (Async
or Sync), should any one among the three [DATA
INPUT] (1-8, 9-16, 17-24) be locked, "DIGITAL" will
3.Select the desired digital signal and digital-in clock light up in the display.
with the Jog dial. In such a case, tracks not locked will be
In addition to “Analog”, “adat: Async”, “adat: Sync”, automatically set for analog input.
“SPDIF: Async” or “SPDIF: Sync” can be selected. By using this function, for example, if analog
signals are input to tracks 1-8 and adat digital
“Async”/“Sync” which is displayed together with the signals to tracks 9-16 and 17-24, a total of 24 tracks
digital signal (S/P DIF or adat) must be selected to can be recorded simultaneously.
whether the system is to be synchronized or not with
the digital-in clock.

Setting digital output (“D. out ?” menu)

By using the “Setting a digital output” menu, the type of digital signal to be output to external digital equipment
from the [DATA OUTPUT] connector (1-8, 9-16, 17-24) of this recorder, can be setup.
Also, by using this function, sound recorded in this recorder can be sent to external digital equipment (MD,
DAT, adat, digital mixer) in direct digital signals.

• Initial setting: [adat]

• Assignable digital signal: [adat] (adat digital signal)
[SPDIF] (S/P DIF digital signal)
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

<Function of the [DATA OUTPUT] connectors>

<Setup for S/P DIF digital signals>
When the digital output is set up for S/P DIF, all [DATA OUTPUT] connectors can be used.
Signals of tracks 1-2 are output from [DATA OUTPUT] 1-8; the signals of tracks 3-4 from [DATA OUTPUT] 9-16; and
signals from tracks 5-6 from [DATA OUTPUT] 17-24.

<Setup for adat digital signals>

When the digital output has also been setup for adat, all [DATA OUTPUT] connectors can be used.
Signals of tracks 1-8 is output from [DATA OUTPUT] 1-8; the signals of tracks 9-16 from [DATA OUTPUT] 9-16; and
signals from tracks 17-24 from [DATA OUTPUT] 17-24. Note: The [DATA OUTPUT] connectors do not support 96kHz
FS adat digital signals.

119
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setting digital output

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3.While the “adat” is flashing, turn the Jog dial.
key to enter SETUP mode. “SPDIF” can be selected in addition to “adat”.
Select “adat” if the adat digital signal (8 tracks) is to be
output, and “SPDIF” if the S/P DIF digital signal (2 tracks)
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “D. out ?” (“?” flashes), is to be output.
then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The current digital output signal appears on the display. 4.After selecting the digital output signal, press the
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key turns off the flashing
“?” character, and setting of the digital output signal
[EXECUTE/YES] key.
flashes. With the initial setting, “adat” flashes as shown The selected digital output signal will be registered and
below. the flashing “?” in Step-2 will return to flashing.

SETUP To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting

OL OL
obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
BIT 24
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
FS the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
kHz
12
18
24
30
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞ previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode (“Resolution ?” menu)

The “Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode” menu enables you to turn BAR/BEAT resolution mode on and off.
The initial setting is “Off.” When you turn this mode on, the CLK (clock) digits will be always round off to 00
and be stored in the memory key while the recorder is using the BAR/BEAT/CLK Time Base. That is, beat
resolution is used. Using this function allows you to automatically store a beat-resolution value of the CLIPBOARD
IN/OUT points and other points in real-time. (Press the STORE key, then the corresponding memory key while
playing the recorder.) Therefore, it is very convenient when you perform the Copy & Paste or Move & Paste
operation in beat-resolution.

For example, assume that you have stored the value for 001bar 1 46 clk as the CLIPBOARD IN
point, and the value for 002bar 4 51 clk as the CLIPBOARD OUT point.
These values will be used as they are if BAR/BEAT resolution mode is turned off. However, the
mode is turned on, the following values will be stored instead. The following example has a time
signature setting of 4/4.

001bar 1 46 clk -> 001bar 1 00 clk (A clk value of 46 will be rounded off.)

002bar 4 51 clk -> 003bar 1 00 clk (A clk value of 51 will be rounded up.)

• Initial setting: [Off]

• Options: [On] or [Off]
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

120
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setting BAR/BEAT resolution mode

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3.Use the Jog dial to turn the mode “On” or “Off”.
When you turn the Jog dial clockwise and counter-
key to enter SETUP mode. clockwise, “On” and “Off” flash alternately.
Selecting “On” turns BAR/BEAT resolution mode on, and
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Resolution ?” (“?” selecting “Off” turns BAR/BEAT resolution mode off.
flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The current BAR/BEAT resolution mode setting appears
on the display.
4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key turns off the flashing The selected mode setting is stored, and “?” flashes.
“?” character, and the BAR/BEAT resolution mode setting
flashes. With the initial setting, “Off” flashes as shown To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
below. obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
SETUP press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
OL OL
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
BIT 24
0
3
6
9
0
3
6
9
FS SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Setting the MIDI device number (“Device ID ?” menu)

The “Setting the MIDI device number” menu enables you to set the recorder device ID number required to
control the unit from a sequence software using MMC (MIDI Machine Control) or FEX (Fostex System Exclusive
Message).
The transmit device ID links to this setting. You can set the device ID from “00” to “99”.
However, if the device ID number of the message the recorder receives is “7F”, the recorder will recognizes it
to perform the corresponding operation, regardless of its device ID setting.

Setting the MIDI device ID

SETUP

• Initial setting: [00]

• Options: [00] ~ [99] OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24

6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK

* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same

24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞

disk. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of

the song data.
Flashing
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the
power to the recorder. SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 6

9
12
18
6
9
12
18 CLOCK
FS
kHz

key to enter SETUP mode.

24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Device ID?” (“?”

flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. 3. Use the Jog dial to set the desired MIDI device ID
The current MIDI device ID number appears on the number.
display. Turning the Jog dial clockwise increments the value, and
Pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key turns off the flashing turning it counter-clockwise decrements the value.
“?” character, and the MIDI device ID number flashes.
With the initial setting, “00” flashes as shown below. 4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The MIDI device ID number is stored, and “?” flashes.

121
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Setting <SETUP mode>)

To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting

obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.

Setting the Operating Clock (“Clock Sel ?” menu)

The “Setting the Operating Clock” menu is used to setup the operating clock of the recorder.
If digital input is set to asynchronous mode of “adat: Async” or “SPDIF: Async” in the previous “D. in?” (Digital
input setting), whether this recorder is to operated by its internal clock or synchronized to the word clock
signal from the external digital equipment should be selected when recording in digital from external digital
equipment (DAT, adat, CD, MD, etc.). The initial setting is set to synchronize to the internal clock.
The setup item “Video” is effective if an optional Model 8346 TC/SYNC card is installed.
For details, refer to the “APPENDIX.”

Setting the operating clock

• Initial setting: [Int.] 3.With the Jog dial, select the operating clock.
• Option: [Int.] (Internal clock) If “Int.” (initial setting) is selected, the recorder will
[Auto] operate using the internal clock.
[Word] If “Auto” is selected, the recorder will sync to an external
[Video] (Tis item will be digital signal.
effective if the optional Model If “Word” is selected, the recorder will sync to an external
8346 TC/SYNC card is word clock signal.
installed in this recorder.)

* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
disk. The selected operating clock will register and “?” in step-
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of 2 above, will flashes.
the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the Refer to the chart of next page in regards to “Digital
power to the recorder. input setting” and “Operating clock setting.”

To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting

obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
key to enter SETUP mode. press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Clock Sel ?” (“?” SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
A flashing “?” will extinguish by pressing the [EXECUTE/
YES] key and the operating clock information that was
lit will being flashing. Initial setting, it will show “Int.”

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

122
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

[Clock Sel ?]
[D. in ?] setting
setting Int Auto Word Video
When receiving word clock from When receiving word clock from
WORD IN, the recorder automati- WORD IN, the recorder synchro-
clock received Regardless of receiving or not re- cally synchronizes to the incom- nizes to the incoming clock, while
from WORD IN ceiving word clock from WORD IN, ing clock, while the “DIGITAL” and the “DIGITAL” and “EXT” indicators
Available only when
the recorder is referenced to the “EXT” indicators light in the dis- installing the op-
SPDIF :Async internal clock. When the recorder light in the display. tional Model 8346
play.
receives correct digital signals, the TC/SYNC card. If
adat :Async “DIGITAL” indicator lights in the dis- When no word clock is received, When no word clock is received, the you try to select
no clock
received from play. the recorder is referenced to the “EXT” indicator flashes showing that “Video,” “Void w/o
WORD IN internal clock, while the “EXT” in- the recorder cannot be locked. 8346” is displayed
dicator flashes. and you cannot se-
lect it. See the ap-
clock received Regardless of receiving or not receiving word clock from WORD IN, the recorder synchronizes to the pendix of the Refer-
from WORD IN external S/P DIF digital signal. When the recorder receives correct digital signals, the “DIGITAL” and “EXT” ence manual for de-
SPDIF :Sync indicators light in the display. When Digital In is set to a SYNC mode, if you try to select “Clock Sel?” menu, tails.
adat :Sync no clock The display will show “Clock Sel D.in!” (indicating that the clock is set to Digital In!) and the recorder
received from ignores your operation.
WORD IN

Checking the number of track events (“No Of Event ?” menu)

The “Checking the number of track events” menu enables you to check the number of events on each track.
Each track (including Additional tracks) of recorder Programs consists of consecutive audio files (and “zero”
files). The number of events represents the total number of audio files and 0 files. Each track can contain up
to 512 events.
If you are editing a song of typical length (about six minutes), repeated editing operation does not usually
cause this maximum number to be exceeded. (Exceeding this limit is called “event number overflow.”) Even a 20-
minute song will not cause event number overflow. This is because the recorder system always optimizes the
data structure by keeping the number of events low. However, if a recording on a track is scattered in
different areas of the disk, or if you have made a very long recording on a single track and performed many
edits, you should be wary of “event number overflow.” To avoid this problem, use the “Checking the number of
track events” menu to check the number of events on each track prior to recording or editing.

Checking the number of track events

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3.Use the Jog dial to select another (01-24) to check
key to enter SETUP mode. the number of events on the corresponding track.

2.Turn the Jog dial to select “No Of Event?” (“?” 4.Press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button
flashes), and then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. repeatedly to exit SETUP mode.
The screen changes as follows, indicating the number of
events on track 1. (In this example, track 1 includes five
events.) To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
SETUP
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
OL OL BIT 24
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
0 0
3
6
9
3
6
9
FS
kHz
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42
∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞ * For more information on audio files and events, refer
to the “Audio file and event” section of the ”Before
Starting” chapter.
Selected track number

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

The number of events on track 1

123
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Setting <SETUP mode>)

Setup of the Auto EE mode (“Auto EE Mode?” menu)

At the “Setup of the Auto EE mode” menu, you must set up whether it should be automatically set to "ALL INPUT
monitor" or not when D2424LV is in the STOP mode.

Setting the Auto EE mode

• Initial setting: [Off] 3. With the Jog dial, select the auto EE mode.
• Device ID: [Off] or [On]

* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same

4. After selecting "On" or "Off," press the [EXECUTE/
disk. YES] key again.
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of The selected On/Off will be registered and the Step-2
the song data. "?" will return to flashing.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the
power to the recorder.
5.Press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button
repeatedly to exit SETUP mode.
1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP]
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
key to enter SETUP mode. obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Auto EE Mode ?” press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
(“?” flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
A flashing “?” will extinguish by pressing the [EXECUTE/
YES] key and the auto EE mode information that was lit
will being flashing. Initial setting, it will show “Off”.
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Setup of the Foot switch function (“Foot SW?” menu)

At the “Setup of the foot switch function” menu, functions of a foot switch connected to the FOOT SW jack must
be set up.
Functions of the foot switch are, manual punch in/out or PLAY-STOP of D2424LV. Initially, this is set to the
"Punch in/out function" explained in "Using the foot switch for manual punch in/out," page “43”. You can change this
to PLAY-STOP of the recorder if you so wish.

Setting the foot switch function

• Initial setting: [Punch IO] 1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP]
• Options: [Punch IO] (Punch in/out key to enter SETUP mode.
function) or [PLY/STP] (Play/
stop function)
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Foot SW ?” (“?”
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
disk. A flashing “?” will extinguish by pressing the [EXECUTE/
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of YES] key and the foot switch function information that
the song data. was lit will being flashing. Initial setting, it will show
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the “Punch IO”.
power to the recorder.

124
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

SETUP 5. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the [EXIT/

OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24
NO] key (or [STOP] button).
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30
42
∞
30
42
∞
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you

press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
Flashing
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
SETUP
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3. Select the desired function by rotating the Jog

dial.

4. After selecting the function, press the [EXECUTE/

YES] key again.
The selected foot switch function will be registered and
the Step-2 "?" will return to flashing.

Setup of the stop function at the mark point (“Mark Stop MD?” menu)
At the “Setup of the stop function at the mark point” menu, this sets whether or not D2424LV should automatically
stop at the preset mark point (=locate point) during playback.

Setting the stop function at the mark point

• Initial setting: [Off] 3. Select "On" or "Off" with the Jog dial and press
• Options: [OFF] or [On] the [EXECUTE/YES] key again.
The selected stop function will be registered and the
* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.
Step-2 "?" will return to flashing.
* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of
the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the 4. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the [EXIT/
power to the recorder. NO] key (or the [STOP] button).

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
key to enter SETUP mode. obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Mark Stop MD?” (“?” press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
A flashing “?” will extinguish by pressing the [EXECUTE/
YES] key and the stop function at the mark point
information that was lit will being flashing. Initial setting,
it will show “Off”.
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

125
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Setting <SETUP mode>)

Setup of input/output Balance/Unbalance (“BAL/UNBAL?” menu)

Whether the D2424LV rear panel analog input/output connectors should be set to balanced or unbalanced
lines can be setup at the "Setup of input/output balance/unbalance" menu. Initially, it is set for unbalance but can
be set to balanced input/output.
Because the setup content is registered in the D2424LV internal System ROM, it will be held even though the
current drive E-IDE hard disk is replaced.

• Initial setting: [UNBAL] (Unbalanced/-10dBV)

• Option: [UNBAL] (Unbalanced/-10dBV) or [BAL] (Balanced/+4dBu)

* The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

Setting the input/output balance/unbalanced function

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3. Select the “BAL” or “UNBAL” with the Jog dial,
key to enter SETUP mode. then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key again.
The selected item will be registered and "?" in Step-2
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “BAL/UNBAL ?” (“?” will return to flashing.
flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The display will change as shown below and the 4. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the [EXIT/
presently setup item will be displayed. NO] key (or [STOP] button).
The blinking "?" will disappear when the [EXECUTE/YES]
key is pressed and the lighted item will change to
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
flashing. obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
"UNBAL" will flash in the initial setting. the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
SETUP
previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

126
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Drive Format Information (“Drive Info?” menu)

Format information of the current drive presently installed can be checked by using the “Drive Format Information”
menu. Should any trouble occur in the recorder, providing the information obtained here to our nearest
Fostex Service Station will be of great help in giving quick service. The following items will be displayed and
can be confirmed.

1. Manufacture / Model of the currently installed hard disk.

2. Format method
3. Last day of formatting in standard type
4. Format type
5. Simultaneously recordable number of tracks
6. Number of bits at formatting
7. Sampling frequency at formatting
8. Present number of programs
9. Present number of free blocks
10. Audio file / maximum number of events and its program No.
11. Maximum number of events of the time code and its program number
12. Specific capacity of the drive
13. Remaining capacity of the drive
14. Present software version
15. Present multiple undo function mode on/off

Checking method of the format information

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] • This indicates that the formatting method is
key to enter SETUP mode. standard.
In addition to “Standard” formatting method, “Quick” or
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Drive Info?” (“?” “Erase” will be displayed.
flashes), and then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
First, the manufacturer / model of the currently installed SETUP

hard disk will scroll and displayed. OL OL

0 0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
SETUP 12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
OL OL BIT 24 ∞ ∞
0 0
3 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• The last date in when it was formatted in standard

will be displayed.
The disk formatted by “Quick” will be displayed as
SETUP
“- -, -, -’ -”.
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3 SETUP
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30 OL OL BIT 24
42 42 0 0
∞ ∞ 3 3
6 6 FS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3.As the Jog dial is rotated, information is displayed

one after the other (See display examples).
• This indicates that the format type was linear.
In addition to “Linear”, the display can also show
“Backup”, “LP”, “ADAC” or “Illegal FM”.

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

127
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Setting <SETUP mode>)

• This indicates that simultaneous recordable • This indicates that the specific capacity of this
number of tracks is 24. drive is 2112MB.
In addition to “24 Trk”, the display can also show “8 Trk”, SETUP

“4 Trk” or “16 Trk”.

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
SETUP 6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
OL OL BIT 24 42 42
0 0 ∞ ∞
3 3
6 6 FS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• This indicates that the remaining capacity

(REMAIN) of the drive is 1618MB.
• This indicates that the recorder is formatted in 24
SETUP

bits.
In addition to “24”, the display can also show “16” and OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24

6 6 FS
“12”. 9
12
18
9
12
18 CLOCK
kHz

24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
SETUP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9

• This indicates that the figure is “0” for the time

kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30

code number of events and that program is PGM01.

42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

SETUP

• This indicates that it is formatted in FS=48kHz. OL

0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24

In addition to “48kHz”, the display can also show 6

9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz
18 18 CLOCK
“44.1kHz”, “96kHz” or “88.2kHz”. 24
30
42
24
30
42
INT

∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24

• Version number of the software in this recorder

0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18
24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT will be displayed.
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 The display below indicates that the recorder you are
using is the D2424LV and the software version number
is 1.0.
• This indicates that three programs exist. SETUP

SETUP
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
OL OL 9 9 kHz
0 0
BIT 24 12 12
3 3 18 18 CLOCK
6 6 FS 24 24 INT
9 9 30 30
kHz 42 42
12 12
18 18 CLOCK ∞ ∞
24 24 INT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• The ON/OFF switching of multiple undo function

• This indicates that the number of free blocks are set at format of the current drive will be displayed.
five. The display below indicates that the multiple undo
function of the current drive presently in use is ON.
SETUP

SETUP
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz OL OL
12 12 0 0
BIT 24
18 18 CLOCK 3 3
24 24 INT 6 6 FS
30 30 9 9 kHz
42 42 12 12
∞ ∞ 18 18 CLOCK
1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 24 INT
2 3 30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

• This indicates that the maximum figure is 5 for the

number of audio file / event and that this program
is PGM01.
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

128
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Drive Setting (“Drive Sel?” menu)

In D2424LV, in addition to the current drive (E-IDE hard disk) for recording/playback/editing, by installing
the optional Model 9044 (BAY+CADDY), an E-IDE hard disk (or optional Model 9046 DVD-RAM drive), and
furthermore, a SCSI drive for backup use can be connected and used.
In the "Drive setting" menu, these drives can be selected in accordance to the use. This is especially convenient
to check the song data saved in the backup drive. Even though a multiple number of drives are used, the
D2424LV will normally start up from the current drive by re-switching on the power.

<Notes>
● By switching the drive setting to "SCSI" or "IDE2," the saved song data can be confirmed by playing it back.
Since this playback is only to the extent of confirming the saved data, it could create drop outs if 24 channels
are played back, and in some SCSI equipment, channels that can be played back could be changed.

● The following operations cannot be executed when the drive is switched to “backup drive.”

* Save/load of song data * Setup of rhythm * Recording * Creating a new program * Deleting a program
* Copy & paste and Move & paste * Erase * Track exchange * Multiple undo * Setup of tempo
* ON/OFF of metronome function * Setup of permission or denial of recording

If power to this recorder is switched again, the drive will automatically switch to current drive (E-IDE).
In order to take out the removable disk when set to backup drive, press the [EXIT/NO] key while holding down the
[SHIFT] key.

Setting of the drive

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 4.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key after choosing the
key to enter SETUP mode. setting you want.
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Drive Sel.?” (“?” To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
flashes), and then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
is ready to change setting. press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
In the case of initial setting it will show “IDE1.” previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3.With the Jog dial, choose either “IDE1”, “IDE2” or

“SCSI” you want.

129
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Setting <SETUP mode>)

Setup of the display contrast level (“Contrast ?” menu)

The contrast level of the D2424LV display can be setup.
Because this setup content will be registered in the D2424LV internal System ROM, it will be held even though
the current drive hard disk is replaced.

• Initial setting : Level “6”

* Range which can be setup : Level “0” - Level “12” (Can be set in one step increments.)
* Setup content can be saved/loaded as song data.

Setting the contrast level

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 3. Select the desired contrast level by rotating the
key to enter SETUP mode. Jog dial, then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The contrast level can be selected in the 0-12 range.
2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Contrast ?” (“?” After selecting, the selected drive will be setup by
flashes), then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The display will change as shown below and the currently
setup contrast level will be displayed (Initial setting is 4. Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the [EXIT/
“06”).
NO] key (or [STOP] button).
The flashing “?” will disappear when the [EXECUTE/YES]
key is pressed and the currently set figure will flash.
To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
SETUP obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS

previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits

9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT

SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.

30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

130
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Settings <SETUP mode>)

Setup of 0 file recording function (“Zero File ?” menu)

Whether or not a “0 file” should be recorded is setup with the “Setup of 0 file recording function” menu.
Normally, at recording adat or S/P DIF digital signals, if about one second of continuous “Data 0” is input, a “0
file” is automatically created and a “0 file” will be recorded in the disk as shown in schematic below.

ABS 0 REC END

Audio File 1 Audio File 2 0 File 1 Audio File 3 0 File 2 Audio File 4

Recorded part Silence

As explained in “Audio file and event” on page “29” in the “Before Starting” section of this manual, a “0 file” in the
no sound section will always be counted as “1 event.”

Consequently, if you create a lot of “0 file” during digital recording, it will cause event overflow on the disk.

To prevent such event overflow, the “Zero File?” menu can be used to setup so as not to generate “0 files,” In
the initial setting, it is set to “Enable” for generating “0 files” but by changing this to “Disable” “0 files” will not
be generated, and “audio files” will then be recorded continuously.

• Initial setting: [Enable]

• Options: [Enable] or [Disable]

* This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk.

* The setting cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data.
* The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder.

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] 4.Press the [EXIT/NO] key or the [STOP] button
key to enter SETUP mode. repeatedly to exit SETUP mode.

2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Zero File ?” (“?” To cancel the operation, or to restore the setting
flashes), and then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. obtained prior to the [EXECUTE/YES] key press, press
The current setting will start flashing which indicates it the [STOP] button or the [EXIT/NO] key. Each time you
is ready to change setting. press one of these keys, the recorder returns to the
In the case of initial setting it will show “Enable.” previous hierarchy level of the menu, and finally exits
SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base.
Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3.With the Jog dial, choose either “Enable” or

“Disable” you want.

“Enable” (Initial setting) 0 files will be recorded.

“Disable” 0 files will not be recorded.

131
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Changing the Initial Setting <SETUP mode>)

Converting the additional track format (“Add. Trk Convert ?” menu)

A program created on the current drive formatted by the unit consists of 56 tracks (“V2 (56)” format): 24 real tracks
plus 32 additional tracks for a 44.1kHz/48kHz FS program, or 8 real tracks plus 48 additional tracks for an 88.1kHz/
96kHz FS program. The “Converting the additional track format” menu allows to convert the total number of tracks
(real track plus additional tracks) from 56 (“V2 (56)”) to 24 (“V1 (24)”) or vice versa.
This function gives compatibility to a hard disk, allowing you to use a hard disk with both “V2 (56)” format devices
(D2424LV/D824mkII/D1624mkII) and “V1 (24)” format devices (D824/D1624).

When mounting a hard disk, converted from the “V2 (56)” format to the “V1 (24)” format, to the D824 or D1624 (a “V1 (24)”
format device), the total number of real tracks plus additional tracks becomes 24.
An 88.1kHz/96kHz FS program of the D1624 consists of 8 real tracks plus 16 additional tracks.

When mounting on the D1624 When mounting on the D824

24 Real Tracks 24 Real Tracks
8 Real Tracks
16 Real Tracks

16 Additional Tracks
8 Additional Tracks 32 Additional Tracks
32 Additional Tracks

<Note>
When converting the format from “V2 (56)” to “V1 (24),” data on tracks 25 through 56 are deleted.
Even if you convert such a program back to “V2 (56)” from “V1 (24)”, the lost data for tracks 25 through 56 cannot
be restored. When a converted hard disk is mounted on the D2424LV, all 24 tracks on a 44.1kHz/48kHz FS
program converted to “V1 (24)” are used as real tracks, therefore, no additional track exists.

1.While the recorder is stopped, press the [SETUP] SETUP SURE?

key to enter SETUP mode. OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24

2.Turn the Jog dial to select “Add. Trk Convert?” (“?” 30

42
∞
30
42
∞
INT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
flashes), and then press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The display will change to a warning message when the <Display when converting V2 (56) to V1 (24)>
[EXECUTE/YES] key is pressed and the entire message
will be repeated twice in a flowing movement.
Upon ending display of the warning message, the display SETUP SURE?

will change to the one for executing the conversion and OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24

“SURE?” will flash. 3

6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz
18 18 CLOCK
Flashing 24
30
42
24
30
42
INT

∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
<Display when converting V1 (24) to V2 (56)>
0 0

Shown when a “V1 (24)” format hard disk is mounted.

3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

3.Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key while pressing the

[RECORD] button.
Upon flashing converting, “COMPLETED!” will be lit.
SETUP SETUP COMPLETED!

OL OL OL OL BIT 24
0 0
BIT 24 0 0
3 3 3 3
6 6 FS 6 6 FS
9 9 9 9 kHz
kHz 12 12
12 12
18 18 CLOCK 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 24 24 INT
INT 30 30
30 30
42 42 42 42
∞ ∞ ∞ ∞

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

<Warning Message> 4.Press the [EXIT/NO] key or [STOP] button.

Caution! If This command is executed, all Multi. The display will change to the “Disk Optimize?” menu.
Undo & add. trk 25-56 data will be deleted.
After converting by referring to page “34” “Optimizing
the disk”, execute disk optimizing.

132
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

(Digital Recorder) Date:

Model D2424LV MIDI Implementation Chart Version: V1.00

Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Function.....................
Basic Default × ×
Channel Changed × ×

Default × ×
Mode Message × ×
Altered ******************************* ×

Note × ×
Number: True voice ******************************* ×

Velocity Note ON × ×
Note OFF × ×

After Key’s × ×
Touch Channel’s × ×

Pitch Bend × ×

× ×

Control
Change

Program × ×
Change: True # ******************************* ×

System Exclusive ○ (rem. 1) ○ (rem. 2)

: Quarter frame ○ ○
: Song Position ○ ×
Common
: Song Select × ×
: Tune × ×

System : Clock ○ ×
Real Time : Commands ○ (rem. 3) ×

: Local ON/OFF × ×

: All Notes OFF × ×

Aux.
Message : Active Sense × ×

: Reset × ×

Notes rem. 1: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Identity reply, FOSTEX Exclusive
rem. 2: MMC (Device ID=00~99, 127), MTC, Inquiry, FOSTEX Exclusive

rem. 3: START, STOP, CONTINUE

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO ○ : Yes

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO × : No

133
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

MMC Command List

Command List Movement (Recorder)
01: STOP STOP
02: PLAY PLAY
03: DEFERRED PLAY DEFERRED PLAY
04: FAST FORWARD F FWD
05: REWIND REWIND
06: RECORD STROBE REC
07: RECORD EXIT PUNCH OUT
09: PAUSE STOP
40: WRITE Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
41: MASKED WRITE Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
42: READ Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
44: LOCATE LOCATE to Setting Data
46: SEARCH CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)
47: SHUTTLE CUE/REVIEW (+/- 1~60 times)
4C: MOVE Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
4D: ADD Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List
4E: SUBTRACT Refer to MMC Response/Information Field List

MMC Response/Information Field List Command

01: SELECTED TIME CODE READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
03: REQUESTED OFFSET READ/WRITE
04: ACTUAL OFFSET READ
08: GP 0 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
09: GP 1 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0A: GP 2 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0B: GP 3 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0C: GP 4 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0D: GP 5 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0E: GP 6 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
0F: GP 7 READ/WRITE/MOVE/ADD/SUBTRACT
48: MOTION CONTROL TALLY READ
4C: RECORD MODE READ/WRITE
4E: TRACK RECORD STATUS READ
4F: TRACK RECORD READY READ/WRITE/MASKED WRITE
51: RECORD MONITOR READ/WRITE

Inquiry Message List

IDENTITY REQUEST: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 01, F7

IDENTITY REPLY: F0, 7E, <channel>, 06, 02, 51, 01, 00, 12, 00, 01, 00, 7F, 7F, F7

51: Fostex ID
01, 00: Device family code
12, 00: Device family number D2424LV
01, 00, 7F, 7F: Software version

134
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

Fostex MIDI System Exclusive Message Format for D2424LV

<Note>
Following protocol is effective only in equipment which will reply by -
Identity Reply=F0 7E<channel>06 02 51 01 00 12 00 01 00 7F *7F F7
against the Inquiry Message=F0 7E<channel>06 01.

Fostex System Exclusive Message

General Structure=F0 51<device id><sub id 1>(<data>)F7
* Numbers are all expressed in hexadecimal units.

Table: <sub id 1> (<data>)

Command or Model Set Acknowledge or Status

Controller to D2424 LV D2424LV to Controller

Loop on/off 12 22 (<on/off>)

Post locate 12 28 (<post locate mode>)
Auto rec 12 2D (<on/off>) 32 2D (<edit message>)
Lock enable 12 41 (<lock enable>)
Lock mode 12 42 (<lock mode>)
Copy clip 12 45 (<count><mmc track>) 32 45 (<edit message>)
12 46 (<count=01><repeat count>)
Copy paste or 32 46 (<edit message>)
12 46 (<count><repeat count><mmc track>)
Erase 12 47 (<count><mmc track>) 32 47 (<edit message>)
Clipboard play 12 49 32 49 (<edit message><mmc track>)
Undo 12 4A 32 4A (<edit message>)
Redo 12 4B 32 4B (<edit message>)
Move clip 12 4D (<count><mmc track>) 32 4D (<edit message>)
12 4E (<count=01><repeat count>)
Move paste or 32 4E (<edit message>)
12 4E (<count><repeat count><mmc track>)
Track Exchange 12 4F (<channel><channel>) 32 4F (<edit message>)
New program 13 3E 33 3E (<edit message>)
Delete program 13 3F 33 3F (<edit message>)
Digital in ch. 13 41 (<channel><channel><sync/async>)
Adat in 13 41 (<channel=7f><count=0><sync/async>)
Digital out ch. 13 42 (<channel><channel>) * Refer to Note.
Adat out 13 42 (<channel=7f><channel=0>)Adat out
Program change 13 43 (<program>)
Click on/off 13 44 (<on/off>)
Resolution on/off 13 46 (<on/off>)
Midi Sync out 13 47 (<nidi sync>)
MTC offset mode 13 48 (<MTC offset mode>)
13 49 (<count=3><on/off><vari pitch>)
Vari pitch or
13 49 (<count=1><on/off>)
Signature set 14 01 (<signature map>) 34 00 (<edit message>)
Tempo set 14 02 (<tempo set map>) 34 00 (<edit message>)
Tempo map all erase14 03 34 00 (<edit message>)
Preroll time set 14 04 (<mmc time>)
Frame rate set 14 06 (<frame rate>)
Fs rate set 14 07 (<FS rate>)
Time base set 14 08 (<time base>)
Date time set 14 09 (<date><mmc time>)
Auto level out md. 14 0A (<on/off>)

135
Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

Status Request
Status request command Status reply
Controller to D2424LV D2424LV to controller

Loop op. status 22 21 32 21 (<Loop op. mode = 12>)

Loop status 22 22 32 22 (<on/off>)
Post locate status 22 28 32 28 (<post locate status>)
Auto rec status 22 2D 32 2D (<edit message>)
Lock status 22 41 32 41 (<lock status>)
Lock mode status 22 42 32 42 (<lock mode>)
Copy clip status 22 45 32 45 (<edit message=01 or =14>)
32 46 (<edit message=02><mmc time>)
Copy paste status 22 46 or
32 46 (<edit message=00>)
32 47 (<edit message=02><mmc time>)
Erase status 22 47 or
32 47 (edit message=00>)
Move clip status 22 4D 32 4D (<edit message=01 or =14>)
32 4E (<edit message=02><mmc time>)
Move paste status 22 4E or
32 4E (<edit message=00>)
Digital in ch. st. 23 41 33 41 (<channel><channel>)
Adat in status 23 41 33 41 (<channel=7F><count><mmc track>)
Digital out ch. st. 23 42 33 42 (<channel><channel>)
Adat out status 23 42 33 42 (<channel=7F><channel=0>)
Program status 23 43 33 43 (<program>)
Click status 23 44 33 44 (<on/off>)
Level status 23 45 33 45 (<count=10><level data>)
resolution status 23 46 33 46 (<on/off>)
midi sync out status23 47 33 47 (<midi sync>)
MTC offset mode status 23 48 33 48 (<MTC offset mode>)
vari pitch status 23 49 33 49 (<count=3><on/off><vari pitch>)
signature map 24 01(<event number>) 34 01 (<signature map>)
tempo set map 24 02(<event number>) 34 02 (<tempo set map>)
preroll time 24 04 34 04 (<mmc time>)
remain time 24 05 34 05 (<mmc time>)
frame rate status 24 06 34 06 (<frame rate>)
Fs rate status 24 07 34 07 (<Fs rate>)
time base status 24 08 34 08 (<time base>)

<Note 2>
There is a limitation on specifying the <channel><channel> setting. For details,
refer to "Explanation on Command/Mode Set" mentioned in later pages.

136
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

<Allocation of GP0~GP7>
Edit point memory of this equipment is alloted to the response/information field
of 08~0F (GP0~GP7) as shown below.
GP7 however, will be used as the work memory for small adjusting of the
registered figure (Refer to Examples 4 and 5).

<Response/Information Field>
08 GP0 : locate memory 09 GP1 : clipboard in memory
0A GP2 : clipboard out memory 0B GP3 : start memory
0C GP4 : auto punch in memory 0D GP5 : auto punch out memory
0E GP6 : end memory 0F GP7 : reserved

[Example 1] <mmc time> is registered in the start memory (using the write command).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <write = 40> <count> <GP3 = 0B> <mmc time> F7

[Example 2] Locate memory is recalled (using the read command).

F0 7F <device ID> 06 <read = 42> <count> <GP3 = 08> <mmc time> F7

[Example 3] On-the-fly registering in the punch in memory (using the move command).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <move = 4C> <count> <destination = 0C (GP4) > <source =
selected time code = 01> F7

[Example 4] When + 1 frame is to be set in the punch in memory (using the add
command).
* Time figure to be added is pre-registered in GP7 (Set 00h 00m 00s 01f in GP7).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <add = 4D> <count> <destination = 0C (GP4)> <source #1 = 01
(GP4)> <source #2 = 0F (GP7)> F7

[Example 5] When -1 frame is to be set in the punch in memory (using the subtract
command).
* Time figure to be subtracted is pre-registered in GP7 (Set 00h 00m 00s 01f in
GP7).
F0 7F <device ID> 06 <substract = 4E> <count> <destination = 0C (GP4)>
<source#1 = 0C (GP4)> <source #2 = 0F (GP7)>F7

137
Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

Data Type
<loop op.mode> 12=stop
Indicates the next operating mode following locating to the start point (GP3) upon arriving
at the end point (GP6) by the play mode. In D2424, 12=stop only is effective.
<post locate mode> 12=stop
15=play
Specifies operating mode in which D2424 should enter upon completing the locate
operation. Corresponds to the setting of AUTO PLAY ON ("15")/OFF ("12") on the main
unit.
<count> 01 ∼ 7F
Specifies succeeding data byte numbers.
<mmc track> Complies to the MMC (MIDI MACHINE CONTROL) standard track bit map.
In D2424, you always need to specify two byte combinations of "r0" and "r1."
<edit message> 00 = no message
01 = completed (completion flag)
02 = active (execution flag)
02<mmc time> = Indicates unprocessed time by active (execution flag) and <mmc time>.
02<count><mmc track> = Indicates source track by active (execution flag) and <mmc
track>. Used for clipboard play.
03 = cancel (execution stop)
05 = Indicates rehearsal (rehearsal mode of auto rec). Possible of undo.
06 = Indicates take (take mode of auto rec). Possible of undo.
10 = over value error
10 <mmc time> = Capacity shortage time is indicated by over value error (error by
capacity shortage) and <mmc time>. In copy paste, it indicates capacity shortage time
required for a minimum one time paste.
11 = Indicates in point error (incorrect in point).
12 = Indicates out point error (incorrect out point).
14 = Indicates void data (data necessary for paste does not exist).
18 = Indicates track select error (track necessary to execute copy/move or erase/cut is not
correctly setup).
19<repeat count> = Indicates repeat number error and repeat numbers executable by
<repeat count>.
1A = Indicates disable rec (record disable mode).
25 = Indicates can't undo rehearsal (rehearsal mode of auto rec). Impossible to undo.
26 = Indicates can't undo take (take mode of auto rec). Impossible toundo.
71 = Indicates on.
72 = Indicates off.
<mmc time> hr mn sc fr {ff/st} complies to the MMC standard time code.
<on/off> 70 = default
71 = on
72 = off
<repeat count> 01 ∼ 7F
Especially when executing commands such as paste, the number of pasting times to be
continuously repeated following the auto punch in point is specified.
<channel> 00 ∼ 56, 7F
Select recorder tracks 1~56. "00" in particular, is not specified (default setting). "7F"
indicates input/output of Adat optical. For details, refer to explanation on setting the
Command/Mode.
<lock enable> 00 = lock disable, chase disable
01 = lock enable, chase enable
Corresponds to SLAVE ON ("01")/OFF ("00") in the main unit.
<lock status> 00 = lock disable, chase disable
01 = lock enable (unlocked), chase enable (unlocked)
11 = lock enable (locked), chase enable (locked)
<program> 01 ∼ 7F
Indicates program numbers (P1 ∼ P99) on the main unit. However, D2424 can specify
only 01 (corresponds to P01) ∼ 63H (corresponds to P99).
<lock mode> 40 = Free
42 = Vari
Indicates the slave mode when this equipment is set to slave ON.

138
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

<signature map> bar2, bar1, bar0, sign, sigd

bar2: The 100th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
bar1: The 10th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
bar0: The 1 digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
sign: Numerator of the signature to be set is expressed in BCD.
sigd: Denominator of the signature to be set is expressed in BCD.
When specified as sign=00 and sigd=00, signature data of that bar position will be
deleted. Also, bar2=bar1=bar0=sign=sigd=00 indicates "no corresponding data"
(such as when a figure specified by <event number> do not exist at receiving the
signature map request).
<tempo set map> bar2, bar1, bar0, beat, tmp2, tmp1, tmp0
bar2: The 100th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
bar1: The 10th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
bar0: The 1 digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD.
beat: The beat figure is expressed in BCD.
tmp2: Numerator of the tempo to be set is expressed in BCD.
tmp1: Denominator of the tempo to be set is expressed in BCD.
tmp0: The 1 digit of the tempo is expressed in BCD.
When specified as tmp2=tmp1=tmp0=00, tempo data of that bar and meter position
will be deleted. Also, bar2=bar1=bar0=sign=sigd=00 indicates "no corresponding
data" (such as when a figure specified by <event number> do not exist at receiving
the signature map request).
<event number> When one data registered by <signature map> and <tempo set map> is declared as
one event, the number of events from head of the tune (the umpteenth event
counted from head of the tune) must be specified. <event number="00"> is the first
event.
<midi sync> 00: OFF
01: CLK (MIDI CLOCK)
02: MTC
This corresponds to "MIDI SYNC OUT" of the SETUP menu.
<vari pitch> Will be composed of two bytes (Q, P).
Q: 0qqqqqqq (binary) -> <vari data> = "qqqqqqqppppppp" A 14 bit data of X0.1
P: 0qqqqqqq (binary) attached with a minus symbol.
Vari-pitch must be specified, at +0.1% when MSB (q)=0 (Example: 0000000000001),
and at -0.1% when MSB (q)=1 (Example: 1111111111111).
<frame rate> 00: 30nd
01: 29.97nd
02: 29.97df
03: 25
04: 24
05: 30df
Corresponds to selecting "FRAME RATE" of the SETUP menu.
<MTC offset mode> 00: ABS
01: signature
Corresponds to selecting "MTC OFFSET MODE" of the SETUP menu.
<time base> 00: ABS
01: BAR BEAT
02: MTC
Corresponds to selecting "TIME BASE SEL" of the SETUP menu.
<level data> t1, t2 ...... tn
n: Indicates the track number.
tn: Indicates absolute 8 bits of the Audio 16 bit data (Range: 00 ∼ 7F).

139
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

12 47 (<count><mmc track>): erase command

Explanation on the Command/Mode Set When this command is received, the D2424LV will erase the
12 22 (<on/off>): loop on/off command data (writes in "0" data) in the section from the pre-registered
The command for setting the "loop mode on/off" (=ON/OFF of auto punch in point through auto punch out point in the track
AUTO RTN) of the D2424LV. Default figure of the loop opera- specified by <mmc track>. Since time corresponding to length
tion mode is "12=stop" and this cannot be changed. of the erase section is required to complete the erase opera-
tion, the D2424LV will immediately reply by "32 47 (<edit mes-
12 28 (<post locate mode>): post locate command sage=02 (active)>)" after receiving the command.
The command for setting the "post locate mode" (=ON/OFF of After the completion of erase operation, "32 47 (<edit mes-
AUTO PLAY) of the D2424LV. It will stop after locating if "post sage=01 (completed)>)" will be transmitted.
locate mode=12." It will enter play after locating if "post locate If erase cannot be executed due to improper figures of the pre-
mode=15." registered auto punch in point/auto punch out point, incor-
rect track section, etc., the corresponding <edit message> will
12 2D (<on/off>): auto rec command be replied.
The command for setting "auto rec mode on/off" (=ON/OFF of
AUTO PUNCH) of the D2424LV. Upon receiving this command, 12 49: clipboard play command
the D2424LV will immediately reply the operating condition When this command is received, the D2424LV will playback
by sending "32 2D (<edit message>)". once from the head of the sound data copied in the clipboard
by the copy clip and move clip commands.
12 41 (<lock enable>): lock enable command Immediately after receiving the command, the D2424LV will
The command for setting "slave mode on/off" (setup menu) of reply with "32 49 (<edit message=02 (active)><count><mmc
the D2424LV. track>)." The sound data track number is indicated by (mmc
track>.
12 42 (<lock mode>): lock mode command Upon completion of playback, "32 49 (<edit message=01 (com-
The command for setup of the slave mode (setup menu) when pleted) is sent and clipboard play is ended. If there is no sound
this equipment is set to "slave mode on." data in the clipboard, "32 49 (<edit message=14 (void data)>)"
will be sent and clipboard play operation will be interrupted.
12 45 (<count><mmc track>) : copy clip command
When this command is received, the D2424LV will copy (mul- 12 4A: undo command
tiple number of tracks can be copied simultaneously) the sound Upon receiving this command, the D2424LV will revert to the
data, as data for copy paste, from the pre-registered clipboard- condition prior to editing copy paste,erase, move paste, cut,
in point to the clipboard-out point in the track specified by redo operation. With completion of undo operation, D2424LV
<mmc track>. will reply with "32 4A (<edit message=01(completed)>)."
With completion of copying the data into the clipboard, the If the D2424LV is not possible to undo, "32 4A (<edit mes-
D2424LV will immediately reply with "32 45 (<edit message=01 sage=00 (no message)>)" will be replied.
(completed)>)". If copy cannot be executed due to improper
figures of the pre-registered clipboard in/clipboard out points 12 4B: redo command
or incorrect track section, the corresponding <edit message> When this command is received, the D2424LV will return to
will be returned. the condition prior to undo operation.
With completion of redo operation, D2424LV will reply with
12 46 (<count=01><repeat count>): copy paste command "32 4B (<edit message=01(completed)>)."
12 46 (<count><repeat count><mmc track>): copy paste com- If the D2424LV is not possible to redo, "32 4B (<edit message=00
mand (no message)>)" will be replied.
When this command is received, the D2424LV will paste the
sound data which has been copied into the clipboard, on the 12 4D (<count><mmc track>): move clip command
same track from the pre-registered auto punch in point as the When this command is received, the D2424LV will copy (mul-
starting point for the number of time specified by <repeat tiple tracks can be copied simultaneously) the sound data from
count>. However, if the sound data length in the clipboard is the pre-registered clipboard in point to the clipboard out point,
less than 10ms, the specifying the <repeat count> will be lim- as data for move paste operation. With completion copying
ited to "01." Also, by specifying <mmc track>, paste can be the data into the clipboard, the D2424LV will immediately re-
executed on other tracks in mono (in one track units) or stereo ply with "32 4D (<edit message=01 (completed)>)." If copy
units (in combinations of tracks 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8.....). cannot be executed by the reason of pre-registered improper
Since time corresponding to length of the copy clipped sound clipboard in/clipboard out point figures or incorrect track sec-
data is required to complete the copy paste operation, the tion, etc., the corresponding <edit message> will be replied.
D2424LV immediately replies with "32 46(<edit message=02
12 4E (<count=01><repeat count>): move paste command
(active)>)" after receiving the command.
Successively upon completing the paste operation, "32 46 (<edit 12 4E (<count><repeat count><mmc track>): move paste com-
message=01(completed)>)" is transmitted. mand
If paste cannot be executed due to improper figures of the pre- When this command is received, the D2424LV will paste the
registered auto punch in point, insufficient disc capacity, no sound data which have been move clipped in the clipboard,
sound data in the clipboard, etc., the corresponding <edit mes- for the number of times specified by <repeat count> on the
sage> will be replied. same track from the pre-registered auto punch in point as the
starting point.

140
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

At the same time, the move clipped original sound data will be selected will be Adat In inputs. "<channel=0><channel=0>"
erased (data "0" is written in). However, when sound data length indicates the normal analog input.
in the clipboard is less than 10ms, specifying the <repeat count>
will be limited to "01." 13 42 (<channel><channel>): digital out ch.select command
Also, by specifying the <mmc track>, paste operation can be The source channel for digital out is selected.
executed on other tracks in mono (one track unit) or stereo Normally, the first <channel> shown will be the SPDIF L chan-
units (tracks 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 7-8....). nel data, and the second <channel> the SPDIF R channel out-
Since time corresponding to length of the move clipped sound put. (<00> <00>) is the default setting. By FDMS-3 V3.0, any
data is required to complete the move paste operation, D2424LV channel within "1 ~ 8" (or 9 ~ 16 or 17 ~ 24) can be selected.
will immediately reply with "32 4E (<edit message=02 (ac-
tive)>)" after receiving the command. 13 42 (<channel=7F><channel=0>): Adat out select command
Following completion of the move paste operation, "32 4E (<edit In a device which can be switched between SPDIF and Adat, if
message = 01 (completed)>)" will be sent. the first display is <channel=7F>, then Adat Out can be setup.
If paste cannot be executed due to improper figures of the
previously registered auto punch in point, insufficient disc ca- 13 43(<program>): program change command
pacity, no sound data is in the clipboard, etc., the correspond- The command for PROGRAM CHANGE of the D2424LV.
ing <edit message> will be replied. The present program number can be changed to the figure
indicated by <program>.
12 4F (<channel><channel>): track exchange command
When the D2424LV receives this command, the track can be 13 44 (<on/off>): click on/off command
exchange between the specified <channel><channel>. Espe- The command for setting the metronome on/off of the
cially, if the first <channel=00><channel=01>, then exchange D2424LV. When ON is set, the metronome signal will be fed to
by grouping will be executed between channel 1-8 and chan- the track 24 output of the D2424LV.
nel 17-24, and if the next byte <channel=00><channel=02>,
then the exchange will be between channel 9-16 and channel 13 46 (<on/off>): Bar/Beat Resolution ON/OFF command
17-24. If it cannot be executed for some reason, an error mes- The command for ON/OFF of the bar/beat resolution function
sage will be sent back. of this equipments' current program.

13 3E: product new program command 13 47 (<midi sync>): Midi Sync Out command
When the D2424LV receives this command, a new program is The setup command for MIDI Sync Out mode of this equip-
compiled and the current program is transferred to the new ments' current program.
program. As compilation of the new program is comparatively
short time, it is replied with "33 3E (<edit message=01 (com- 13 48 (<MTC offset mode>): MTC offset mode command
pleted)>)" immediately upon completion of execution. The setup command for MTC offset mode of this equipment’s
If it cannot be executed for some reason, an error message will current program.
be sent back.
13 49 (<count=3> <on/off> <vari data>): Vari pitch command
13 3F: delete current program command 13 49 (<count=1> <on/off>): Vari pitch command
When the D2424LV receives this command, the current pro- The command for setting this equipments' vari pitch ON/OFF
gram is deleted and succeeding programs moved up and and pitch data.
renumberd. If the deleted program is the only tune existing in Control of ON/OFF only is possible at <count=1> and both ON/
the track, a new program will be made automatically. OFF and pitch data can be set at <count=3>.
As this delete current program is executed in a comparatively
short time, "33 3F (<edit message=01 (completed)>)" will be 14 01 (<signature map>): Signature set command
sent back immediately upon completing the execution. The command for setting the meter of this equipment. If a new
If it cannot be executed for some reason, an error message will data is registered at the bar position where a data exists, the
be sent back. former data will be written over. When this command is re-
ceived, this equipment will reply with "34 01 (<edit message>)."
13 41 (<channel><channel>): digital in ch.select command Upon completing the registeration, <edit message> will reply
The audio signal input from SPDIF digital in to assigned to the with "01 (completed)," or with "10 (over value error)" if
destination track specified by <channel>. The first <channel> registeration is attempted at a non-existing point or an errone-
shown in the command is the SPDIF L channel input, and the ous figure is used.
second <channel> the R channel input. "<channel=0> <chan-
14 02 (<tempo set map>): Tempo set command
nel =0>" indicates the normal analog input. In the D2424LV,
The command for tempo set of this equipment. If a new data is
channels 1 and 2 only can be selected for other than <chan-
registered in a bar/meter where data already exists, the former
nel=0>.
data will be written over. When this command is received, this
equipment will reply with "34 02 (<edit message>)." Upon
13 41 (<channel=7F><count><mmc track>): Adat in select com-
completing the registeration, <edit message> will reply with
mand
"01 (completed)," or with "10 (over value error)" if registeration
Channel = 7F indicates that it is Adat In. Normally, it will be
is attempted at a non-existing point or an erroneous figure is
"<count=0>" and all channels will be inputs from Adat In.
used.
If <count=0><mmc track> is indicates, then only the tracks

141
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

14 03 : Tempo map all erase command 45 (<edit message=14 (void data)>)."

When this command is received, this equipment will erase all
meter and tempo data in the current program and thus return 22 46: copy paste status request
it to the default state (meter=4/4, tempo: =120). Also, when The command inquiring execution status of copy paste edit-
this command is received, this equipment will reply with "34 ing. When this command is received, the D2424LV will reply
03 (<edit message>)." Upon completing the registeration, <edit with either "32 46 (<edit message=02><mmc time>)" or "32
message> will reply with "01 (completed)," or with "10 (over 46 (<edit message=00>)." <mmc time> indicates unprocessed
value error)" if registeration is attempted at a non-existing point time until completion.
or an erroneous figure is used.
22 47: erase status request
14 04 (<mmc time>): Preroll time set command The command inquiring execution status of erase.
The command for setting the current program preroll time at When this command is received, the D2424LV will reply by
the figure indicated by <mmc time>. either "32 47 (<edit message=02><mmc time>)" or "32 47
(<edit message=00>)." <mmc time> indicates unprocessed time
14 06 (<frame rate>): Frame rate set command until completion.
The command for setting the current program frame rate at
the figure indicated by <frame rate>. 22 4D: move clip status request
The command inquiring the clipboard status. If there is a move
14 08 (<time base>): Time base set command paste data on the clipboard, the D2424LV will reply with "32
The command for setting the current program time base of 4D (<edit message=01>)." If data in the clipboard is for copy
this equipment to that indicated by <time base>. paste or there is no valid data on it, "32 4D (<edit message=14
(void data)>)" will be replied.

22 4E: move paste status request

The command inquiring the move paste execution status.
The Status Request Command When this command is received, the D2424LV will reply with
"32 4E (<edit message=02><mmc time>)" or "32 4E (<edit mes-
22 21: loop operation status request sage=00>)." <mmc time> indicates unprocessed time until
The command inquiring the loop operation mode setup sta- completion.
tus. The D2424LV will reply with "32 21 (<loop op.mode=12>)."
23 41: digital in channel status request
22 22: loop on/off status request 23 41: adat in channel status request
The command inquiring the loop on/off (=ON/OFF of AUTO The command inquiring the digital in channel setup status.
RETURN) setup status. The D2424LV will reply with "32 22 When this command is received, the D2424LV will reply with
(<on/off>)." “33 41 (<channel> <channel>)” or “33 41 (<channel=7F>
<count> <mmc track>).”
22 28: post locate status request
The command inquiring the post locate mode (ON/OFF of AUTO 23 42: digital out channel status request
PLAY) setup status. The D2424LV will reply with "32 28 (<post 23 42: adat out channel status request
locate mode>)".
The inquiring the digital out channel setup status.
When this command is received, the D2424LV will reply with
22 2D: auto rec status request
“33 42 (<channel><channel>)” or “33 42 (<channel=7F> <chan-
The command inquiring the auto rec mode setup status and
nel=0>).
this is replied by "32 2D (<edit message>)." Reply from the
D2424LV against this status request will be either one of the 23 43: program status request
following:
The command inquiring the presently operating program num-
<edit message> =05: Possible to undo rehearsal mode.
ber. When this command is received, the D2424LV will reply
=06: Possible to undo take mode.
with "33 43 (<program>)."
=72: off
23 44: click on/off status request
22 41: lock status request
The command inquiring the metronome on/off status of the
The command inquiring the slave on/off setup status and the
D2424LV. When this command is received, the D2424LV will
lock status. The D2424LV will reply with "32 41 (<lock sta-
reply with "33 44 (<on/off>)."
tus>)."
23 45: level status request
22 42 : lock mode status request
The command inquiring the present output level data of the
The command for inquiring the lock mode setup status and
1~24 tracks. In the D2424LV as the level data is updated about
this is replied with "32 42 <lock mode>."
every 40msec., inquiry in 40msec. units is effective.
When this command is received, the D2424LV will reply with
22 45: copy clip status request
"33 45 (<count=10><level data>)."
The command inquiring the clipboard condition. If there is a
copy paste data in the clipboard, the D2424LV will reply with
"32 45 (<edit message=01>)." If data in the clipboard is for
move paste or there is no valid data in it, it will reply will "32

142
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

23 46: resolution status request Explanation on the Status Reply

The command for inquiring the resolution on/off setup status.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with 32 21 (<loop op.mode>): loop operation mode status repry
"33 46 <on/off>." This is the reply against the "22 21" loop operation status re-
quest command. <loop op.mode=12> is the only status data of
D2424LV and any other setting is not permissible.
23 47: midi sync out status request
The command for inquiring on status of the midi sync out 32 22 (<on/off>): loop on/off status reply
setup condition. When this command is received, this equip- This is the reply against "22 22" loop on/off status request.
ment replies with "33 47 <midi sync>."
32 28 (<post locate mode>): post locate mode status reply
23 48: MTC offset mode status request This is the reply against "22 28" post locate status request.
The command for inquiring the MTC offset mode setup status. <post locate mode=12 or 15> is the only status data of D2424LV
When this command is received, this equipment replies with and any other setting is not permissible.
"33 48 <MTC offset mode>."
32 2D (<edit message>): auto rec status reply
This is the reply against the "12 2D" auto rec command or the
23 49: vari pitch status request
"22 2D" auto rec status request.
The command for inquiring status of vari pitch on/off and vari
pitch data. When this command is received, this equipment 32 41 (<lock status>): lock status repry
replies with "33 49 (<count=3> <on/off> <vari data>)." This is the reply against the "22 41" lock status request.

24 01 (<event number>): signature map request 32 42 (<lock mode>): lock mode status reply
The command for inquiring the meter setup. Order number This the reply against the "22 42" lock mode status request.
counting from the leading tune must be specified in the event
number (The first event is expressed as "event number=00." 32 45 (<edit message>): copy clip status reply
When this command is received, this equipment replies with This is the reply against the "12 45" copy clip command or the
"22 45" copy clip status request.
"34 01 (<signature map>)."
32 46 (<edit message>): copy paste status reply
24 02 (<event number>): Tempo set map request
32 46 (<edit message><mmc time>): copy paste status reply
The command for inquiring tempo data. Order number from
This is the reply against the "12 46" copy paste command or
the leading tune must be specified in the event number (The the "22 46" copy paste status request. <mmc time> indicates
first event is expressed as "event number=00." the unprocessed time until completion of copy paste editing.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with
"34 02 (<tempo set map>)." 32 47 (<edit message>): erase status reply
32 47 (<edit message><mmc time>): erase status reply
24 04: preroll time status request This is the reply against "12 47" erase command or "22 47"
The command for inquiring the preroll time setup status. erase status request.
When this command is received, this equipment replies with
"34 04 (<mmc time>)." 32 49 (<edit message><count><mmc track>): clipboard play
status reply
24 05: remain time request This is the reply against the "12 49" clipboard play command.
The command for inquiring the disk remaining time which is If there is no sound data in the clipboard, "32 49"(<edit mes-
recordable. When this command is received, this equipment sage=14 (void data)>)" will be replied. <mmc track> indicates
replies with "34 05 (<mmc time>)." the sound data track number.

32 4A (<edit message>): undo status reply

24 06: frame rate status request
This is the reply against the "12 4A" undo command. Either
The command for inquiring the frame rate setup status.
<edit message=01 (completed) or <edit message=14 (void
When this command is received, this equipment replies with data)> will be replied.
"34 06 (<frame rate>)."
32 4B (<edit message>): redo status reply
24 08: time base status This is the reply against the "12 4B" redo command. Either
The command for inquiring the setup status of the time base <edit message=01 (completed)> or <edit message=14 (void
shown in the display. When this command is received, this data)> will be replied.
equipment replies with "3408 (<time base>)."
32 4D (<edit message>): move clip status reply
This is the reply against the "12 4D" move clip command or
"22 4D" move clip status request.

32 4E (<edit message>): move paste status reply

32 4E (<edit message><mmc time>): move paste status reply
The reply against the "12 4E" move paste command or the "22
4E" move paste status request. <mmc time> indicates the un-
processed time until completion of move paste editing.

143
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (MIDI Implementation Chart/MMC List)

32 4F (<edit message>): track exchange status reply 34 02 (<tempo set map>): tempo set map status reply
This is the reply against the "12 4F" track exchange command. The reply against "24 02"(<event number>)tempo set map re-
quest. Tempo set map of the event indicated by the <event
33 3E (<edit message>): product new program status reply number> is replied. If there is no event specified (Example:
This is the reply against the "13 3E" product new program Such as when <event number=20> is requested although only
command. 10 is setup for tempo), it will be replied with all figures at 00 of
the <signature map>.
33 41 (<channel> <channel>): digital in channel status reply
33 41 (<channel=7F> <count> <mmc track>): adat in status re- 34 04 (<mmc time>): preroll set map status reply
ply This is the reply against "34 04" preroll time status request
This is the reply against the "23 41" digital in ch. st. request. and this is replied with the presently set preroll time.
The first <channel> indicates the track number assigned to the
34 05 (<mmc time>): remain time reply
L channel of the digital audio signal (S/P DIF) from the DATA
This is the reply against "24 05" remain time request, and is
IN connector, and the second <channel> the track number as-
replied with the recordable disc remaining time.
signed to the R channel. If digital in is set to "Adat," the reply
for the first <channel> will be 7F and then <count> <mmc 34 06 (<frame rate>): frame rate status reply
track>, in this order. In the <mmc track>, the track bit map This is the reply against "24 06" frame rate status request, and
which is the Adat input, is expressed by "1" (In this equipment, is replied with the presently set frame rate.
the track actually locked is expressed as “1”).
34 07 (<fs rate>): fs rate status reply
33 42 (<channel> <channel>): digital out channel status reply This is the reply against "24 07" fs rate status request, and is
33 42 (<channel=7F> <channel=00>): adat out status reply replied with the presently set fs (sampling frequency).
This is the reply against the "23 42" digital out ch. st. request.
The first <channel> indicates the track number assigned to the 34 08 (<time base>): time base status reply
L channel output of the digital audio signal (S/P DIF) from the This is the reply against "24 08" time base status request, and
DATA OUT connector, and the second <channel> the track is replied with the presently set time base (in the display).
number as signed to the R channel output. If digital out is set
to "Adat," the reply for the first <channel> will be 7F and that
for the second <channel> will be 00.

33 43 (<program>): program status reply

This is the reply against the "23 43" program status request.
<program> indicates the presently operating program num-
ber.

33 44 (<on/off>): click status reply

This is the reply against the "23 44" click status request.
It indicates the on/off setting of the metronome function.

33 45 (<count=10><level data>): level status reply

This is the reply against the "23 45" level status request and it
indicates the present track 1-24 output level data.
In the D2424LV, as level data is updated 40msec., it will be
effective if inquiry is made in 40msec. units.

33 46 (<on/off>): bar/beat resolution status reply

This is the reply against "23 46" bar/beat resolution status
request.

33 47 (<midi sync>): midi sync out status reply

This is the reply against "23 47" midi sync out status request.

33 48 (<MTC offset mode>): MTC offset mode status reply

This is the reply against "23 48" MTC offset mode status re-
quest.

33 49 (<count=3> <on/off> <vari data>): vari pitch status reply

This is the reply against "23 49" vari pitch status request and is
indicating the vari pitch function on/off and the present vari
pitch setup figure.

34 01 (<signature map>): signature map status reply

This is the reply against "24 01" (<event number>) signature
map request. The signature map of the event indicated by the
<event number> is replied. If there is no event specified (Ex-
ample: Such as when <event number=5> is requested even
though there is only 5 meters registered), it will be replied with
all figures at 00 of the <signature map>.

144
 Model D2424LV Reference Manual (Maintenance/Specifications)

Maintenance
Cleaning the exterior
* For normal cleaning, use a soft dry cloth.
For stubborn dirt, moisten a cloth in diluted detergent, wring it out firmly, and wipe the dirt off.
Then polish with a dry cloth. Never use solvents such as alcohol, thinner or benzene, since these will
damage the printing and finish of the exterior.

Specifications
Recorder Section
Recording Medium : 3.5 inch, E-IDE type hard disk Data Output (1-8, 9-16, 17-24)
Recording Format : FDMS3 version 3 Connector : Optical
Save/Load Format : SCSI, FDIO-1 version 2 Format : IEC 60958 (S/P DIF)
Sampling Frequency : 44.1kHz, 48kHz, ,88.2kHz, Alesis Proprietary Multichannel
96kHz Optical Digital Interface
Quantization : 16bit / 24bit linear, 24bit (at
<Note>: The [DATA INPUT] and [DATA OUTPUT] connectors
88.2/96kHz)
do not support 96kHz FS adat digital signals.
A/D Converter : 24bit Delta Sigma 128 times
over sampling WORD Input
D/A Converter : 24bit Delta Sigma 128 times Connector : BNC
over sampling Input Level : TTL level
Recording Tracks : 24 real tracks + 32 additional
tracks (at 44.1kHz/16 or WORD Output
24bit, 48kHz/16 or 24bit) Connector : BNC
: 8 real tracks + 48 additional Output Level : TTL level
tracks (at 88.2kHz/24bit, or
96kHz/24bit) RS-422
Recording Time : Approx. 3,770 minutes (20GB) Connector : D-sub 9pin
(mono track) (at 16bit/44.1kHz) Protocol : Sony 9pin protocol, ES buss
: Approx. 1,150 minutes (20GB)
RS-422 THRU
(at 24bit/96kHz)
Connector : D-sub 9pin
Pitch Control : +/- 6% (0.1 step)
Output : Direct output of RS-422
Crossfade : 10msec, 5msec
(at 24bit/96kHz) MIDI In/Out/Thru
R/P Freq. Response : 20Hz to 20kHz Connector : DIN 5pin
(at fs: 44.1/44.8kHz)
: 20Hz to 43kHz +/-2dB Punch In/Out
(at fs: 96kHz) Connector : 6mm dia phone jack
Dynamic Range : More than 108dB (typical) (optional model 8051)

SCSI Port (for backup)

Input/Output Connector : D-sub 50pin (half pitch)
* Input/Output (0dBu=0.775Vrms, 0dBV=1Vrms)
* Ref. Level: -12dB
* Switchable to balanced (+4dBu)/unbalanced
(-10dBV), (Can be set by the SETUP mode; default: Physical
+4dBu). Dimensions : 482(W) x 141(H) x 381(D)mm
Weight : 7.0kg
Analog Input (1 to 24) (included remote controller)
Power Requirement : 120VAC 60Hz
Connector : TRS Phone jack (Balanced)
230V ~ 50/60Hz
Input Impedance : More than 10k Ω
Power Consumption : 60W
Ref. Input Level : +4dBu
(Switchable to unbalanced/-10dBV.)
* Specifications and appearance are subject to
change without notice for product improvement.
Analog Output (1 to 24)
Connector : TRS Phone jack (Balanced)
Load Impedance : More than 10k Ω * "Adat" and the symbol are trademarks of
Ref. Output Level : +4dBu
Alesis Corporation.
(Switchable to unbalanced/-10dBV.)

Data Input (1-8, 9-16, 17-24) * FDMS-3: Fostex Disk Management System-3 Ver.3
Connector : Optical
Format : IEC 60958 (S/P DIF) * FDIO-1 Ver.2: Fostex Data In Out-1 Ver.2
Alesis Proprietary Multichannel
Optical Digital Interface
* INPUT 1-8 only are effective when using S/P DIF.

145
 APPENDIX
<Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed>

This appendix is the operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346
TC/SYNC card installed.

<Installation of the optional card>

The TC/SYNC card should be installed into the recorder at a FOSTEX service
station. Do not try to install the card by yourself. Ask your local FOSTEX
dealer for the installation after purchasing the Model 8346.

<Notes when requesting the installation>

There is the possibility of damaging the hard disk when transporting the re-
corder. Before transporting the recorder to our service department for the
installation of the TC/SYNC card, remove the hard disk from the recorder.
Be sure to keep the removed hard disk carefully.
APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

Contents of Appendix

Names and Functions.........................................................................3

Introduction..........................................................................................4

Additional features..............................................................................4

Operations for the additional SETUP menu......................................4

“Ref. TC ?” menu setting........................................................................4
“Clock Sel ?” menu setting....................................................................5
“Sync Preset ?” menu setting................................................................5
“Virtual LTC ?” menu setting.................................................................6
“Offset Disp ?” menu setting.................................................................6

Generator Setup..................................................................................7
How to enter the Generator Setup mode............................................7
Setting the time code recording mode................................................7
Editing the internal generator time code...........................................8
Force jamming to external time code..................................................8
Selecting the output time code............................................................8
Editing the chase offset.........................................................................9
Erasing the recorded time code...........................................................9

Chase sync to external time code....................................................10

Synchronization to word clock or video signal...............................11

Connection to a digital mixing console...........................................11

Contorl from a video editor (RS-422)...............................................13

2
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

Names and Functions

1 2 3 4 5

1. [VIDEO IN] termination switch 4. [TIME CODE INPUT] connector

(75Ω termination ON/OFF) (BNC connector)
Used to terminate the VIDEO INPUT signal and Receives external time code (LTC).
usually set to ON.
5. [TIME CODE OUTPUT] connector
2. [VIDEO IN] connector (BNC connector) (BNC connector)
Receives an external video sync signal (inter- Outputs an LTC from the recorder (equiva-
lace or composite) when synchronizing the lent to the MTC displayed on the panel) or
recorder to a video sync signal. time code from the internal TC generator.

3. [VIDEO THRU] connector (BNC connector)

Outputs the video sync signal received from
the VIDEO INPUT connector.

3
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

Introduction Operations for the additional SETUP menu

The Model 8346 is a TC/SYNC card designed as an
option for digital multitrack recorders. • "Ref. TC?" menu setting
By installing the TC/SYNC card into the recorder, 1. Turn on the power of the recorder.
the recorder can synchronize to external LTC or
video signal, as well as an external word clock. 2. Press the [SETUP] key while the recorder is
So you can use the recorder synchronized with video stopped to show the SETUP menu.
machines in video post production studios where
the synchronization between audio and video is in- 3. Select the “Ref. TC?” menu by using the Jog dial
dispensable, or make digital sound recordings in a and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The reference time code currently selected starts
system using a digital mixing console.
flashing (the default reference time code setting when
the Model 8346 is installed is “LTC”).
Additional features The outlined box surrounds the flashing item on the
display.
By installing the Model 8346 into the recorder, the
following SETUP menus and GEN setup function are SETUP

added. These SETUP menus are used when the re- OL OL BIT 24

corder is synchronized to an external LTC or locked

0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12

to a video signal. 18
24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT

∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

1. SETUP mode “Ref. TC?” menu

This menu selects the reference time code used as a mas- Flashing
ter time code for the recorder.
The reference time code can be selected between MTC
SETUP

(MIDI time code) and LTC according to the incoming time OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3

code. The default setting after formatting a disk is “LTC”. 6

9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
2. SETUP mode “Clock Sel?” menu
This menu selects the reference clock of the recorder with
the 8346.
If the 8346 is not installed, you can select the reference
4. Select the reference time code by using the Jog
clock from “Int,” “Auto” and “Word”. dial.
If the 8346 is installed, “Video” also can be the reference You can select between “LTC” and “MTC” (MIDI time
clock in addition to the three options above. code).

3. SETUP mode “Sync Preset?” menu 5. After selecting the reference time code, press the
This menu is effective when the recorder with the 8346 [EXECUTE/YES] key.
installed is used in sync with a digital mixing console. The selected reference time code is confirmed (set) and
You can select from some preset options according to your the display changes to the similar one to the upper
system to get the best synchronization performance. example in step 3 above where “?” flashes.

4. SETUP mode “Virtual LTC?” menu 6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] button) to
This menu selects whether recording/playback of the vir- exit the SETUP mode.
tual LTC is enabled or disabled. The default setting is
“Ena.” (Enabled).
You can check the time information of the incoming
reference time code in the front panel display of the
5. SETUP mode “Offset Disp?” menu
recorder.
This menu selects whether or not displaying the real off-
See "Chase sync to external time code" below for details.
set between the incoming reference time code (LTC or MTC)
and the displayed MTC (output LTC).
The real offset is displayed instead of REMAIN when dis-
playing the MTC.

6. GENERATOR setup functions

The GENERATOR setup functions allows recording/eras-
ing an external or internal (generator) time code, force-
jamming to external time code, setting the LTC output,
and setting the chase offset value between incoming time
code and the MTC.

4
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

• "Clock Sel?" menu setting • "Sync Preset?" menu setting

Execute step 1 and 2 in "Ref. TC ?" menu setting" Execute step 1 and 2 in "Ref. TC ?" menu setting"
described above. described earlier.

3. Select the “Clock Sel?” menu by using the Jog 3. Select the “Sync Preset ?” menu by using the
dial and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. Jog dial and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The reference clock currently selected starts flashing (the The sync preset setting currently selected is shown (the
default reference clock setting when the Model 8346 is default setting when the Model 8346 is installed is “Int.
installed is “INT”). Vari? Ana.”).

SETUP
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
OL OL BIT 24 0 0
0 0 3 3
3 3 6 6 FS
6 6 FS 9 9
9 9 kHz
kHz 12 12
12 12 18 18 CLOCK
18 18 CLOCK 24 24 INT
24 24 INT 30 30
30 30 42 42
42 42 ∞ ∞
∞ ∞
1 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
2 3

Flashing Flashing

SETUP SETUP

OL OL BIT 24 OL OL
0 0 0 0
BIT 24
3 3 3 3
6 6 FS 6 6 FS
9 9 kHz 9 9
12 12 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT 24 24
30 30 INT
30 30
42 42 42 42
∞ ∞ ∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

4. Select the desired reference clock by using the 4. Select the desired sync preset combination by
Jog dial. using the Jog dial from the followings;
You can select from “Auto,” “Word” and “Video” as well The following table shows the function of each preset.
as “Int”. The following table shows the function of each
option. 8345 Slave
Preset item D. in ? setting
Clock Type
Reference clock Function
Ana. Not assigned
The reference clock is automatically selected Int. Vari Int Vari
Auto from among available clocks according to the adat adat ;Async
following order of priority; Word, Video and Ana. Not assigned
Int. Int. Free Int Free
adat adat ;Async
Int The 8346 references to the internal clock.
Ana. Not assigned
Word The 8346 references to an external word clock. Word Free Word Free
adat adat ;Async
Video The 8346 references to an external video clock.
Ana. Not assigned
Video Vari Video Vari
5. After selecting the reference clock, press the adat adat ;Async

[EXECUTE/YES] key. Ana. Not assigned

Video Free Video Free
The selected reference clock is confirmed (set) and the adat adat ;Async
display changes to the similar one to the upper example
in step 3 above where “?” flashes.
5. After selecting the preset, press the [EXECUTE/
6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] button) to YES] key.
The selected preset is confirmed (set) and the display
exit the SETUP mode.
changes to the similar one to the upper example in step
3 above where “?” flashes.

6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] button) to

exit the SETUP mode.

5
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

• "Virtual LTC?" menu setting • "Offset Disp?" menu setting

Execute step 1 and 2 in ""Ref. TC ?" menu setting" Execute step 1 and 2 in ""Ref. TC ?" menu setting"
described earlier. described earlier.

3. Select the “Virtual LTC?” menu by using the Jog 3. Select the “Offset Disp?” menu by using the Jog
dial and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. dial and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The current setting is flashing (the default setting when The current setting is flashing (the default setting when
the Model 8346 is installed is “Ena.” (enable)). the Model 8346 is installed is “Off”).

SETUP
SETUP

OL OL BIT 24
OL OL BIT 24 0 0
0 0 3 3
3 3 6 6 FS
6 6 FS 9 9
9 9 kHz
kHz 12 12
12 12 18 18 CLOCK
18 18 CLOCK 24 24
24 24 INT
INT 30 30
30 30 42 42
42 42 ∞ ∞
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing Flashing

SETUP SETUP

OL OL OL OL BIT 24
0 0
BIT 24 0 0
3 3 3 3
6 6 FS 6 6 FS
9 9 9 9 kHz
kHz 12 12
12 12
18 18 CLOCK 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT 24 24 INT
30 30 30 30
42 42 42 42
∞ ∞ ∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

4. Select “Off” or “On” by using the Jog dial.

4. Select “Ena.” or “Dis.” by using the Jog dial.
Selection Function
Selection Function

Ena. Off The real-offset value is not displayed.

Enables recording/playback of the virtual LTC.
(Enable)

Disables recording/playback of the virtual LTC. The real-offset value is displayed instead of the
This setting is used when you want to chase the REMAIN time when the time base is set to MTC
Dis. recorder using only the MTC offset setting, ignor- If you press the [STORE] key, the display shows
(Disable) ing the recorded LTC. “Catch Offset!” for a second, then changes to the
On
With this setting, the TIME CODE OUT terminal edit mode display of the chase offset which will
outputs MTC or LTC with the MTC offset. be explained in "GENERATOR Setup" later.
After editing the chase offset, pressing the [EX-
ECUTE/YES] key updates the real-offset value.
5. After selecting “Ena.” or “Dis.”, press the
[EXECUTE/YES] key. 5. After selecting “Off” or “On”, press the [EXECUTE/
6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] button) to YES] key.
exit the SETUP mode. 6. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] button) to
exit the SETUP mode.
<CAUTION>
Do not set the Virtual LTC to “Ena.” for a disc on which
data was recorded by the FDMS-3 Ver. 1.0 format using <CAUTION>
the machines such as D-160 and D108. When the power is turned off, the Offset Disp mode
Otherwise, it may cause malfunction because the FDMS- returns to the default setting (“Off”).
3 Ver. 1.0 does not support the Virtual LTC.

6
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

Generator Setup
By installing the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card into the recorder, the Generator Setup functions acti-
vate and the following features are available.

1. Recording/playback of external or internally generated time code

2. Force jam to external time code
3. Outputting the internally generated or recorded time code
4. Setting of the chase offset between external time code and MTC

How to enter the Generator Setup mode Setting the time code recording mode
1. Press the [SETUP] key while holding down the 1.Select “TC Gen.? Rec Run” of the Generator
[SHIFT] key. Setup mode and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
The recorder enters the Generator Setup mode in which The recording mode currently selected starts flashing,
the following menus are available. The display will show showing that you are now ready to select the desired
“TC Gen.?Rec Run” (the default) when you first select recording mode.
the Generator Setup mode. However, from the second H M S
GEN
F SF

time, the menu selected last time will appear. OL OL BIT 24

0 0
3 3
6 6 FS

By rotating the Jog dial, the menus of the Generator

9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30

Setup mode appear one after the other. 42

∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
42
∞

Flashing
GEN
H M S F SF

OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 Menu for setting the H M S
GEN
F SF
3 3

time code recording

6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK OL OL
24 24 INT 0 0
BIT 24

mode
30 30
42 42 3 3
∞ ∞ 6 6 FS
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

GEN
Menu for editing the
2.Use the Jog dial to display the desired recording
H M S F SF

OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24 time code of the in-
6
9
12
18
24
30
6
9
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
FS
kHz
ternal time code mode.
generator You can choose from 4 recording modes available.
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Recording mode Function

GEN
Time code that is continuous with the time
H M S F SF

OL OL
Menu for force jam- Rec Run code previously recorded will be recorded.
BIT 24

This mode is also useful to re-record a dis-

0 0
3
6
9
12
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz ming to external
18
24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT
time code continuous time code.
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Time code generated by the internal gen-
Free Run erator will be recorded.

GEN
Ext Run External time code will be recorded.
Display of internally
H M S F SF

OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS generated time code Time code generated by the internal gen-
9
12
18
24
30
9
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT
kHz
24H Run erator will be recorded from the current
time of the recorder's internal clock.
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

<CAUTION>
CHASE OFFSET
The 8346 does not record all time code information. It
records only the ABS time at the recording start point
H M S F SF

OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
Menu for selecting and the time code offset value. Therefore, if you record
9 9 kHz

the output time code

12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24
30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT
discontinuous time code in the middle, it cannot recog-
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

nize it. Also note that because the user's bit at the re-
cording start point is maintained, the 8346 cannot rec-
ognize user's bit change in the middle.
CHASE OFFSET
H M S F SF
Menu for editing the
OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
chase offset between 3. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key after selecting the
recording mode.
9 9 kHz
12
18
24
30
12
18
24
30
CLOCK
INT external time code
42 42

and MTC
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

<CAUTION>
When you create a new program using the program se-
lect function, the LTC with the same MTC offset (which
OL OL
Menu for erasing all you can see in the “MTC offset?” menu of the Setup mode)
0 0
BIT 24
3 3
the recorded time
as the current program is recorded in the new program.
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
code
Therefore, if you use the same LTC with the new pro-
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

gram, you do not need to re-record LTC.

7
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

<How to record time code> Flashing

After setting the time code recording mode de- GEN

scribed above, record time code by the follow-

H M S F SF

OL OL BIT 24

ing procedure. 0
3
6
9
12
0
3
6
9
12
FS
kHz
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞

1. Press the [EDIT] key while holding down the [SHIFT] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

key to turn TC READY on (the TC READY indicator

will flash). If the 8346 does not receive external time code correctly,
the warning message “Void LTC In!” appears when
2. Press the [PLAY] button while holding down the pressing the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
[RECORD] button (the TC READY indicator will light).
Unlike audio signal recording, you do not need
to arm a track for time code.
Selecting the output time code
Also note that recording time code does not con- When the time code recording mode (described
sume the hard disk space. above) is set to “Free Run” or “24H Run”, the 8346
To erase all the time code information, see "Eras- can output the internal generator time code or re-
ing the recorded time code" described later. corded time code. Note that it does not output time
code when the time code recording mode is set to
“Rec Run” or “Ext Run”.
Editing the internal generator time code
<CAUTION>
Editing the internal generator time code can be done • While time code is output, the recorder's vari pitch
only when the time code recording mode (described and word sync functions are prohibited.
above) is set to “Free Run”. Note that the time code output setting is available
only when an "Async" mode (“adat: Async” or
1. Select “Gen TC Set” of the Generator Setup mode “SPDIF: Async”) is selected in the “D. in?” menu of the
and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key. Setup mode.
The current internal generator time code is displayed Also note that if you execute a program change, etc.
and you are now ready to edit the time. the generator stops time code generation.

H M S
GEN
F SF
• The “TC Out Sel?” setting returns to the default
OL
0
OL
0
BIT 24 “Repro” when turning the power off.
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT

1. Select “TC Out Sel?” (“?” flashes) of the Generator

30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Setup mode and press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.

Flashing The current output setting flashes (the default setting is
GEN
“Repro”).
H M S F SF

OL OL BIT 24 GEN
0 0 H M S F SF
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK OL OL BIT 24
24 24 INT 0 0
30 30 3 3
42 42 6 6 FS
∞ ∞ 9 9 kHz
12 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

2. Use the Shuttle dial to move the editing point

Flashing
(which is flashing), and use the Jog dial to set the
numeric value. H M S
GEN
F SF

Up to 23H 59M 59S **F (** = current frame rate - 1) can OL

0
OL
0
BIT 24
3 3

be set. 6
9
12
6
9
12
FS
kHz
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞

3. After editing is completed, press the [EXECUTE/ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

YES] key.
2. Use the Jog dial to select “Repro” or “Gen.”.
The time code output from the [TIME CODE OUT]
Force jamming to external time code terminal changes according to the setting.

Force jamming to external time code can be done Output setting Output time code
only when the time code recording mode (described
above) is set to “Free Run”. Note that the following Repro Reproduced time code

description assumes that the 8346 is receiving ex-

ternal time code. Gen. Internal generator time code

1. Select “Force JAM” (“SURE?” flashes) of the 3. After the setting is completed, press the
Generator Setup mode and press the [EXECUTE/ [EXECUTE/YES] key.
YES] key.
The force jamming to the external time code starts and 4. Press the [EXIT/NO] key (or the [STOP] button) to
the display shows the time code value in real-time. exit the Generator Setup mode.

8
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

3. Use the Jog dial to trim the chase offset value.

Editing the chase offset By rotating the Jog dial, you can trim the chase offset
You can edit the chase offset value between exter- value in real-time in sub frame accuracy.
nal time code and MTC (LTC) time. However, if you exit the mode after the operation above
(by skipping step 4), the offset returns to the original
value. To make the new offset value effective, do not
Setting the chase offset value numerically forget step 4 below.

4. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key to confirm (set) the

1. Select “Chase Offset?” (“?” flashes) of the
offset value.
Generator Setup mode and press the [EXECUTE/
YES] key.
You are now ready to edit the chase offset value.
CHASE OFFSET
H M S F SF

OL
0
3
6
OL
0
3
6
BIT 24
FS
Erasing the recorded time code
9 9 kHz
12 12
18
24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT You can erase the recorded time code only while
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 the recorder is stopped.

Flashing 1. Select “TC All Erase?” (where “?” flashes) of the

Generator Setup mode and press the [EXECUTE/
CHASE OFFSET
H M S F SF
YES] key.
OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24
FS
“?” disappears and “SURE?” starts flashing.
6 6
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12

2. Use the Shuttle dial to move the editing point 18

24
30
42
18
24
30
42
CLOCK
INT

∞ ∞

(which is flashing), and use the Jog dial to set the 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

desired value.
The offset value can be set between “-12H 00M 00S **F Flashing
00SF” and “11H 59M 59S **F 99SF” (where ** depends on SURE?

the current frame rate set by the “Frame Rate?” menu of

the Setup mode). OL
0
3
OL
0
3
BIT 24

6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK

3. After editing is completed, press the [EXECUTE/ 24

30
42
∞
24
30
42
∞
INT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
YES] key.
The edited value becomes valid and the display changes
to the similar one to the upper example in step 1 above
where “?” flashes.
2. Press the [EXECUTE/YES] key.
All the recorded time code is erased and the time code
set by the MTC offset will become effective (from ABS 0
Trimming of the chase offset value to 24H).
If this trimming is carried out in the chase locked
state, offset can then be set in real time and is thus
very effective.

1. Select “Trim?” (where “?” flashes) of the

Generator Setup mode and press the [EXECUTE/
YES] key.
The display will show something like below, and now
you are ready to trim the chase offset value.
CHASE OFFSET
H M S F SF

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Flashing

CHASE OFFSET
H M S F SF

OL OL BIT 24
0 0
3 3
6 6 FS
9 9 kHz
12 12
18 18 CLOCK
24 24 INT
30 30
42 42
∞ ∞
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

9
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

Chase sync to external time code

The recorder with the Model 8346 installed can synchronize to incoming LTC by receiving the
external LTC via the recorder's [TIME CODE INPUT] terminal and setting the recorder's slave mode to
On.

Analog Mixer

Audio Signal
Audio Signal

VIDEO SYNC
TC

VIDEO SYNC

HOUSE SYNC VTR

Connection Time code display

In this example, the recorder with the 8346 is a slave You can monitor the incoming time code in the
while the VTR is a master. Feed the time code from D2424LV display window.
the VTR to the TIME CODE INPUT terminal of the
1. Press the [DISP SEL] key while holding down the
recorder with the Model 8346 to play the recorder
[SHIFT] key to select “MTC”.
in sync with the VTR. Also feed the video reference
The display will show the current MTC offset value (the
signal to both the VTR and recorder as shown above. default setting is "00H 59M 57S 00F").

2. While “MTC” is selected, press the DISP SEL key

Recorder settings to select the time code display.
1. Select the program to be played back. When the recorder is receiving LTC, the display shows
the incoming LTC while “TC IN” lights in the display.
2. Set the reference time code to “LTC” by using the
“Ref. TC?” menu of the Setup mode. Synchronization with the VTR
3. Set the recorder's frame rate to the same rate as 1. Start playback of the VTR.
the incoming time code by the “Frame Rate ?” If an offset value is set, the recorder will start playback,
menu of the Setup mode. chasing the time code from the VTR with maintaining
The “Frame Rate?” menu of the Setup mode allows you the offset.
to select the desired frame rate from 24, 25, 29nd, 29df,
30nd and 30df. <CAUTION>
• The recorder can chase incoming time code within
4. Set the slave mode to ON by pressing the the range of continuously recorded time code.
[EXECUTE/YES] key while holding down the If there is a discontinuity in the recorded time code,
when incoming time code runs across the
[SHIFT] key. discontinuous point, “Out of Zone!” will appear in the
display and the recorder may stop chasing.
5. Set the desired offset value by the “MTC OFFSET?” If the time code corresponding to the incoming time
menu of the Setup mode. code is recorded in a different area, play the recorder
By setting the desired offset value, the recorder will run to that area.
with the offset between the VTR and recorder.
• You can locate the recorder to the beginning of a
After all settings above are completed, press [EXIT/ discontinuous time code by pressing the [NEXT] or
NO] key (or the [STOP] button) to exit the Setup mode. [PREV] key while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

10
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

Synchronization to word clock or video signal

The recorder with the Model 8346 installed can synchronize to an external sync signal such as word
clock and video composite signal.

Analog Mixer

Audio Signal Audio Signal

VIDEO SYNC

WORD SYNC

External Device

Connection <CAUTION>
If you use word clock as the reference clock, the sam-
In this example, according to the external device, pling frequencies of the external device and the re-
feed video or word sync signal to the WORD INPUT corder must match.
or VIDEO INPUT terminal of the recorder. Because the sampling frequency of the recorder is set
when formatting the disk, make sure of the sampling
frequency of the external device before you start work-
Recorder's settings ing.

1. Select the program to be played back.

2. Set the reference clock to “Word” or “Video”
according to the incoming sync signal by using
the “Clock Sel?” menu of the Setup mode.

11
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

Connection to a digital mixing console

The recorder with the Model 8346 installed can connect to a digital mixing console and record an
adat digital signal from the console.
In this example, the recorder receives external LTC from a VTR, etc., locks to the time code, and
returns the locking information to the digital mixing console via the digital mixer. In this process,
the digital console outputs the adat digital signal to the recorder with the timing in sync with the
receiving word clock. See the connection example on the next page.

VTR

LTC

adat adat
WORD SYNC

DATA OUTPUT DATA INPUT WORD INPUT

Digital Mixer

Recorder's settings Digital mixing console's settings

1. Set the preset to “Int. Vari adat” by using the 1. Set the clock source of the digital mixing console
“Sync Preset?” menu of the Setup mode. to “WORD” and the input to “Adat”.
By selecting “Int. Vari adat”, the recorder is set as follows.

Digital signal -> adat: Async

Reference clock -> Int (internal)
Slave type -> Vari

2. Set the reference time code to “LTC” by using the

“Ref TC?” menu of the Setup mode.

12
 APPENDIX (Operation manual for the recorder with the Model 8346 TC/SYNC card installed)

Control from a video editor (RS-422)

The recorder with the Model 8346 installed can be used for audio editing for video using a video
editor. Connect a video editor to the recorder's REMOTE IN (RS-422) terminal, as well as connect a
video sync signal to the recorder, video editor and VTR as the reference signal. With this connec-
tion example, you can edit audio for video by controlling the VTR and recorder from the video
editor.

HOUSE SYNC

VIDEO SYNC VIDEO SYNC

RS-422
Video Editor VTR

VIDEO SYNC
RS-422

AUDIO

adat adat WORD

Digital Mixer

Recorder's settings <CAUTION>

Most popular video editors can be used with the re-
1. Set the preset to “Video Free adat” by using the corder/8346, however, we cannot guarantee that all
“Sync Preset?” menu of the Setup mode. video editors can be used or all functions work cor-
By selecting “Video Free adat”, the recorder is set as rectly (also note that the recorder/8346 does not sup-
follows. port audio editors). We recommend to check whether
functions work correctly or inquire to the manufac-
Digital signal -> adat: Async turer/dealer of an editor before using/purchasing.
Reference clock -> Video Also refer to the "Basic parameter settings for editors"
below when using an editor.
Slave type -> Free
<Basic parameter settings for editor>
We recommend to set editor parameters as shown be-
low when controlling the recorder. Note that these set-
Digital mixing console's settings tings are just for reference and we cannot guarantee
all functions work correctly with the settings.
1. Set the reference clock of the digital mixing
console to “WORD”. • Preroll time: more than 5 seconds
• Edit delay: 0 frame
• EE delay: 0 frame
• Over run: 0 frame
• Trajectory: "Cue with Data command" is recommended
• Start delay: 0 frame (depending on editors)

13
 Declaration of EC Directive
This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) - Directive on approximation of member
nation's ordinance concerning the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC)
- Directive on approximation of member nation's ordinance concerning electric equipment designed to be used
within the specified voltage range.

The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment

The affect of the European Specification EN50082-1 (coexistence of electromagnetic waves - common
immunity specification) on this equipment are as shown below.
In the electrical fast transient/burst requirements, surge, conducted disturbances by radio-frequency fields, power
frequency magnetic field, radiate electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging environment,
this could be affected by generation of noise in some cases.

FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST IN EUROPE

* Including non-EU countries (as of January, 2002)

<AUSTRIA> <THE NETHERLANDS>

NAME: ATEC Audio-u. Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH. NAME: IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B. V.
ADD: Im Winkel 5, A-2325 Velm, Austria ADD: Kuiperbergweg 20, 1101 AG Amsterdam, The
TEL: (+43) 2234-74004, FAX: (+43) 2234-74074 Netherlands
TEL: (+31) 20-697-2121, FAX: (+31) 20-697-4201
<BELGIUM>
NAME: EML Sound Industries NV <NORWAY>
ADD: Bijvennestraat 1A, B3500 Hasselt, Belgium NAME: Siv. Ing. Benum A/S
TEL: (+32) 11-232355, FAX: (+32) 11-232172 ADD: P. O. Box 145 Vinderen, 0319 Oslo 3, Norway
TEL: (+47) 22-139900, FAX: (+47) 22-148259
<DENMARK>
NAME: SC Sound ApS <PORTUGAL>
ADD: Malervej 2, DK-2630 Taastrup, Denmark NAME: Caius - Tecnologias Audio e Musica, Lda.
TEL: (+45) 4399-8877, FAX: (+45) 4399-8077 ADD: Rua de Santa Catarina, 131 4000 Porto, Portugal
TEL: (+351) 2-2086009/2001394,
<FINLAND> FAX: (+351) 2-2054760/2087488
NAME: Noretron Oy Audio
ADD: P. O. Box 22, FIN-02631 Espoo, Finland <SPAIN>
TEL: (+358) 9-5259330, FAX: (+358) 9-52593352 NAME: Multitracker, S. A.
ADD: C/Garcilaso No.9, Madrid 28010, Spain
<FRANCE> TEL: (+34) 91-4470700, 91-4470898, FAX: (+34) 91-5930716
NAME: Guillard Musiques
ADD: ZAC de Folliouses, B. P. 609, Les Echets, 01706 Miribel, <SWEDEN>
France NAME: TTS Scandinavia AB
TEL: (+33) 472 26 27 00, FAX: (+33) 472 26 27 01 ADD: Kavallerivagen 24, 172 48 Sundbyberg, Sweden
TEL: (+46) 8-59798000, FAX: (+46) 8-59798001
<GERMANY>
NAME: Studiosound & Music GmbH <SWITZERLAND>
ADD: Industriestrasse 20, D-35041 Marburg, F. R. Germany NAME: Audio Bauer Pro AG
TEL: (+49) 6421-92510, FAX: (+49) 6421-925119 ADD: Bernerstrasse-Nord 182, CH-8064 Zurich, Switzerland
TEL: (+41) 1-4323230, FAX: (+41) 1-4326558
<GREECE>
NAME: Bon Studio S. A. <UK>
ADD: 6 Zaimi Street, Exarchia, 106.83 Athens, Greece NAME: SCV London
TEL: (+30) 1-3809605-8, 3302059, FAX: (+30) 1-3845755 ADD: 40 Chigwell Lane, Oakwood Hill Industrial Estate,
Loughton, Essex IG10 3NY U. K.
<ICELAND> TEL: (+44) 020-8418-0778, FAX: (+44) 020-8418-0624
NAME: I. D. elrf. electronic Ltd.
ADD: ARMULA 38 108 REYKJAVIK, ICELAND
TEL: (+354) 588 5010, FAX: (+354) 588 5011

<ITALY>
NAME: Proel S. p. A.
ADD: Zona Artigianale 64047 - Sant'Omero (Teramo), Italy
TEL: (+39) 0861-81241, FAX: (+39) 0861-887862
FOSTEX CORPORATION
3-2-35 Musashino, Akishima-shi, Tokyo, Japan 196-0021

FOSTEX AMERICA
15431, Blackburn Ave., Norwalk, CA 90650, U. S. A.

© PRINTED IN JAPAN JAN. 2002 8288 488 000 FX